OPERATOR’S MANUAL

T6020
T6030
T6040
T6050
T6060
T6070
Elite

Print No. 84146211

2nd edition
English 08/08
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
T6020
T6030
T6040
T6050
T6060
T6070
Elite

Print No. 84146211

2nd edition
English 08/08
 CONTENTS

Title Page

Section 1 -- General Information and Safety

To the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--3
Ecology and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--8
Safety Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--16
International Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--22
Airborne Noise Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--23

Section 2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation

Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--26
Handbrake, Throttle and Foot Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--31
Instrument Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--33
Analogue/Digital Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--36
Electro Command Transmission (16 x 16 and 17 x 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--65
Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--82

Section 3 -- Field Operation

Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--2
Using Jump Leads (Booster Cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
Stopping the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11
Engine Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13
Fast Steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--28
Rear Power Take--Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--30
Front Power Take--Off and Hydraulic Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--51
Electronic Draft Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--59
Headland Turn Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--16
Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--71
Electro--Hydraulic Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--81
Additional Oil Supply for Remote Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--93
Using Remote Hydraulic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--95
Three--point Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--97
Quick Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--104
Linkage Stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--106
Drawbars and Towing Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--111
Hydraulic Trailer Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--128
Air-Operated Trailer Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--130
Front Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--135
Rear Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--141
Ballasting and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--148
Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
Guard Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--7
Lubrication and Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--12
Servicing: When Warning Lights Illuminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--14
10--hour/daily service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--18
50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--20
100--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--31
300--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--31
600--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--35
1200--hour/12 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--42
1200--hour/24 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--49
Every 3 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--55
General Maintenance -- as required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--56
Protecting the electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--72
Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--73

Section 5 -- Fault Finding

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--2
Transmission -- 16 x 16 (17 x 16) Electro Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--6
Three-point lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9

Section 6 -- Accessories
Auxiliary Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2
Battery Isolator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2
Loader Subframe and Control Valve (Joystick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--3
Section 7 -- Specification
General Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2
Vehicle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
Lubricant and Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--11
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--12
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--12
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--13
Transmission Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--13
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14
Rear Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14
Front Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
Maximum Operating Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--16
Rear Three-Point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--16
Remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--19
Front Three-Point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--19
Front Remote Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--20
Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--20
Hardware Torque Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--21

Section 8 -- First 50--hour Service Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1

Section 9 -- Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1

BLANK
 SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

TO THE OWNER CLEANING THE TRACTOR

GENERAL Your tractor is a state-of-the-art machine with

sophisticated, electronic controls. This should be
This Manual has been prepared to assist you in the borne in mind when cleaning the tractor, particularly
correct procedure for running--in, driving and if using a high pressure washer. Even though every
operating and for the maintenance of your new precaution has been taken to safeguard electronic
tractor. Read this Manual carefully. Your tractor is components and connections, the pressure
intended for use in normal and customary generated by some of these machines is such that
agricultural applications. complete protection against water ingress cannot be
guaranteed.
If at any time you require advice concerning your
tractor, do not hesitate to contact your authorised When using a high pressure washer, do not stand too
dealer. He has factory trained personnel, genuine close to the tractor and avoid directing the jet at
manufacturers’ parts and the necessary equipment electronic components, electrical connections,
to carry out all your service requirements. breathers, seals, filler caps, etc. Never direct a cold
water jet at a hot engine or exhaust.
Your tractor has been designed and built to give
maximum performance, economy and ease of ELECTRO-MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMC)
operation under a wide variety of operating
conditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was carefully This tractor complies strictly with the European
inspected, both at the factory and by your dealer to Regulations on electro-magnetic emissions.
ensure that it reaches you in optimum condition. To However, interference may arise as a result of
maintain this condition and ensure trouble--free add-on equipment which may not necessarily meet
operation, it is important that the routine services, as the required standards. As such interference can
specified in Section 4 of this Manual, are carried out result in serious malfunction of the unit and/or create
at the recommended intervals. unsafe situations, you must observe the following:

OPERATORS MANUAL STORAGE • Ensure that each piece of non-New Holland

equipment fitted to the tractor bears the CE mark.
A storage pocket for the Operators Manual can be
found on the rear of the seat. The manual should be • The maximum power of emission equipment
kept in this pocket at all times when not in use. (radio, telephones, etc.) must not exceed the
limits imposed by the national authorities of the
SAFETY country where you use the tractor.

Pages 1--8 to 1--15 inclusive list the precautions to • The electro-magnetic field generated by the
be observed to ensure your safety and the safety of add-on system should not exceed 24 V/m at any
others. Read the safety precautions and follow the time and at any location in the proximity of
advice offered before operating the tractor. electronic components.

Failure to comply with these rules will render the New

Holland warranty null and void.

1--1
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE

In Section 8, at the back of this Manual, you will find

the 50--hour service reports.

After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, take

your tractor, together with this Manual, to your dealer.
He will then perform the factory recommended 50
hour service and complete the service report sheets
(pages 8--1 and 8--3). The first sheet (page 8--1) is the
dealer’s copy and should be removed by the dealer
after the service has been carried out. The second
sheet (page 8--3) is your copy of the service
performed. Ensure that you and the dealer sign
both copies.

SERVICE PARTS

It should be pointed out that genuine parts have been

examined and approved by the Company. The
installation and/or use of ‘non-genuine’ products
could have negative effects upon the design
characteristics of your tractor and thereby affect it’s
safety. The Company is not liable for any damage
caused by the use of ‘non--genuine’ parts and
accessories. Only genuine New Holland
replacement parts should be used. The use of
non-genuine parts may invalidate legal approvals
associated with this product.

It is prohibited to carry out any modifications to the

tractor unless specifically authorised, in writing, by
the After Sales Service department of the Company.

WARRANTY

Your tractor is warranted according to legal rights in

your country and the contractual agreement with the
selling dealer. No warranty shall, however, apply if
the tractor has not been used, adjusted and
maintained according to the instructions given in the
Operator’s Manual.

1--2
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The tractor and major components are identified
using serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes.
Tractor identification data must be supplied to the
dealer when requesting parts or service and will also
be needed to aid in identifying the tractor if it is ever
stolen. 1

The following provides the locations of the

identification data.

1
Vehicle Identification Plate

The vehicle identification plate, (1) Figure 1 is

located on the left-hand radiator support. Record the
information on the sample identification plate
provided below.

Tractor Identification

The serial number and model identification

information is stamped on the top of the front support
(1). These numbers are also repeated on the vehicle
identification plate reproduced above.

1--3
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

Engine Information

The engine serial number and date of manufacture

are stamped on the right--hand side of engine block
(1), below the manifold. Record the number below.

Engine Serial No.

The engine serial number is repeated on the

information plate located on the left side of the engine
oil pan.

Further information relating to engine adjustments

and emission level compliance are also shown on the
engine information plate.

NOTE: The details displayed on the engine

information plate may change according to the
country in which the tractor is sold.

1--4
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

Driveline Identification

The serial number plate (1) is located on top of the

transmission casing. Access to the number can be
gained by removing the plate in the floor of the cab
as shown in the illustration. This number is repeated
on the vehicle identification plate. Record the
information below for quick reference.

Driveline Serial No.

Cab Identification

The cab serial number and other information is on the

OECD certification plate. This plate can be found on
the right--hand side of the cab trim panel, below the
rear window. Record the cab serial number below for
quick reference. 7

Cab Serial No.

1--5
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

TRANSPORTING TOWED EQUIPMENT AT SAFE SPEEDS

Product Identification Number Plate

The Product Identification Number plate provides

important information on tractor and towed
equipment weight combinations. This plate can be
found on the right--hand side of the cab exterior trim
panel, below the rear window.

The figures shown are the maximum permissible

vehicle and towing weights and should not be
exceeded, to do so may affect the safe operation of
the tractor. See Drawbars and Towing Attachments
in Section 3.
8

1--6
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Soil, air and water are vital factors of agriculture and 4. Avoid spillage when draining off used engine
life in general. Where legislation does not yet rule the coolant mixtures, engine, gearbox and hydraulic
treatment of some of the substances which are oils, brake fluids, etc. Do not mix drained brake
required by advanced technology, common sense fluids or fuels with lubricants. Store them safely
should govern the use and disposal of products of a until they can be disposed of in a proper way to
chemical and petrochemical nature. comply with local legislation and available
resources.
The following are recommendations which may be of
assistance: 5. Modern coolant mixtures, i.e. antifreeze and
other additives, should be replaced every two
• Become acquainted with and ensure that you years. They should not be allowed to get into the
understand the relative legislation applicable to soil but should be collected and disposed of
your country. safely.

• Where no legislation exists, obtain information 6. Do not open the air-conditioning system yourself.
from suppliers of oils, filters, batteries, fuels, anti It contains gases which should not be released
freeze, cleaning agents, etc., with regard to their into the atmosphere. Your dealer or air
effect on man and nature and how to safely store, conditioning specialist has a special extractor for
use and dispose of these substances. this purpose and will have to recharge the system
Agricultural consultants will, in many cases, be anyway.
able to help you as well.

7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling

HELPFUL HINTS
or hydraulic system immediately.

1. Avoid filling tanks using unsuitable containers or 8. Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised
inappropriate pressurised fuel delivery systems circuit as this may lead to the components
which may cause considerable spillage. exploding.

2. In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils, 9. Protect hoses during welding as penetrating
acids, solvents, etc. Most of them contain weld splatter may burn a hole or weaken them,
substances which can be harmful to your health. causing the loss of oils, coolant, etc.

3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn

contaminated fuels and/or waste oils in ordinary
heating systems.

1--7
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A careful operator is the best operator. Most accidents THE TRACTOR
can be avoided by observing certain precautions. To
help prevent accidents, read and take the following 1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before
precautions before driving, operating or servicing the using the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge
tractor. Equipment should be operated only by those can lead to accidents.
who are responsible and instructed to do so.
2. Only allow properly trained and qualified persons
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS to operate the tractor.

Throughout this Manual you will see text, preceded 3. To prevent falls, use the handrails and step plates
by the words NOTE, ATTENTION, IMPORTANT, when getting on and off the tractor. Keep steps
CAUTION, WARNING or DANGER. Such text has and platform clear of mud and debris.
the following significance:
4. Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety
MACHINE SAFETY decals.

NOTE: This text stresses a correct operating 5. Keep safety decals free of dirt or grime.
technique or procedure.

ATTENTION: This text warns the operator of potential

machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.

IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of

something that he needs to know to prevent minor
machine damage if a certain procedure is not
followed.

PERSONAL SAFETY

CAUTION
The word CAUTION is used where a safe
behavioural practice, according to operating and
maintenance instructions and common safety 6. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on
practices will protect the operator and others from the tractor except for driver training or instruction.
accident involvement. When used for these purposes an additional seat
may be fitted in the cab. Passengers should not
be carried on the tractor at any time.
WARNING
The word WARNING denotes a potential or hidden 7. Keep children away from the tractor and farm
hazard which could possibly cause serious injury. It machinery at all times.
is used to warn operators and others to exercise due
care and attention to avoid a surprise accident with
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to
machinery.
modify or alter the tractor or any of its
components or any tractor function without first
consulting your dealer.
DANGER
The word DANGER denotes a forbidden practice in
9. Install all guards before starting the engine or
connection with a serious hazard.
operating the tractor.

Failure to follow the CAUTION, WARNING and

DANGER instructions may result in serious bodily
injury or even death.

1--8
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

DRIVING THE TRACTOR

1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or

driving the tractor.

2. When driving on public roads, have

consideration for other road users. Pull in to the
side of the road occasionally to allow any
following traffic to pass. Do not exceed the legal
speed limit set in your country for agricultural
tractors.

3. Use a rotating beacon and/or Slow Moving

Vehicle warning when driving on public roads to
indicate that the vehicle is slow moving and is a 8. Keep the tractor in the same gear when going
possible hazard. downhill as would be used when going uphill. Do
not coast or freewheel down hills.
4. Dip the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at
9. For safe operation any towed vehicle whose total
night. Make sure the lights are adjusted to
weight exceeds that of the towing tractor must be
prevent blinding the driver of an oncoming
equipped with a braking system that complies
vehicle.
with the legal requirements of that country.

5. Reduce speed before turning or applying the 10. Never apply the differential lock when turning.
brakes. Brake both wheels simultaneously when When engaged, the differential lock will prevent
making an emergency stop. Ensure that both the tractor from turning.
brake pedals are locked together when travelling
at road speeds or when on public roads to ensure 11. Always check overhead clearance, especially
correct operation of trailer brakes, balanced when transporting the tractor. Watch where you
operation of the tractor brakes and four wheel are going, especially at row ends, on roads and
braking (4WD tractors only). around trees and low overhanging obstacles.

12. To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and

at speeds compatible with safety, especially
when operating over rough ground, when
crossing ditches or slopes and when turning
corners.

6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the front

axle is automatically engaged, to provide four
wheel braking, when both footbrakes are
applied. Owners should be aware of the
effectiveness of four wheel braking which greatly 13. Use extreme caution when operating on steep
enhances braking performance. Appropriate slopes.
care should be exercised during fierce braking.
14. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tyres are
7. Use extreme caution and avoid hard application frozen to the ground, reverse the tractor out to
of the tractor brakes when towing heavy loads at prevent overturning.
road speeds.

1--9
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

OPERATING THE TRACTOR

1. Apply the parking brake, place the P.T.O. control

in the ‘OFF’ position, the lift control lever in the
down position, the remote control valve levers in
the neutral position and the transmission levers
in neutral before starting the tractor.

2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other

than externally located hydraulic lift or P.T.O.
switches, if fitted) while standing beside the
tractor. Always sit in the tractor seat when
starting the engine or operating the controls.

3. Do not bypass the transmission and P.T.O. 8. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.
neutral start switches. Consult your authorised
dealer if your neutral start controls malfunction. 9. The cab is designed to provide the minimum
Use jump leads only in the recommended noise level at the operator’s ears and meets or
manner. Improper use can result in a tractor exceeds applicable standards in this respect.
runaway. However, noise (sound pressure level) in the
workplace can exceed 85 dB(A) when working
between buildings or in confined spaces, with
cab windows open. Therefore, it is
recommended that operators wear suitable ear
protectors when operating in high noise level
conditions.

4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift levers

while the engine is running. Unexpected tractor
movement can result from such contact.

5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.

6. If the power steering or engine ceases operating,

stop the tractor immediately as the tractor will be 10. Do not run the tractor engine in an enclosed
more difficult to control. building without adequate ventilation. Exhaust
fumes are toxic and can cause death.
7. Before leaving the tractor, park the tractor on 11. Pull only from the pick-up hitch, swinging
level ground, apply the parking brake, lower drawbar or the lower link drawbar in the lowered
attached implements to the ground, disengage position. Use only a drawbar pin that locks in
the P.T.O. and stop the engine. place. Pulling from the tractor rear axle or any
point above the axle may cause the tractor to
overturn.

1--10
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

12. Always select Position Control when attaching OPERATING THE P.T.O.
equipment and when transporting equipment. Be
sure hydraulic couplers are properly mounted 1. When operating P.T.O.- driven equipment, shut
and will disconnect safely in case of accidental off the engine, switch off the P.T.O. and wait until
detachment of the implement. the P.T.O. stops before getting off the tractor and
disconnecting the equipment.

13. If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when

heavy implements are attached to the 2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the
three--point hitch, install front end or front wheel power take-off or especially when near rotating
weights. Do not operate the tractor with a light equipment.
front end.
3. When operating stationary P.T.O.-driven
14. Engage the clutch slowly when driving out of a equipment, always apply the tractor parking
ditch, gully or up a steep hillside. Disengage the brake and block the rear wheels front and back.
clutch promptly if the front wheels rise off the
ground.

15. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories

are correctly installed, are approved for use with
the tractor, do not overload the tractor and are
operated and maintained in accordance with the
instructions issued by the equipment or
accessory manufacturer.

16. Remember that your tractor, if abused or

incorrectly used, can be dangerous and become
a hazard both to the operator and to bystanders.
Do not overload or operate with attached
equipment which is unsafe, not designed for the
particular task or is poorly maintained.
4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclog or
17. Do not leave equipment in the raised position service P.T.O. driven equipment when the tractor
when the vehicle is stopped or unattended. engine is running. Ensure that the P.T.O. is
switched off.
18. Do not drive equipment near open fires.
5. Make sure the P.T.O. guard is in position at all
times and always replace the P.T.O. cap when
19. Always wear a protective mask when working
with toxic spray chemicals. Follow the directions the P.T.O. is not in use.
on the chemical container.

1--11
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

SERVICING THE TRACTOR Unqualified persons should not remove or

attempt to adjust a pump, injector, nozzle or any
other part of the fuel injection or hydraulic
systems. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in serious injury.

• Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a

piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.

• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before

connecting or disconnecting lines.

1. The cooling system operates under pressure

which is controlled by the expansion tank cap. It
is dangerous to remove the cap while the system
is hot. Always turn the cap slowly to the first stop
and allow the pressure to escape before
removing the cap entirely. Never remove the cap
from the top of the radiator unless the expansion
tank pressure cap has first been removed.

2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep

any type of open flame away. • Tighten all connections before starting the
engine or pressurising lines.
3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly
brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable and • If fluid is injected into the skin obtain medical
satisfactory condition to ensure your safety and attention immediately or gangrene may result.
comply with legal requirements.
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to
4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep open flames modify or alter the tractor or any of its
away from battery or cold weather starting aids. components or any tractor function without first
To prevent sparks which could cause explosion, consulting an authorised dealer.
use jumper cables according to instructions.
9. Continuous long term contact with used engine
5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioning oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged
system. It is possible to be severely frost bitten or contact with used engine oil. Wash skin promptly
injured by escaping refrigerant. Special with soap and water.
equipment and instruments are required to
service the air conditioning system. See your
10. Keep equipment clean and properly maintained.
authorised dealer for service.
11. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters
6. Stop the engine before performing any service
properly.
on the tractor.
12. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care
7. Hydraulic fluid and fuel oil in the injection system
and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple
operate under high pressure. Escaping hydraulic
and cause injury.
fluid or fuel oil under pressure can penetrate the
skin causing serious injury.

1--12
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

PREVENTION OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION 5. Sparks from the electrical system or engine

exhaust can cause an explosion and fire. Before
1. Due to the flammable nature of some crop you operate the tractor in an area with flammable
materials, the risk of tractor fire can be high. This dust or vapours, use a good ventilation system
risk can be minimised by frequent removal of the remove the flammable dust or vapours.
accumulated crop material from the tractor. If oil
leaks appear, correct the fault by re--torquing the 6. Use a non flammable cleaning solvent when
bolts or replacing the gaskets as necessary. cleaning parts on the tractor.

2. When operating in flammable crop conditions, 7. A fire can cause injury or death. It is advisable to
check and remove all trash or debris from the have a fire extinguisher near or on the tractor
tractor each day, especially around the engine when operating in conditions where a fire may
area and exhaust system. occur. Ensure fire extinguishers are serviced
according to the manufacturers instructions.

8. If a fire extinguisher has been used, always

recharge or replace the extinguisher before
operating the tractor in conditions where a fire
may occur.

9. DO NOT store flammable materials (oil soaked

rags etc.) on the tractor.

3. Sparks or open flame can cause the hydrogen

gas in a battery to explode. To prevent an
explosion carry out the following:

• When disconnecting the battery cables, remove

the negative (--) cable first. When re--connecting
the battery cables, connect the negative (--) cable
last.
• When using jumper cables to start the engine,
use only the procedure shown in Section 3 of this
manual.

• Do not short circuit the battery terminals with a

metal object.
• Do not weld, grind or smoke near a battery.

4. Periodically check the tractor electrical system

for loose connections or frayed insulation. Repair
or replace any damaged parts.

1--13
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

DIESEL FUEL

1. Under no circumstances should gasoline,

alcohol or blended fuels be added to diesel fuel.
These combinations can create an increased fire
or explosive hazard. In a closed container such
as a fuel tank these blends are more explosive
than pure gasoline. Do not use these blends.

2. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the

engine running or hot.

3. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor or when

standing near fuel. Keep any type of open flame
away.

4. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle when

filling the tank.

5. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Fill only to the

bottom of the filler neck to allow room for
expansion.

6. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.

7. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.

8. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with

an approved cap. A non--approved cap may not
be safe.

9. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.

10. Arrange fuel purchases so that summer grade

fuels are not held over and used in the winter.

WHENEVER YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL IT MEANS: ATTENTION!

BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!

1--14
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE

WARNING
Your machine is equipped with an operator
Protective Structure, such as: a Roll Over Protective
Structure (ROPS) or Falling Object Protective
Structure (FOPS) or Cab with ROPS. A ROPS may
be a cab frame or a two--posted or four--posted
structure used for the protection of the operator to
minimise the possibility of serious injury.
The Protective Structure is a special safety
component of your machine.
DO NOT attach any device to the Protective
Structure for pulling purposes. DO NOT drill holes to
the Protective Structure.
The Protective Structure and interconnecting
components are a certified system. Any damage,
fire, corrosion or modification will weaken the
structure and reduce your protection. If this occurs,
the Protective Structure MUST be replaced so that
it will provide the same protection as a new Protective
Structure. Contact your dealer for Protective
Structure inspection and replacement.
After an accident, fire, tip or roll over, the following
MUST be performed by a qualified technician before
returning the machine to field or job site operation.

• The Protective Structure MUST be replaced.

• The mounting or suspension for the Protective

Structure, operator seat and suspension, seat
belts and mounting components and wiring
within the operator’s protective system MUST be
carefully inspected for damage.

• All damaged parts MUST be replaced.

DO NOT WELD, DRILL HOLES, ATTEMPT TO

STRAIGHTEN OR REPAIR THE PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURE. MODIFICATION IN ANY WAY CAN
REDUCE THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF THE
STRUCTURE WHICH COULD CAUSE DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY IN THE EVENT OF FIRE, TIP,
ROLL OVER, COLLISION OR ACCIDENT.

1--15
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

SAFETY DECALS
The decals reproduced on the following pages were installed on your tractor in the positions indicated in the drawings
below. They are intended for your safety and for those working with you. Please take this Manual and walk around
your tractor, noting the location of the decals and their significance. Review the decals and operating instructions
detailed in this Manual with the machine operators. Keep the decals clean and legible. If they become damaged or
illegible, obtain replacements from your authorised dealer.

1--16
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

1. Location:
Left and right-hand side of fan guard

To prevent serious injury, keep hands and clothing

away from rotating fan and drive belt.

Part No. 81871830

2. Location:
Left and right--hand side of radiator

Warning! Pressurised cooling system. Allow to cool

then remove cap carefully. Using a cloth, turn cap to
the first stop and allow pressure to subside before
removing cap completely.

Part No. 5194556

3. Location:
Radar sensor mounting bracket

To avoid possible eye damage from micro-wave

signals emitted by the radar sensor, do not look
directly into the sensor face.

Part No. 82002071

1--17
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

4. Location:
Top of battery

Danger! Corrosive acid. Explosive gas. Wear eye

protection. Avoid producing sparks. See Operator’s
Manual.

5. Location:
Right--hand ’A’ pillar inside cab

Warning! De--activate Fast Steer system before

travelling on the highway. Read Operator’s Manual.

Part No. 87331567

6. Location:
Front of right--hand control console

Caution! Always use grab handles when entering or

leaving the platform/cab

Part No. 81871702

1--18
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

7. Location:
Hydraulic accumulator/s

Caution! High pressure hydraulic/gas accumulator.

Follow service manual instructions for removal or
repair.

Part No. 82029751

NOTE: The number and position of the hydraulic

accumulators may change according to tractor
specification.

8. Location:
Rear of both fenders (with external power
controls only)

To avoid injury, do not stand on the implement or

between the implement and tractor while operating
the external lift or P.T.O. controls.

Part No. 83982553

9. Location:
Parking Brake Lever

Read the Operator’s Manual.

1--19
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

10.Location:
Left--hand ‘A’ pillar inside the cab

Multi--function decal

General Warning.
Read and understand all the warning notes printed in
the Operator’s Manual. In particular, read the
General Information and Safety section in the
Operator’s Manual.

Towing the Tractor.

Caution! Rear the Operator’s Manual before
attempting to tow the tractor.

In an Overturn.
In an overturn, hold on tightly to the steering wheel.
Do not attempt to jump out.

Part No. 87345805

11.Location:
Left--hand ‘A’ pillar inside the cab

12.Location:
Top of toolbox

Do not stand on toolbox.

Part No. 82010947

1--20
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

13.Location:
Air conditioning compressor

Warning! Fluid under pressure, do not disconnect

any lines. Read Operator’s Manual.

Part No. 83946774

14.Location:
Left--hand side of radiator

Warning! Heater Grid cold start aid. Do not use ether

or risk of explosion will occur.

Part No. 87802167

1--21
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
As a guide to the operation of your tractor, various universal symbols have been utilised on the instruments,
controls, switches, and fuse box. The symbols are shown below with an indication of their meaning.

Thermostart Radio P.T.O. Position

starting aid Control
Keep alive Draft
Alternator memory N Transmission Control
KAM
charge in neutral

Accessory
Turn signals Creeper socket
Fuel level gears

Turn signals Implement

Automatic --one trailer Slow or socket
Fuel shut-off low setting

Turn signals %age

--two trailers slip
Engine speed Fast or high
(rev/min x 100) setting
Front wind- Hitch raise
screen Ground (rear)
Hours recorded wash/wipe speed
Hitch lower
Rear wind- (rear)
Engine oil screen Differential
pressure wash/wipe lock
Hitch height
Heater temp- limit (rear)
Engine coolant Rear axle
erature control oil tem-
temperature
perature Hitch height
limit (front)
Heater fan
Coolant Transmission
level oil pressure Hitch dis-
Air conditioner abled

Tractor lights FWD

engaged Hydraulic and
Air filter transmission
blocked filters
Headlamp FWD dis-
main beam Parking engaged Remote
brake valve extend

Headlamp Brake fluid Remote

dipped beam level Warning!
valve retract

Work lamps Trailer Hazard Remote

brake warning lights valve float

Stop Roof Variable Malfunction!

lamps beacon control See Operator’s
Manual
Warning!
Horn Corrosive Pressurised! Malfunction! (alter-
substance Open carefully native symbol)

1--22
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION

In accordance with E.E.C. directives, the noise levels of tractors covered by this manual are as follows:

Tractors with Cabin and Fixed Windscreen

with Air Cleaner Extraction System
Noise level at operators ear Drive by noise level
Closed (1) Open (2)
Transmission Annex II* Annex II* Annex IV**

T6020 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 81.0 dB(A)

T6040 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 81.0 dB(A)

T6060 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 81.0 dB(A)

T6030 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 78.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

T6050 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 78.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

T6070 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 78.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

Tractors with Cabin and Fixed Windscreen

without Air Cleaner Extraction System
Noise level at operators ear Drive by noise level
Closed (1) Open (2)

Transmission Annex II* Annex II* Annex IV**

T6020 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)

T6040 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)

T6060 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 77.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)

T6030 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 79.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

T6050 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 79.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

T6070 Electro Command 71.0 dB(A) 79.0 dB(A) 84.0 dB(A)

* Test results are in accordance with directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.

Maximum noise level at the operators ear with:
1) all cab windows and doors closed, tractor off load
2) rear window and roof hatch open, tractor off load.
** Test results are in accordance with directive 74/151/EEC Annex VI.

1--23
 SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

1--24
 SECTION 2
CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

BEFORE OPERATING PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS

CAUTION Your tractor utilises two memory facilities to control

Before driving or operating the tractor, study the and memorise settings for the various electronic
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual. functions. The operating memory temporarily stores
setting adjustments made while operating the tractor
and these are uploaded to the main memory when
Read this section thoroughly. It details the location you key--off (engine stop).
and operation of the various instruments, switches
and controls on your tractor. Even if you operate If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data
other tractors, you should thoroughly read this is being uploaded, some of it may be lost or
section of the manual and ensure that you are corrupted.
familiar with the location and function of all the
features of the tractor. If you have made changes to any memorised
settings while operating the tractor, pause for five
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate seconds between key--off and key--on to allow the
the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the data to upload from the operating memory to the
controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is main memory. Once uploaded, the new settings will
moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of remain unchanged until they are re--programmed.
the tractor, consult your authorised dealer.

Pay particular attention to the recommendations for

running-in to ensure that your tractor will give the Subject Page
long and dependable service for which it was
designed. Cab 2--6

This section is split into various subjects, as follows. Seats 2--26

Where a feature requires setting up and running
adjustments in the field, detailed instructions will be
Handbrake, Throttle and Foot Controls 2--31
found in Section 3, Field Operation. Instructions for
the operation of various optional accessories will be
found in Section 7. Instrument Console 2--33

Lubrication and maintenance requirements will be Analogue/Digital Instruments 2--36

found in Section 4. Tractor specifications are listed in
Section 7. Transmission Operation 2--64

A comprehensive index is provided at the end of this Electro Command Transmission

book. (16 x 16 and 17 x 16) 2--65

Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive 2--82

Front Axle Suspension 2--86

2--1
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

CAB AND PLATFORM CONTROLS

General View of Tractor Controls -- With Cab

2--2
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Key to Figure 1 Page Nos. for Reference

1. Joystick control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--34, 3--72

2. Hand throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--32
3. Transmission controls
16x16 (17x16) Electro Command transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--65
4. Hydraulics controls
Electronic Draft Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--59
5. Remote control valve levers
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--71
Elecro--Hydraulic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--81
6. EDC panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--60
7. P.T.O. controls
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--51
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--30
8. Electrical power panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--23
9. External controls (where fitted)
3--point hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--69
Rear P.T.O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--49
10. Release handle
Automatic pick--up hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--123
Tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--120
11. Rear window locking handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
12. Cab air recirculation filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
13. Cab climate controls (’C’ pillar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--13
14. Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--31
15. Instructional seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--30
16. Seat controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--26
17. Clutch/inching pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--31, 2--69
18. Steering column adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--33
19. Multi--function switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--34
20. Shuttle lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--67
21. Front window locking handle (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
22. Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--36
23. Enhanced keypad (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--55
24. Key--start switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
25. Wash/wipe control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--35
26. Foot brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--32
27. Foot throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--31

2--3
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

SWITCH PANELS

Your tractor is equipped with a number of electronic NOTE: The number and location of the switches
control switches located on the right--hand side of the within these panels may change depending on
cab. Depending on the options fitted to your tractor, country and tractor specification.
some of these switches may not be fitted or will have
more than one function.

A full explanation of individual switch operation can

be found in the relevant sections of this manual.

Right--Hand Control Console 5. 4WD Auto or Manual engagement

1. Auto Transmission Operation 6. Rear axle differential lock, Auto or Manual

or engagement
Auto Transmission and Cal Select
or 7. Creeper gear engagement
Cal Select function only
8. Engine Speed Management r.p.m. adjustment
2. HTS operation
9. Engine Speed Management programme switch
3. Not used
10. Front axle suspension lock
4. Fast Steer engagement
11. Not used

2--4
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Right--Hand Cab ’C’ Pillar (High Roof)

1. Auxiliary headlamps

2. Not used

3. Not used

4. Not used

5. External mirror heater control

6. Electronic battery isolator

Right--Hand Cab ’C’ Pillar (Low Roof)

1. Auxiliary headlamps

2. Roof beacon

3. Grab rail worklamps

4. Rear worklamps

5. Front worklamps (hood mounted)

6. Electronic battery isolator

3

Cab Roof, Right--Hand Side (High Roof)

1. Hood mounted worklights

2. Grab rail worklamps

3. Roof mounted worklamps (front)

4. Rotating beacon switch

5. Roof mounted worklamps (rear)

6. Rear pillar or fender mounted worklamps

NOTE: The work lamps will only operate with the

tractor lights switched on.

2--5
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

CAB

NOTE: The controls on tractors without a cab, from

the instrument console down, are very similar to
those with a cab. Even if your tractor does not have
a cab, you should still read the following text to gain
an understanding of the function and use of the
controls.

Introduction

The cab on your tractor has been designed to provide

operator protection, comfort and convenience.
Inside, the trim panels, roof, and floor are insulated
to reduce noise to a minimum.

Two wide opening doors permit entry to the cab from

either side, aided by convenient grab handles and
footsteps with anti-slip treads. The doors and rear
window are fitted with gas struts to hold them in the fully
open position. Additionally, the rear window may be
retained in the partially open position for increased
ventilation.

Standard Cab

Standard cab features include a fresh air

heater/defroster, high visibility roof panel, front and rear
wash/wipe, sun visor, tinted glass, interior light and
exterior courtesy lights, cigarette lighter, storage 5
facilities, interior/exterior rear view mirrors and a choice
of comfortable seats.

Options include air-conditioning, radio, opening front

windscreen and extending exterior rear view mirrors.

Low Profile Cab

When fitted with the optional low roof, the overall cab
height is considerably reduced allowing operation in
areas of restricted height. The standard specification
with low roof includes fixed high visibility roof panel,
air conditioning and a pre--wired disposition for the
optional radio/cassette/CD player.

2--6
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

External Door Handle

Each door has an external handle with a push button

(1). The door may be locked from the outside using
the key provided.

Interior Door Handle

To open a door from inside the cab, squeeze up the

trigger (2) on the underside of the grab handle (1).
Use the grab handle to push the door open.

2--7
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Entering and Exiting the Cab

Wherever possible, the cab should be entered from

the left side.

WARNING
Do not grasp the gear levers when entering the cab
from the right-hand side. Use only the grab handles
provided on the frame and door.

To enter the cab, face the door, then open it. Place
one foot on the lowest step plate and, using the grab
handles on the ‘A’ post and inside the door, climb the
steps and enter the cab.
9
Sit in the seat and fasten the seat belt, where fitted.

To exit the cab, release the seat belt, open the door,
grasp the grab handles, back out of the cab and
descend the steps using the grab handles.

2--8
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Rear Window

The rear window may be locked in the closed position

or retained in the partially open or fully open
positions.

To open the window, lift the central locking handle (1)

up to the vertical position. Allow the window to open
a little then push the handle down so that the locking
tongue engages the slot (2) in the framework.
Alternatively, the window may be allowed to swing
fully open supported by two gas-filled struts.

IMPORTANT: Retain control of the window when

opening it fully. Do not allow it to swing open freely. 10

Using the grab handle, pull the window closed and

push the handle down to lock the window.

Opening Front Windscreen (where fitted)

The front windscreen may also be locked in the

closed position or retained in the partially open or
fully open positions.

IMPORTANT: Retain control of the window when

opening it fully. Do not allow it to swing open freely.

To close the windscreen, pull on both handles

equally. Push the locking handles down to lock in
position.

11

2--9
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

High Visibility Roof Panel -- Standard Cab

The high visibility roof panel provides the operator

with a view to the bucket or grab when the loader is
in the raised position.

For extra ventilation the roof panel may be tilted to

one of three positions. Using the grab handles (1),
push up at the front or rear to angle the panel.
Alternatively, pushing up in the centre of the grab
handles will fully open the panel.

To close the panel, grasp both handles and pull the

panel down, the spring action of the handles will hold 12
the panel in the closed position.

NOTE: When transporting the tractor on a truck or

trailer at speeds above 50 K/mh (31 MPH) ensure the
roof panel is secured to prevent accidental opening.
See page 3--3 for more information.

The sliding panel may be adjusted to reduce glare or

can be fully closed if required.

13

High Visibility Roof Panel -- Low Profile Cab

The high visibility roof panel on low roof cabs is of a

fixed type and cannot be tilted.

14

2--10
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Sun Visor -- Standard Cab

Pull down the sun visor (1) to protect the driver’s eyes
from the glare of the sun. The visor will remain in the
chosen position. Push the visor up to retract.

15

Sun Visor -- Low Profile Cab

The sun visor (1) can be used to protect the driver’s

eyes from the glare of the sun or to shade the interior
of the cab from strong sunlight coming through the
high visibility roof panel. Rotate downwards for glare
protection, upwards to shade the cab interior.

16

Dual Operation Sun Visor -- Low Profile Cab

(where fitted)

On tractors with a low roof and fixed visibility panel,

a dual operation sun visor may be fitted.

To operate the front screen visor, pull the visor down

using the finger grip in the center of the lower rail on
the visor. The visor will remain in the position
selected. To return the visor to the up position, push
upwards on the finger grip.

The roof visibility panel may be covered by pulling the

visor outwards against spring pressure and latching 17
the pull tag over the retaining clip on the roof liner. To
retract the visor, unclip and hold the pull tag, then
allow the visor to retract into the housing.

2--11
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

External Rear View Mirrors

With extending arm

Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best

rearward view. When the knob (1) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended, as shown. This
feature will be beneficial when towing wide trailers or
equipment. To adjust the angle of the mirror head,
loosen the knob (2). Ensure both knobs are fully
tightened when the mirror is correctly positioned.
The mirror arm may be swivelled forward to clear
obstructions if necessary.
18
With Power adjustment

With the optional power adjust mirrors the position of

the mirror head may be adjusted electrically.

Select the mirror to be adjusted by moving the switch

(1) to the left or right. Then, using the 4--way control
(2) move it sideways to adjust the lateral view or up
and down to adjust the vertical position.

With the selector switch (1) in the mid position the

power adjustment function will be de--activated.

19
Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best
rearward view. When the knob (2) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended or retracted.

To make initial adjustment to the vertical position of

the mirror assembly, remove the four self--tapping
screws and take off the cover.

Loosen the clamp screws (1), re--position the mirror

head and re--tighten the screws. Replace the cover.

20
The power adjust mirrors are also electrically heated.
Momentarily depress the switch to turn on the
heating element. The mirror heater will automatically
switch off after 5 minutes.

21

2--12
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Interior Light
(where fitted)

The interior light (2), has three operating positions.

Depress the front and the light will remain on,
depress the rear and the light will illuminate when
either of the doors are opened.

Where fitted, the courtesy light (1), operates in

conjunction with the interior light. This light provides
illumination of the step area when the door is opened.

When the switch is in the central position, the light is

off, irrespective of the position of the doors. 22

Console Light
(where fitted)

The light (1) provides a soft glow to the gear levers

and hydraulic console. The light is illuminated when
the tractor lights are turned on. On cabs with the
standard roof a second light is provided on the
left--hand side to illuminate the drinks holder and
storage box.

23

Heater Temperature Control

Turn the knob (2) clockwise to increase the

temperature of the air from the heater. Turn fully
anti-clockwise to obtain unheated air from the heater
vents.

Blower Control

A 4-speed blower is installed for the heater (and air

conditioner, where fitted). Turn the switch (1)
clockwise to the first position for low speed. Further
rotation of the switch in a clockwise direction will
increase the fan speed. 24

With the windows closed, the blower may be used to

pressurise the cab to exclude dust etc. Provided that
the cab air filters are serviced correctly, maximum
pressurisation and optimum dust exclusion may be
achieved by operating the blower at maximum fan
speed.

2--13
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Adjustable Air Vents

Adjustable air vents are provided throughout the cab

for even distribution of heated or cooled air. Vents are
located each side of the operators seat and on the
instrument console. Each vent may be
independently adjusted to direct the air flow (with the
blower control actuated) onto the side windows or the
operator. The two vents located on the upper part of
the instrument console may be adjusted to demist
the windscreen.

To open the circular vents (1) each side of the

instrument console, press one side of the disc and 25
then turn it, as required, to direct the air flow.

Air Conditioner Switch

(where fitted)

Depress the switch (3), to activate the air conditioner

compressor and lower the temperature of the air
within the cab. The air conditioner will only operate
with the blower (1) switched on.

IMPORTANT: The air conditioning system uses

R134A refrigerant. Do not mix with other refrigerants.

To quickly reduce in cab temperature operate the air

conditioner with the blower speed set to maximum
and the heater control fully off. When the air has
cooled sufficiently, adjust the blower control to
maintain the desired temperature. The windows and
doors should remain closed. 26

Under certain conditions, it may be desirable to

operate both the air conditioner and heater together,
e.g. to demist the windscreen and interior door glass
on a cold morning. (The air conditioner, as well as
cooling, also removes moisture from the air). Run the
engine to normal operating temperature, turn the
heater temperature control (2) and blower control (1)
to the maximum settings (fully clockwise). Turn on
the air conditioner (3) and adjust the air vents to
direct the air flow, as required.

2--14
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

When the windows are clear, turn the air conditioner

off and adjust the heater controls to maintain the
desired cab air temperature.

IMPORTANT: Run the engine at idle speed for at

least 3 minutes after switching on the air conditioner,
if the air conditioner has been out of use for more
than 30 days.

IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioner off

when cooled or de-humified air is not required. For
proper operation of the air conditioner, ensure that the
cab air filters are serviced regularly. See section 4.

WARNING
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system
has a boiling point of --12° C (10° F).

• Never expose any part of the air conditioner

system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.

• Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the

air conditioner system. Escaping refrigerant will
cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape
into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.

• If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the

same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38° C
(90 --100° F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.

• If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the

eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5
minutes. Consult a doctor immediately.

NOTE: It is the normal function of the air conditioner

to extract water from the air. Drain hoses lead from
the air conditioner unit to a point beneath the cab. Do
not be concerned if a pool of water collects beneath
the drain hose outlets when the engine is stopped.

2--15
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

(where fitted)

Automatic Control

With Automatic Temperature Control the operator

can set the temperature inside the cab to maintain a
comfortable working environment. By automatically
adjusting the output of the heating and air
conditioning systems, ATC will provide a stable cab
temperature between 16° C (61° F) and 32° C (90°
F).

The blower control switch (1) has five positions, off,

ATC and three blower speeds. With ATC selected
the speed of the blower fan is controlled
automatically.

To set the cab interior temperature, align the mark on 27

the control knob (2) with the desired figure. If
required, the control can be set to the intermediate
positions between the figures to provide additional
temperature levels.

If the temperature in the cab remains within 1.1° C (2°

F) of that set on the control, the blower fan will
maintain a low speed. As the differential between the
control setting and the in cab temperature increases,
the blower speed will be raised to re--stabilise the
temperature.

Selecting ’HI’ or ’LO’ on the temperature control will

override the automatic system to provide a maximum
heating or cooling effect.

Manual Control

To manually set the cab temperature, switch the

blower control to position I, II or III and select a
suitable setting on the temperature control. This will
disable the ATC function.

Although the in cab temperature will be maintained

within limits, it will not be as efficient as ATC.
Switching to ’LO’ will provide maximum air
conditioning output with temperature adjustment
through the blower control only.

2--16
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Economy and Defrost Switch

The economy and defrost switch has three positions:

1. Left side depressed. ECONomy mode.
2. Central position. ECON and MAX DEF off.
3. Right side depressed. MAX DEFrost on.

When the external air temperature is low, operating

the air conditioner may not be necessary to maintain
a constant temperature inside the cab. To turn off the
air conditioner, depress the ECON side of the switch.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor uses engine 28

horsepower to drive it. Turning off the air conditioner
when not required will aid fuel economy.

The cab temperature will be maintained within the

specified limits unless the external air temperature
rises above that set on the control. Should this occur,
select the central switch position to turn on the air
conditioner.

In very cold conditions where the outside of the cab

windows become covered in ice, depress the MAX
DEF side of the switch. This will automatically set the
heater temperature to maximum, activate the air
conditioner (if not already switched on), and select
the highest speed setting on the blower fan.

This function may also be used to clear heavy misting

on the inside of the cab windows.

2--17
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Air Recirculation

The cab ventilation system has three filters, two

external filters through which fresh air is drawn into
the cab, and one internal air re--circulation filter (2).
Move the slider control (1) fully to the right for
maximum air re--circulation.

WARNING
The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the
air but will not exclude chemical vapour. Follow the
chemical manufacturer’s directions regarding
protection from hazardous chemicals.
29

Cab Air Filters

1
When operating in conditions where chemical
vapours may be present, the external cab air filters
(1) may be replaced with carbonised filters to help
reduce the ingress of some chemical vapours.
Consult your authorised dealer.

CAUTION
Use only genuine New Holland filter elements when
renewing cab air filters. When replacing used filters,
follow local regulations in the disposal of
contaminated elements.
30

Safety Precautions

Although it is possible to pressurise the cab interior

to reduce ingress of chemical vapour, the
recommended safety procedures, as stipulated by
the chemical manufacturer, should be observed at all
times.

Protective clothing worn when filling the sprayer with

pesticides or when carrying out external
adjustments, should be removed and stored away
carefully before re--entering the tractor cab.

To prevent build--up of chemical residue inside the

cab, the interior trim and floor covering should be 31
wiped clean with a damp cloth on a regular basis.

2--18
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Cab Pressurisation Monitor (where fitted)

To help reduce the amount of dust and chemical

vapours entering the cab, the blower can be used to
raise the air pressure inside the cab above that of the
external air pressure. Ensure all cab apertures are
fully closed. To monitor the internal pressure, a
gauge is mounted inside the cab.

Cab Air Pressurisation Gauge

Observe the reading on the pressure gauge. If the

lower edge (1) of the yellow indicator centres in the
green area you have an adequate differential
between the internal and external air pressure.
Adjust the blower speed to maintain that reading. If
the yellow indicator rises into the red area, increase
blower speed to raise the internal cab pressure.

CAUTION
If, during spray operations, the lower edge of the
yellow indicator enters the red section of the gauge,
carry out the checks below and follow the chemical 32
manufacturers recommendations for safe operation.

With the blower in the off position the yellow indicator

should move into the red area. If the indicator does
not register correctly, the gauge should be replaced.

If the blower is unable to maintain the correct

pressure inside the cab then the following checks
should be made to determine the cause.

1. Check blower is on maximum speed.

NOTE: If Automatic Temperature Control is
activated it may be necessary to switch to manual
control to increase blower speed.
2. Ensure all doors, windows and roof panel are
fully closed.
3. Check external air filters for blockage or
restriction.
4. Examine all cab aperture seals for damage.

5. Check sealing around linkages and levers where

they pass through the cab panels.

If, after all the checks have been made the cab
interior pressure cannot be maintained, consult your
authorised dealer.

2--19
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Radio/Cassette/CD Player
(where fitted)

With Standard Cab

The cab is pre-wired and has two speakers installed

in the roof (four speakers are available as a dealer
installed accessory). A choice of self-seeking
AM/FM stereo radio/cassette or radio/CD players (1)
are also available as a dealer installed accessory.
Separate operating instructions will be supplied with
the radio.

NOTE: The radio will only operate with the key-start 33

switch in the on or accessories position.

With Low Profile Cab

The dealer installed radio/cassette or radio/CD

player (1) is located in the cab roof to the right of the
driver. Separate operating instructions will be
supplied with the unit.

WARNING
Ensure the aerial is positioned so it cannot touch
overhead power lines.

If the aerial is removed from the tractor, do not use

tools to tighten the aerial when re--fitting, hand 34
tighten only. The design of the aerial mast and base
will ensure a self tightening action is applied once the
mast has been attached to the base.

2--20
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Mobile Telephone Usage

A storage bracket (1) is provided on the left--hand

cab ’C’ pillar for a mobile telephone. Auxiliary power
for the telephone may be taken from the cigarette
lighter socket above.

35

Implement Monitor Installation

To facilitate installation of an implement monitor, two

mounting points are provided:

To meet SAE standards, captive bolts (1), protected

by plastic covers, are provided on the the right-hand
cab ’C’ pillar.

It is recommended that a bracket be screwed to the

‘C’ pillar to mount the monitor. A suitable bracket is
available from your authorised dealer.

36

An alternative monitor mounting position (1) is

provided on the inner face of the right-hand ‘A’ pillar.

37

2--21
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Cable and Harness Routing

So the operating cable from the monitor may be

conveniently routed to the equipment, a small
aperture is provided in the filler plate each side of the
lower rear window frame. By making a small incision
in the rubber at (1), cables or wiring can be easily
routed through the filler plate.

38

In Cab Storage
(where fitted)

A storage box with a hinged lid (1) is located on the

left-hand side of the cab. The lid also incorporates a
drinks holder.

A recessed tray (2) is provided to the rear of the

storage box to hold small tools, oddments, etc.

39

2--22
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTORS

INTERNAL POWER CONNECTORS

Depending on tractor specification there are a

number of electrical power connectors provided for
various applications. These are as follows:

1. 8 amp Screw terminals. The red terminal is

positive, the black terminal negative.

2. 7 Pole Din/ISO implement socket (with radar

option only) provides the information below.
40
3. ISO/JD implement power socket. Provides
constant and key--start switched live feeds.
Rating.
With round connectors -- 25 amps (Europe).
With square connectors -- 30 amps (North
America).

7 Pole Din/ISO Implement Socket Connectors

(where fitted)

Pin 1. True ground speed. (Radar Sensed)

Pin 2. Theoretical ground speed.
(Wheel Sensed)
Pin 3. Rear P.T.O. speed.
Pin 4. Rear 3--point hitch, in work/out of work.
Pin 5. Not used
Pin 6. 5 amp power supply.
Pin 7. Common ground connection.

41
4. Auxiliary power socket. This socket may also be
used with a cigarette lighter as shown, consult
your authorised dealer.

5. 8 amp Single pole auxiliary power socket. Live

with key--start in ’on’ position.

IMPORTANT: To ensure that terminals and

connecting cables do not get excessively hot when
loaded with near maximum current it is important to
make secure, tight connections to prevent
overheating and damage. Ensure that equipment is
connected to the terminals with cables of suitable
gauge and insulation thickness and fitted with
appropriate terminal connectors. 42

2--23
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Multi--Pin Diagnostic Socket

WARNING
For Dealer use only. This socket is provided for
dealers to connect diagnostic equipment to the
tractor electrical control systems. Any attempt to
connect other equipment to this socket may cause
damage to the tractor electrical system or its
components.

43

EXTERNAL POWER CONNECTORS

Three Pin Implement Socket

A 3-pin socket (1) is standard on all tractors with cab.

Rating.
With round pins -- 25 amps (Europe).
With square pins -- 30 amps (North America)

NOTE: The Operator should be aware that the screw

terminals (1) Figure 40, share the same fuse as the
3--pin socket. Therefore, the combined output of the
3-pin socket and the screw terminals is limited to the 44
amperage shown above (25 or 30 amps).

Beacon Power Socket

Two power sockets for the rotating beacon are

provided at the rear of the cab, one on each side.

45

2--24
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet

(except North America)
A standard 7-pin trailer lighting socket (1), is provided
and is mounted at the rear of the tractor. With
reference to the picture inset, the socket connections
(viewed from the front of the socket) are as follows:

Pin
No. Wire Colour Circuit
1. Yellow L.H. Turn Signal
2. Not Used --
3. White Earth (Ground)
4. Green R.H. Turn Signal
5. Black R.H. Parking Light
6. Red Brake Lights
7. Brown L.H. Parking Light

46

Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet

(North America only)
A standard SAE 7-pin connector (1) is provided, to
operate the electrical system on implements and
trailers. With reference to the picture inset, the pin
connections (viewed from the front of the socket) are
as follows:

Pin
No. Wire Colour Circuit
1. White Earth (Ground)
2. Black R.H. Parking Light
3. Yellow L.H. Turn Signal
4. Red Brake Lights
5. Green R.H. Turn Signal
6. Brown L.H. Parking Light
7. Not Used --

47

2--25
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

AIR SUSPENSION SEAT

The air suspension seat installed in your tractor has

a comprehensive range of adjustments for height,
weight and position.

Before operating the tractor, it is important to adjust

the seat to the most comfortable position. Seat
adjusters are colour coded grey. See the following
text and illustrations for details.

NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made when

the tractor is stationary and with the operator sitting
in the seat.

Storage pocket

A pocket for storing documents, etc., is provided on

the rear of the backrest.

48

Travel adjustment

Lift the travel adjustment lever (1) and move the seat
forward or backward, as required. The seat will lock
in position when the lever is released.

Suspension damper

There are five damper settings for the seat

suspension. To adjust the setting ’bounce’ up and
down on the seat while swivelling the damper control
(2) from the fully forward position (soft) to the fully
rearward position (hard). Select the setting which
provides the most comfortable ride. 49

2--26
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Cushion extension

To suit drivers of differing heights, the length of the

seat cushion may be adjusted by up to 60 mm (2.4
in). Lift the lever (1) and move the cushion forward or
rearward, as required. The cushion will lock in
position when the lever is released.

Cushion tilt

The angle of the seat cushion may be adjusted to

three positions. Lift the lever (2) and pull or push the
front of the seat cushion up or down, as required. The
seat cushion will lock in position when the lever is 50
released.

Travel isolator

Having selected the required fore/aft position, the

seat is permitted a limited, spring controlled, fore/aft
movement (float) if the travel isolator (1) is rotated to
the rear position. This, in conjunction with the air
suspension, will provide the optimum in ride comfort.

To cancel the float movement, rotate the travel

isolator to the forward position as shown, fore/aft
float movement is now isolated.

Swivel adjustment
51
To aid observation to the rear of the tractor, the seat
may be allowed to swivel. Adjustment is available as
follows:

a) Lock in one of two positions 10° or 20° to the right

of centre.
b) Lock in position at 10° to the left of centre.

To swivel the seat, lift the handle (2), then rotate the
seat to the required position. When the lever is
released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.

2--27
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Height/weight adjustment

The air suspension seat has electrically controlled,

pneumatic suspension. In order to adjust seat height,
it is necessary to turn the key-start switch on. Lift the
lever (1) and a compressor will raise the seat. When
the green marking is visible in the indicator aperture
(2), release the lever and seat will stop at the height
selected. Push the lever down to release air and
lower the seat.

52

Backrest inclination adjustment

Lift the lever (1) on the left-hand side of the seat

frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. The
backrest will lock in position when the lever is
released.

53

Backrest extension

Your air suspension seat features an integrated

backrest extension (1). The extension may be
adjusted vertically by using the handgrip at the rear
of the cushion. Push down on the top of the extension
to lower.

Lumbar adjustment

The seat has a built-in lumbar support actuated by a

rotary control wheel (2) located at the rear of the seat
on the left--hand side. Both height and curvature of
the backrest cushion may be individually adjusted. 54

To alter the position of the lumbar support, rotate the

control in either direction until the most comfortable
position is achieved.

2--28
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Armrest adjustments

The position of the armrests may be raised or

lowered and the angle may be changed to provide a
comfortable operating height.

Rotate the knurled wheel (1) on the underside of the

armrest to adjust the angle. When not required, the
armrest may be lifted to the vertical position.

The complete armrest assembly may also be

adjusted for height by carefully prising off the cover
(2) and loosening the 13 mm clamp bolt located
behind the cover. 55

NOTE: To loosen the clamp bolt on the right--hand

armrest will require the removal of a wiring harness
support.

Move the armrest to a comfortable height and

re--tighten the clamp bolt. Replace the cover (where
applicable).

Heating element (where fitted)

The heating elements in the seat are controlled by a

two position switch on the left--hand side of the seat
backrest. Depress the upper part of the switch to
energise the heater. Depress the lower part of the
switch to turn off.

The temperature of the seat is controlled by internal

sensors within the seat.

56

2--29
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

SEAT BELT AND OPERATOR PRESENCE

SWITCH (where fitted)

WARNING
Always use the seat belt with a safety cab or ROPS
frame installed. Do not use a seat belt if the tractor
is not equipped with a safety cab or ROPS.

To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and push
the tongue (1) into the buckle end (2) until a ‘click’
indicates it is properly engaged. Press the red
release button (3) on the buckle and remove the
tongue from the buckle. 57

The operator presence switch, installed beneath the

seat, is connected to an audible alarm which will
sound if the operator leaves the seat with the P.T.O.
engaged.

INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT
(where fitted)

A folding instructional seat is available where local

legislation permits. To raise the seat backrest, lift to
the upright position. The seat will be retained in the
upright position by the gas strut (1). When not
required fold the upper part of the seat down to reveal
the drinks holder.

WARNING
Always use the seat belt with a safety cab or ROPS
frame installed. Do not use a seat belt if the tractor
is not equipped with a safety cab or ROPS. 58

IMPORTANT: The fold down seat is fitted for

operator training or instructional purposes only, it is
not intended for passenger conveyance.
Passengers should not be carried in the cab at any
time.

2--30
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

HAND BRAKE, THROTTLE AND FOOT

PEDALS

Handbrake

A conventional handbrake lever is installed to the left

of the driver’s seat.

To apply the handbrake, pull the lever up. A warning

light will illuminate in the instrument panel when the
handbrake is applied. To release, ease the lever up
further, depress the button (1) on the end and lower
the lever fully.
59
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the handbrake is fully
released before driving off.

Clutch/Inching Pedal

When the clutch pedal (1) is depressed the drive

between the engine and transmission will be dis-
engaged. Use the pedal to transfer engine power
smoothly to the driving wheels when moving off from
a standstill. See ‘TRANSMISSION’ later in this
section for further details.

NOTE: To avoid premature wear, do not use the

clutch pedal as a footrest.

60

Foot Throttle

The foot throttle (1) may be used independently of

the hand throttle to control the speed of the tractor.
It is recommended that you use the foot throttle when
driving on the highway.

NOTE: When the foot throttle is released, engine

speed will reduce to the level set by the hand throttle.
When using the foot throttle, set the hand throttle to
the minimum speed position (lever fully rearward).

61

2--31
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Hand Throttle

The hand throttle (1) may be used independently of

the foot throttle to control the speed of the tractor.
Move the throttle lever forward to increase engine
speed.

IMPORTANT: Always return the hand throttle to the

idle position when using the foot throttle for road
transport applications.

62

Footbrakes

The brakes are actuated by the two footpedals (1)

and (2). When operating in the field they may be
unlocked and operated independently, to aid turning
in confined spaces. When independent braking is not
required, ensure both pedals are locked together to
provide normal braking.

WARNING
On four wheel drive tractors the drive to the front axle
is automatically engaged at speeds above 8.5 km/h
(4 MPH) when the brakes are applied to provide four
wheel braking. Owners should be aware of the 63
effectiveness of four wheel braking which greatly
enhances braking performance. Appropriate care
should be exercised during heavy braking.

IMPORTANT: Hydraulic trailer brakes will only

operate when both brakes are applied.

WARNING
For your safety, always lock the brake pedals
together when travelling at transport speeds or if a
hydraulically braked trailer is attached to the tractor.
To lock the pedals together, engage the locking pin
in the right pedal and swivel the latch (1), over the left
pedal support to lock, as shown.

64

2--32
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

INSTRUMENT CONSOLE

The following text describes the use of the various

switches and controls, etc., mounted on the
instrument console and steering column.

Steering Column Adjustment

The steering column on your tractor may be tilted and

telescoped. Pull the end of the clamp lever (2) up
(toward you). Move the steering column/wheel to the
most convenient position and return the clamp lever
to the fully down position to lock the steering column
assembly.

To alter the steering wheel height, loosen the centre

boss (1) by turning anti--clockwise. Move the
steering wheel to the most covenient position and
re--tighten the centre boss.
65
IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with
hydrostatic power steering. Never hold the steering
wheel at full left or right lock (wheels against the
steering stops) for more than 10 seconds or for more
than a total of 10 seconds in any one minute. Failure
to observe this precaution may result in damage to
steering system components.

Key-start Switch

The key-start switch activates the grid heater cold

start device, accessories and the starting motor. See
‘Starting the Engine’ in Section 3.

66

2--33
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Multi-function Switch

The stalk-type switch is mounted on the left-hand

side of the steering column. The switch controls the
tractor lights, horn and turn signals.

The centre of the stalk switch rotates. With reference

to Figure 67, turn the switch away from you, to
position 2, to turn on the instrument and position
lights. Turn the switch to position 1 to select the
headlights.

With the headlights on, push the stalk away from you,
position 3, to change from dipped to high beam. Pull
the stalk toward you, position 4, to change back to 67
dipped beam. With high beam selected, the blue
indicator light on the instrument panel is illuminated.

With the headlights off, pull the stalk towards you,

position 5, against spring pressure, to flash the
headlight high beam. The stalk will return to the
central position when released.

Move the stalk to position 6 to operate the right turn

signals, position 7 will activate the left turn signals.
Indicator lights on the instrument panel will also flash
when the turn signals are actuated. A warning buzzer
will sound if the indicators are not cancelled within 20
seconds.

NOTE: With the optional self cancelling indicators

fitted, the warning buzzer is deleted.
68
NOTE: The turn signals will only operate with the
key-start switch turned on.

Press in the end of the stalk, position 8, to sound the

horn.

2--34
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Hazard Warning Lights Switch

Press the left-hand side of the switch (1) to operate

all the turn signals simultaneously. The switch will
flash with the turn signals.

69

Windscreen Wipe/Wash Control

(tractors with cab only)

The stalk-type control on the right-hand side of the

steering column controls the front and rear screen
wipe and wash functions.

With the key-start switch on, move the stalk

rearward, to position 2 and the front wiper will
operate at the slower of the two wiper speeds, move
to position 3 for the faster speed. Press in the end of
the stalk, position 1, to operate the electric screen
wash.
70

From the centre ’off’ position move the stalk

downward to position 4 for intermittent front wipe.

Move the stalk upward against spring pressure for

single sweep operation, position 3. On release, the
switch will return to the off position.

To operate the rear screen wiper (where fitted),

rotate the centre collar anti--clockwise to position 1
for intermittent rear wipe and to position 2 for rear
screen wash. The switch will return automatically to
the intermittent mode when released.

NOTE: Windscreen washer jets are mounted in the 71

cab frame, immediately beneath the roof. Insert a pin
into the jet nozzle to adjust the angle of the jet.

2--35
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

ANALOGUE/DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION

The instrument panel consists of three analogue

gauges , three liquid crystal displays (LCD’s) and a
dot matrix display (DMD).

In addition to the gauges and LCD displays there are

25 coloured lights providing other operating
information or warning of system malfunction.

The lower left button on the instrument panel controls

the intensity of back lighting for the LCD’s and dot
matrix displays, the two right--hand buttons adjust
the digital clock. 72

GAUGES

Engine Tachometer

The tachometer (1) indicates engine revolutions per

minute. Each division on the scale represents 100
rev/min., therefore with the needle indicating ‘20’ the
engine is running at 2000 rev/min.

73

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge (2) indicates the

temperature of the engine coolant. If the needle
enters the upper (red) section of the gauge while the
engine is running, stop the engine and investigate
the cause.

Fuel Level Gauge

The gauge (3) indicates the level of fuel in the tank

and is only operative with the key-start switch turned
on. See Section 8 for fuel capacities.
74

2--36
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

75

INDICATOR AND WARNING LIGHTS

The coloured lights provide operating information or 4. Four wheel drive -- Light will illuminate when the
give warning of system malfunction. Illumination of a drive to the front wheels is engaged.
warning light may be accompanied by an audible
alarm. Refer to Alarm Functions on page 2--45. 5. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with
tractor/trailer turn signals when a second trailer
is attached.
Indicator and Warning Lights
6. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with
NOTE: All indicator and warning lights will illuminate tractor/trailer turn signals when a trailer is
for a short period at ’key--on’ as the electrical attached
systems carry out a self diagnostic check.
7. Parking lights -- Light will illuminate when the
tractor lights are switched on.
1. Not used.
8. Headlight high beam -- Light will illuminate when
2. Fast Steer -- Light will illuminate when fast steer
the tractor lights are switched to high beam.
function is activated.
9. Red Stop light -- If Stop light comes on stop the
3. Differential lock -- Light will illuminate when the
tractor immediately and investigate the cause. A
differential lock is engaged.
warning symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display to confirm the location of the fault.

2--37
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

76

Indicator and Warning Lights (continued)

10. Engine power boost activated -- Illumination of 14. Trailer brake pressure (Italy only) -- Light will
this light will be accompanied by the power boost illuminate to indicate that hydraulic oil pressure
symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix Display. to the trailer brake circuit is low. Stop the tractor
and investigate the cause.
11. Amber Warning light -- Illumination of this light will
be accompanied by a warning symbol in the Dot 15. Brake pedals not latched -- Light will illuminate to
Matrix Display. Stop the tractor and investigate show when pedal latch is unlocked (Japan only).
the cause.
16. Engine oil pressure low -- Steady light
12. Direct drive indicator (Dual Command accompanied by the Red Stop light will indicate
transmission only) -- Light will illuminate to low engine oil pressure. Stop the engine and
indicate transmission is in direct drive. investigate the cause.
13. Parking brake -- Light will flash with key-start 17. Creeper gears -- Light will illuminate when
switch on and parking brake applied. If the creeper gears are engaged.
key-start switch is turned off and the parking
brake not applied, or the operator leaves the seat
without applying the handbrake, a warning
buzzer will sound for approximately 10 seconds
or until the handbrake is applied.

2--38
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

77

Indicator and Warning Lights (continued)

18. Auto P.T.O. function -- The light will illuminate 21. Engine Speed Management -- Light will
when the Auto P.T.O. function is enabled. Each illuminate when Engine Speed Management is
time the implement is raised with Auto P.T.O. activated.
activated, the light will flash. When the
implement is lowered into work the light will 22. Left turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor
cease to flash and become steady. left-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will
sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20
19. Fuel level low -- Light will be illuminated when the seconds (5 minutes with tractor stationary).
tractor requires re--fuelling. See Section 8 for fuel
capacities. 23. Engine exhaust brake -- Light will illuminate when
exhaust brake system is activated.
20. Right turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor
right-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will 24. Cold start device -- Light will illuminate when the
sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20 grid heater is activated using the key--start
seconds (tractor moving) or 5 minutes (tractor switch.
Stationary).
25. Alternator -- Light continuously illuminated
indicates that the alternator is not charging the
battery.

2--39
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS

Clock

A digital clock (1) is installed on the right--hand side

of the instrument panel.

To adjust the time display turn the key--start on,

depress and hold the Hour or Minute button until the
read out starts to Flash. To advance the hour,
depress the ’H’ button (2). Each time the button is
depressed the time will advance by 1 hour.
Alternatively, hold in the button and the display will
advance automatically. Release the button when the
time setting is correct.
78
Repeat the procedure using the ’M’ button (3) for the
minute display. To memorise the setting do not touch
either button for 10 seconds.

Changing the display with ’H’ and ’M’ buttons

The clock is set at the factory to display a 12 hour

reading. To change to a 24 hour reading, depress and
hold both ’H’ and ’M’ buttons with the key--start off.
Turn the key--start on and continue to hold both
buttons for three seconds, the clock will change to
show a 24 hour display. Repeat the procedure to
change back to a 12 hour reading. Turn the key--start
off to store the setting.

79

Changing the display with Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)

With the key--start in the ON position, depress and

hold the Menu/Enter key (2) for 3 seconds. The DMD
will read SETUP MENU, this will change to CAL after
2 seconds. Using the Menu Up key (1), scroll through
the menu until the clock symbol appears in the
display accompanied by 12 / 24, Figure 79.

Depress the Menu/Enter key again and the display

will change to show an arrow pointing to 12 or 24.
Using the Menu Up/Down keys move the arrow up or
down to the setting required and then depress the 80
Menu/Enter key to save and return to the main menu.

2--40
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Dimming Control

The brightness of the liquid crystal (LCD) and dot

matrix displays (DMD) may be varied by using the
dimming control button (1). Momentarily depressing
the button will alter the backlighting in steps. Depress
and hold the button to cycle through the full range of
backlighting from low to high intensity. Release the
button when the required setting is obtained.

81

Centre LCD

The information displayed in the centre LCD, will vary

depending on tractor specification. Use the CAL/SEL
switch or Enhanced Keypad (where fitted) to toggle
between the displays.

The following information may be displayed in the

centre LCD.

1. Rear wheel slip (with radar option only)

2. Power Take Off speed (front or rear)
3. 3--point hitch position (front or rear) 82

Rear Wheel Slip

If your tractor is equipped with optional ground speed

radar, the percentage (%) of rear wheel slip may be
displayed. The slip figure is calculated from
information provided by the transmission speed
sensor (theoretical ground speed) and the radar (true
ground speed).

83

2--41
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Power Take Off Speed

When operating the rear Power Take Off the display

may be used to monitor the output shaft speed. Use
the CAL/SEL button or Enhanced Keypad (where
fitted), to select either rear P.T.O. speed or front
P.T.O. speed (where fitted).

84

3--Point Hitch Position

If your tractor is equipped with Electronic Draft

Control (EDC) the display may be used to show the
position of the 3--point hitch (and implement) by
means of numbers ranging from ’0’ (fully lowered
position) to ’100’ (maximum lift height).

When a front hitch is installed, the display may be

used to show the height of the front lift arms. ’0’ will
represent the fully lowered position, ’100’ the
maximum lift height.

85

DOT MATRIX DISPLAY

A number of tractor operating and set--up functions

may be shown in the Dot Matrix Display (DMD). To
select a function use the CAL/SEL button or the
Enhanced Keypad (where fitted). A symbol will
appear to confirm the function selected.

NOTE: See page 2--45 for an explanation of warning

and advisory symbols.

If an error occurs in the instrument panel or tractor

systems circuits, a malfunction warning symbol will
appear in this display accompanied by an error code. 86
Consult your authorised dealer.

2--42
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Error Codes

The advanced electronics on your tractor are able to

detect a malfunction or error occuring in key areas
such as engine, transmission, electrical and
hydraulic systems. Should a malfunction or error
occur, a symbol will appear in the DMD with a four
digit error code. This may be accompanied by the
illumination of a warning light and an audible alarm
depending on the severity of the fault. Consult your
authorised dealer.

Active and Non Active Warnings

87
In addition to the error codes previously described,
there are a number warning symbols that may
appear in the Dot Matrix Display. These symbols will
be accompanied by either a Red (critical) or Amber
(non--critical) warning light.

Critical symbols appearing with a Red warning light

will remain permanently displayed until the tractor is
stopped and the fault rectified.

Non critical symbols accompanied by the Amber light

will be displayed for five seconds before the DMD
defaults to the symbol previously shown. The amber
warning light will continue to illuminate.

By using the CAL/SEL button, or the Enhanced

Keypad where fitted, active warnings that are not
permanently displayed may be recalled.

Using the CAL/SEL button

• Depress and hold the CAL/SEL button for three

seconds to enter SETUP MENU, after two
seconds the display will change to CAL. Using
the clock set buttons H and M to toggle the
display, select the the active warning symbol (1).

• Depress the CAL/SEL button and the active

symbol will be replaced with a symbol
corresponding to the fault detected.

• If more than one warning symbol has been

stored, the display will cycle through each one in 88
turn. After the fault symbols have been
displayed, the screen will default back to the
active warning symbol.

• Momentarily depress the dimming button to exit

the display.

2--43
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Using the Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)

• With the key--start in the ON position, depress

and hold the Menu/Enter key (2) for 3 seconds.
The DMD will read SETUP MENU, this will
change to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu
Up key (1), scroll through the menu until the
active warning symbol (1) Figure 90, is
displayed.

• By momentarily depressing the Menu/Enter key

again, the active symbol will be replaced with a
symbol corresponding to the fault detected. 89

• If more than one non--active symbol has been

stored, the display will cycle through each one in
turn. After the fault symbols have been
displayed, the screen will default back to the
active warning symbol.

Touch the Exit/Cancel key to exit and return to the

original display.

90

2--44
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

ALARM FUNCTIONS

Illumination of a warning light may be accompanied Action Required

by an audible alarm. Depending on the severity of the
malfunction, an alarm will sound as follows. A two pulse alarm will sound for 1 second to advise
the operator that a certain action is required. The
Critical Alarm alarm will continue to be present until the operator
carries out the appropriate action or the tractor
Alarm will sound continually accompanied by the red engine is switched off.
warning light. The tractor must be stopped
immeadiately. The alarm will sound until the fault is General Alarm
corrected or the engine switched off.
A general alarm will sound if the operator attempts to
Non Critical Alarm carry out an inappropriate action i.e. driving the
tractor with the parking brake applied.
A 5 second continuous alarm will be accompanied by
the amber warning light. A failure or error has
occurred but the operator may continue work. The
fault should be rectified as soon as possible.

WARNING and ADVISORY SYMBOLS

There are a number of warning/advisory symbols

that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. The
symbols can be categorised into four main groups.

1. Warning. These symbols advise of a fault that is

critical to the operation of the tractor. Stop the
tractor as soon as possible, investigate the
cause and rectify the fault.

2. Maintenance. These symbols tell the operator

there is a concern relating to the basic functions
of the tractor, ie. low fuel, low coolant level etc.

3. System Fault. The system fault symbols relate

to an operational fault in one or more of the 91
tractors main components, either electrical or
mechanical. May be accompanied by a four digit
fault code. Consult your authorised dealer.

4. Advisory. The advisory symbols are not

detrimental to the operation of the tractor but
should not be ignored. Take appropriate action
where necessary.

2--45
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

DOT MATRIX SYMBOLS -- WARNING

SYMBOL / DISPLAY ALARM FAULT ACTION

Engine coolant temperature
Symbol
Critical too high. Accompanied by
flashing
RED warning light.

Engine oil pressure low.

Symbol
Critical Accompanied by RED
flashing
warning light.
These symbols advise of a
Transmission/power steering fault that is critical to the
Symbol oil pressure low. operation of the tractor.
Critical
flashing Accompanied by RED
warning light. Stop the tractor as soon as
possible, investigate the cause
possible
Hydraulic system charge and rectify the fault.
Symbol
Critical pressure low. Accompanied
flashing
by RED warning light. If the fault cannot be easily
rectified consult your
rectified,
Transmission oil
Non critical authorised dealer.
Symbol temperature too high.
(AMBER).
flashing Accompanied by RED* or
Critical (RED).
AMBER* warning light.
Air brake pressure low.
Symbol
Non critical Accompanied by AMBER
flashing
warning light.

* RED warning light, tractors with auto engine shut down.

*AMBER warning light, tractors without auto engine shut down.

DOT MATRIX SYMBOLS -- MAINTENANCE

SYMBOL / DISPLAY ALARM FAULT ACTION
Engine air filter blocked.
Symbol
Non critical Accompanied by AMBER
flashing
warning light.

Brake fluid level low. These symbols advise of a

Symbol fault that may be critical to the
Non critical Accompanied by AMBER
flashing operation of the tractor.
warning light.

Hydraulic oil filter blocked. Stop the tractor as soon as

Symbol
Non critical Accompanied by AMBER possible, investigate the cause
flashing
warning light. and rectify the fault.
Transmission oil filter blocked. If the fault cannot be easily
Symbol
Non critical Accompanied by AMBER rectified, consult your
flashing
warning light. authorised dealer.
Water contamination in fuel.
Symbol
Non critical Accompanied by AMBER
flashing
warning light.

2--46
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

DOT MATRIX SYMBOLS -- SYSTEM FAULT

SYMBOL / DISPLAY FAULT CODE AREA of FAULT ACTION

Symbol ON 3------ Engine

Symbol ON n/a Engine cooling system

Symbol ON 2------ Transmission

Symbol ON 7------ Differential lock

Symbol ON n/a CAN BUS malfunction

Symbol ON 1------ Electronic draft control

The system fault symbols

Symbol ON 9------ Front 3--point hitch relate to an operational fault in
one or more of the tractors
main components, either
Symbol ON n/a Braking system electrical, mechanical or
hydraulic.

The appearance of a fault

Symbol ON 5------ Rear P.T.O. system symbol may be accompanied
by a four digit fault code.

Symbol ON 8------ Front P.T.O. system Consult your authorised

dealer.

Symbol ON 10---- Front suspension

Symbol ON 6------ Front wheel drive

Instrument panel electrical

Symbol ON 14----
fault

Symbol ON 15---- Fast Steer system

Symbol ON 4------ Rear electronic remote valves

F Symbol ON 45---- Front electronic remote valves

2--47
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

DOT MATRIX SYMBOLS -- ADVISORY

SYMBOL / DISPLAY ALARM CAUSE ACTION

Symbol ON Action required Clutch pedal not depressed. Cycle clutch pedal.

Symbol ON Action required Shuttle lever in drive. Place shuttle lever in neutral.

Symbol ON Action required Parking brake applied. Release parking brake.

Wheel slip limit exceeded.

Symbol ON Non critical Accompanied by AMBER Reduce implement draft load.
warning light.

Adjust backlighting to required

Symbol ON None DMD backlighting level.
level.

See ’Warning’ symbols for air

Symbol ON Critical Air brake system pressure.
brake pressure.

See ’Warning’ symbols for

Symbol ON Critical Engine oil pressure level.
engine oil pressure.

Rear P.T.O. engaged, operator

Critical or non If accompanied by critical
Symbol ON not present. Accompanied by
critical alarm apply parking brake.
AMBER warning light.
EHR remote valve not
functioning, insufficient oil flow Reduce oil flow requirements
Symbol ON Action required
available. (May also show R2, to other services.
R3, R4).

2--48
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Tractor Ground Speed Display

The lower left--hand LCD provides a permanent

display of ground speed (1) in km/h or MPH
dependent upon the country in which the tractor is to
be used. If required, the display may be changed to
read an alternate ground speed unit from that set at
the factory.

NOTE: If the tractor rear tyre size is changed, the

ground speed display may require re--calibrating to
suit the radius of the new tyre.

NOTE: Illustration shows all displays activated. 92

Changing the Ground Speed Units

Using the CAL/SEL Button

• With the key--start switch in the OFF position,

depress and hold in the CAL/SEL button and turn
the key-start switch ON. The Km/h MPH
symbols will appear flashing in the display.
Release the button.

• Press the CAL/SEL button again to toggle between

Km/h and MPH. When the required ground speed
unit is displayed turn off the key--start to store the
selected speed unit in the memory. 93

Using the Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)

• With the key--start in the ON position, depress

and hold the Menu/Enter key (2) for 3 seconds.
The DMD will read SETUP MENU, this will
change to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu
Up key (1), scroll through the menu until the
Km/h MPH screen appears.

• Momentarily depress the Menu/Enter key (2)

and, using the Menu Up/Down keys, select the
required speed reading. To store the setting and
return to the main menu depress the Menu/Enter 94
key again. Depress the Exit/Cancel key to return
to the original display.

2--49
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Calibrating the Ground Speed Display

Should you wish to install alternative rear tyre

equipment that would provide a radius difference of
more than 13 mm (0.5 in), then the electronic control
module should be re--calibrated to display an
accurate ground speed figure. To re--calibrate use
one of the following methods:

IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit,
calibration is therefore not required.

• Ensure that the tyre pressures are correct for the

load being carried. (See Tyre Load/Inflation
tables in Section 3 of this manual).

• Select a stretch of dry, firm, level ground

(preferably concrete) and carefully measure out
a distance of exactly 100.0 m (328 feet). Mark the
start and finish of this measured distance with a
bold chalk line.

Auto Calibration with CAL/SEL Button

• Park the tractor a short distance from the start
line and, with the engine running, depress and
hold the CAL/SEL button for 3 seconds to enter
the calibration mode. SETUP_MENU will appear
in the Dot Matrix Display. After approximately
two seconds the display will change to CAL.
Depress the CAL/SEL button again to enter the
calibration mode. Using the clock Hour button
select CAL auto. Depress the CAL/SEL button
to confirm selection of CAL auto, the central
LCD display will read 0000.
NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at 95
any time by depressing the LCD dimmer control
button or by turning the key--start off.

• Select a suitable transmission ratio to provide a

speed above 3 km/h (1.8 MPH) and drive up to
the start line, CAL auto READY will appear in the
display. As the centre of the front tyres passes
over the start line, press and release the
CAL/SEL button. CAL will flash in the speed
display, CAL auto ON will appear in the DMD and
the central LCD will show a four digit figure that will
increase as the tractor moves forward.
NOTE: If the calibration procedure is incorrectly
performed i.e. speed below 3 Km/h (1.8 MPH), CAL
KO will appear in the display, depress CAL/SEL to
restart sequence.
96

2--50
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

• As the centre of the front tyres passes over the

finish line, press and release the CAL/SEL button
again, CAL auto OK will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. Depress the CAL/SEL button again to exit
setup and return to the main menu.

Manual Calibration with CAL/SEL Button

The manual calibration allows the operator to set the

rolling circumference of the rear tyre (if known)
without the need to drive over a measured distance.
97

• With the tractor stationary and the key--start on,

depress and hold the CAL/SEL button for 3
seconds to display SETUP_MENU. After 2
seconds this will change to CAL. Depress the
CAL/SEL button again to select CAL manual,
depress again to select CAL man_000.0. (The
figure 000.0 may differ if a calibration number has
previously been entered). CAL will flash in the
speed display.

NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at

any time by depressing the LCD dimmer control
button or by turning the key--start off.
98

IMPORTANT: When entering new tyre rolling

circumference figures, use metric values
(centimetres) with Km/h speedometer reading and
Imperial values (inches) with MPH reading, see table
on page 2--54.

• By depressing the ’h’ and ’m’ clock buttons, the

rolling circumference of the rear tyre may be
entered into the numerical display (000.0).

• Depress the ’h’ button to select the first digit to be

changed, repeated operation of the ’h’ button will
cycle the cursor through all the digits in turn. To
alter the value of the digit selected, momentarily
depress the ’m’ button until the correct figure is
shown.

• With the new rolling circumference figure

entered into the display, depress the CAL/SEL
button again to display CAL. Turn the Key--start
off to save the setting.

2--51
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Auto Calibration with Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)

• With the the tractor stationary and the engine

running, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key
(4) for 3 seconds. The DMD will read
SETUP_MENU, this will change to CAL after 2
seconds. Depress the Enter key again and CAL
manual will appear. Using the Menu Up key (1),
scroll through the menu until CAL auto is
displayed.

• Depress the Menu/Enter key again and CAL

auto READY will appear in the DMD. Select a
suitable transmission ratio to provide a forward 99
speed above 3 km/h (1.8 MPH). As the centre of
the front tyres passes over the start line, press
and release the Menu/Enter key. The speed
display will start to flash CAL and the central LCD
will show a four digit figure that will increase as the
tractor moves forward. The DMD will change to
display CAL auto ON.

• As the centre of the front tyres passes over the

finish line, press and release the Menu/Enter
key. CAL auto OK will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. Depress the Menu/Enter key to store the
setting. Press and release the Exit/Cancel key (2)
Figure 99, to return to the original display.

100

2--52
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Manual Calibration with Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)

• With the key--start in the ON position, depress

and hold the Menu/Enter button (2) for 3
seconds. The DMD will read SETUP_MENU,
this will change to CAL after 2 seconds. Depress
the Enter key and CAL manual will appear.

• Depress the Menu/Enter key again to change the

DMD display to CAL_Man_000.0. (The figure
000.0 may differ if a calibration number has
previously been entered). CAL will flash in the
speed display. Using the Digit Select key (↓)
101
move the cursor to the first digit to be set, enter
the number using the Digit Value key (↑). CAL
will appear in the speed display and start to flash.
Repeat the procedure to set the remaining
calibration figures that correspond to the size of
rear tyre fitted to your tractor.

IMPORTANT: When entering new tyre rolling

circumference figures, use metric values
(centimetres) with Km/h speedometer reading and
Imperial values (inches) with MPH reading, see table
on page 2--54.

• Depress the Exit/Cancel key twice to store the

setting and return to the main menu screen,
depress again to exit set up and return to the
original display.

102

2--53
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Ground Speed Calibration Numbers Rear Tyre Rolling Circumferences

The rolling circumference for any given tyre size will Tyre Size Tyre Rolling Circumference
vary depending on tyre manufacturer. The figures
shown in the table are an average based on rolling Centimetres Inches
circumference data supplied by several 18.4R -- 30 461.2 181.6
manufacturers. To obtain an accurate figure for your 12.4 -- 32 406.9 160.2
rear tyres, consult your authorised dealer or tyre 16.9R -- 34 473.1 186.3
supplier.
18.4R -- 34 494.7 194.8
13.6R -- 38 465.6 183.3
If the size of tyre on your tractor is not listed, then the
road speed calibration may be carried out using one 16.9R -- 38 503.4 198.2
of the following procedures. 18.4R -- 38 525.6 206.9
20.8R -- 38 549.3 216.3
Carry out the Auto calibration as previously 18.4R -- 42 552.7 217.6
described or measure the rear tyre rolling 14.9R -- 46 554.2 218.2
circumference. 480/70R -- 34 474.5 186.8
520/70R -- 34 490.6 193.1
1. To measure the rolling circumference of the rear 480/70R -- 38 506.5 199.4
tyre, park the tractor on a level surface and make
540/65R -- 38 501.5 197.4
a vertical chalk mark on the sidewall where the
tyre tread contacts the ground. Make a second 520/70R -- 38 525.6 206.9
chalk mark on the ground aligning with the mark 600/65R -- 38 523.7 206.2
on the tyre. 650/65R -- 38 544.5 214.4
580/70R -- 38 549.7 216.4
2. Slowly drive the tractor forward until the rear
wheel has made one revolution and the chalk
mark on the sidewall is again in contact with the
ground. Mark the ground again and measure the
distance between the two chalk marks.

IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit,
calibration is therefore not required.

WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor emits a low intensity
microwave signal which will not cause any ill effects
in normal use. Although the signal intensity is low, do
not look directly into the face of the sensor while in
operation so as to avoid eye damage.

2--54
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

ENHANCED KEYPAD and

PERFORMANCE MONITOR (where fitted)

103

The enhanced keypad consists of 16 buttons or 3. Engine Oil Pressure (D). This key will display the
’keys’ that select, control or programme various engine oil pressure bargraph.
functions and displays in the central and dot matrix
screens. Keys 5, 6, 10 and 11 are used to set--up and 4. Programmed Maintenance Reminder (D). The
programme many of the enhanced keypad functions. maintenance schedule key provides two levels of
reminder identified as ’Heavy’ and Light.
Unless otherwise described, depress the keys once
to obtain the appropriate display. A symbol will 5. Menu Enter (D). Depress to select set--up and
appear in the display to confirm the function programming modes.
selected.
6. Menu Scroll Up or Digit Value (D). Depress this
key repeatedly to scroll upwards through the
Legend: (D) = Dot Matrix Disply
menu or change the value of a number.
(C) = Centre Digital Display
7. P.T.O. Speed (C). Depress once to display rear
1. Hourmeter (D). Touch the key to view total Power Take Off speed, press again and hold for
number of hours that the tractor has operated. 3 seconds to show front P.T.O. speed (where
The hours recorded should be used as a guide to fitted).
the service intervals for the tractor.
8. Rear Wheel Slip (C). The level of rear wheel slip
2. Odometer (D). The odometer provides a visual will appear as a one or two digit percentage (%)
record of the distance travelled in kilometres or figure (with radar option only).
miles depending on the ground speed unit
selected. Two displays are available, ’1’ and ’2’.

2--55
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

ENHANCED KEYPAD and

PERFORMANCE MONITOR (continued)

104

9. Linkage Height Position (C). Depress once to 14. Area Accumulator (D). The total area worked will
display the rear linkage height, press again and be displayed in hectares or acres depending on
hold for 3 seconds to show front linkage height the ground speed unit selected.
(where fitted). The display will show a figure
between ’0’ (fully lowered) and ’100’ (maximum 15. Area Per Hour Forecaster (D). Touch this key
raised position). and the area/hour symbol will display together
with a forecast of the area that will be worked in
10. Exit/Cancel (D). Use this key to Exit or cancel one hour if the current rate of work is continued.
set--up and programming modes.
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per
11. Menu Scroll Down or Digit Select (D). Depress hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
this key to scroll downwards through the menu or subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
select an alternative digit in the Dot Matrix may occur.
Display.
16. Remote Valve Operation (D). The display will
12. Battery Voltage (D). With the engine running, show the flow rate through each valve as a
touch the key to display the battery symbol percentage (%), the direction of cylinder
together with a digital display of the battery movement (extend or retract) and the number of
voltage. the valve selected. (See Electronic Remote
Control Valves in Section 3).
13. Trailer Brake Air Pressure (D). Depress to
display the trailer brake air pressure bargraph.

2--56
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Odometer (Distance Record)

The odometer provides a visual record of the

distance travelled in kilometres or miles depending
on the ground speed unit selected.

Two displays are available, ’1’ and ’2’. ’1’ may be

used for individual journey distances and ’2’ to
provide a total for all journeys travelled. Both ’1’ and
’2’ may be reset to zero.

Touch the key once to select reading ’1’, touch again

to select reading ’2’. Keeping the key depressed for
more than 3 seconds will re--set the selected 105
odometer to zero.

The journey distance in the display (3) will appear in

steps of:

0 to 19.999 Km/Miles 0.001 Km/Miles

20 to 199.99 Km/Miles 0.01 Km/Miles
200 to 1999.9 Km/Miles 0.1 Km/Miles
2000 to 19999 Km/Miles 1.0 Km/Miles

NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, distance

calculations are based on axle rotation and are
subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
may occur.

Area per Hour Forecaster

Touch the AREA/HOUR key (1). The ‘AREA/HOUR’

symbol will display, together with a forecast (2) of the
area that will be worked in one hour if the current rate
of work is continued.

The area per hour will appear in steps of 0.01

Ha/Acre.

NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per

hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
may occur. 106

2--57
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Area Accumulator

NOTE: Before activating the area accumulator

function ensure the correct implement width has
been entered into the TPM memory.

The accumulated area (total area worked) can be

displayed by depressing the AREA key (1).
Depending on the unit set in the tractor speed display
(K/mh or MPH) the reading will be in hectares or
acres.

Depress the area accumulator key repeatedly to

toggle through the three displays in the dot matrix
screen:

1. OFF. The area accumulator is off.

2. ON. Area accumulator on. Area will be

accumulated as the tractor moves irrespective of
the position of the implement.

3. A. Area accumulation will start recording

when the tractor moves and the implement is
lowered. It will stop accumulating when the
implement is raised.

The area accumulator symbol (2) will appear in the

display along with the area figure.

With trailed equipment, area accumulation may be 107

temporarily interrupted, for example, at the
headland, by means of a switch connected into the
implement status socket (where fitted). See
‘Electrical Power Panel’ on page 2--23.

The area measurement in the display (3) will appear

in steps of:

0 to 199.99 Ha/acre 0.01 Ha/acre

200 to 1999.9 Ha/acre 0.1 Ha/acre
2000 to 19999 Ha/acre 1.0 Ha/acre

Area accumulation can be reset to zero at any time

by selecting OFF and holding down the AREA key (1)
FigureNO TAG, until the display returns to zero.

NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per

hour calculations are based on axle speed and are 108
subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
may occur.

2--58
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAYS

WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor, located in front of
the right-hand footsteps, emits a low intensity
microwave signal which is completely safe in normal
use. Although the signal intensity is low, do not look
directly into the face of the sensor while in operation
so as to avoid eye damage.

Programming Keys

Four keys are used to select, change or memorise

the various functions related to the performance
monitor and enhanced keypad. All programme
information will appear in the Dot Matrix Display
(DMD) along with the relevant symbol for the function
selected.

1. Menu Up/Digit Value Key. Use this key to scroll

upwards through the function menu or to
increase the value of a selected digit during a
calibration procedure. Values will increase by
one each time the key is depressed.

2. Exit/Cancel Key. Depress this key to exit the

calibration mode. The key may be used at any
time during a set--up procedure to cancel and exit
the calibration mode, however, information not
saved will be lost.

3. Menu Down/Digit Select Key. In the calibration

mode depress this key to scroll downwards
through the menu or to select a digit for 109
re--calibration. Each time the key is depressed
the flashing cursor showing the current digit
selected will move one space to the right.

4. Menu Enter Key. Depress this key for 3 seconds

to enter the programme mode, SETUP/MENU
will appear initially in the display. After 2 seconds
the display will change to show the fault symbol.
This will be accompanied by the Menu Up/Down
arrows and the Menu Enter symbol.

When the appropriate function screen has been

selected, depress the Menu/Enter key again to
access the calibration mode.

2--59
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Setting the Implement Width

In order that the micro-processor may calculate the
cumulative area, the working width of the implement
must be entered into the memory. For example, to
enter an implement working width of 4.5 metres
(14.76 ft.) carry out the following procedure.
• With the key--start in the ON position, depress
and hold the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds. The
DMD will read SETUP_MENU, this will change
to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu
Up/Down keys, scroll through the menu until the
implement width symbol is displayed.
110

• Depress the Menu/Enter key again to select the

set--up screen, a flashing cursor will appear at
the first number to be set. Using the Digit Value
key enter ’0’ then move the cursor one space to
the right with the Digit Select key and enter ’4’.
Move the cursor to the right of the decimal point
and enter ’5’. The reading displayed should now
be 04.50 mtrs (14.76 ft.).
• Touch the Menu/Enter key to store the setting
and return to the main menu.
NOTE: The micro--processor cannot calculate the
area worked unless the correct implement width is
entered. 111

Calibrating for Wheel Slip

(where fitted)
Before setting the slip alarm point, a zero wheel slip
factor has to be determined. This calibration must be
carried out on a hard level surface where wheel slip
is unlikely to occur.
NOTE: The Electronic Draft Control auto slip
function (see EDC operation) will not operate unless
this procedure is carried out.
• With the tractor stationary and the engine
running, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key
for 3 seconds. The DMD will read
112
SETUP_MENU, this will change to CAL after 2
seconds. Using the Menu/Enter key, scroll
through the menu until the wheel slip symbol is
displayed.
• Drive the tractor at a constant speed above 5
Km/h (3.1 MPH). When a steady speed has been
reached, depress the Menu Enter key, CAL ON
will appear in the display. After a short distance
touch the Menu Enter key again, the display will
change to CAL OK.
• Touch the Menu/Enter key to store the setting
and return to the main menu.

2--60
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Setting the Slip Alarm Point

NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not installed, the

slip alarm function will be omitted from the display.

The slip alarm point may be set as a one or two digit

figure that, if exceeded, will cause an audible alarm
to sound. To set a wheel slip limit of 15% carry out the
following procedure.

• With the key--start in the ON position, depress

and hold the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds. The
DMD will read SETUP_MENU, this will change
to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu 113
Up/Down keys, scroll through the menu until the
wheel slip symbol (1) is displayed.

• Depress the Menu/Enter key again to select the

set--up screen, a flashing cursor will appear at
the first number to be set. Using the Digit Value
key enter ’1’, move the cursor to the right with the
Digit Select key and, with the Digit Value key,
enter ’5’. The slip alarm point is now set at 15%.

• Touch the Menu/Enter key to memorise the

setting and return to the main menu.

If wheel slip exceeds the pre--set limit, the slip symbol

will appear in the DMD and the amber warning light
will illuminate on the instrument console.

Audible Beep -- ON/OFF

Each time one of the keys is pressed, an audible

’beep’ sound will be heard. The beep can be switched
off if required.

• With the key--start in the ON position, depress

and hold the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds. The
DMD will read SETUP_MENU, this will change
to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu
Up/Down keys, scroll through the menu until
BEEP ON/OFF is displayed.

• Depress the Menu/Enter key again to select the 114

set--up screen. Using the Menu Up/Down keys,
align the arrow (1) with ON or OFF as required.

• Touch the Menu/Enter key to store the setting

and return to the main menu. Depress the
Exit/Cancel key to return to the original display.

2--61
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Programming the Service Reminder

The service reminder function allows the operator to

programme two service interval reminders using the
Enhanced Keypad. The following procedure is the
same for LIGHT and HEAVY service intervals.

• With the key--start in the ON position, depress

and hold the Menu/Enter key for 3 seconds. The
DMD will read SETUP_MENU, this will change
to CAL after 2 seconds. Using the Menu
Up/Down keys, scroll through the menu until the
service reminder symbol (1) appears in the
display. 115

Setting a Light Service Reminder

• Depress the Menu/Enter key again to select the

Service Reminder sub--menu. Using the Menu
Up/Down keys display ’LIGHT’, touch the
Menu/Enter key and a flashing cursor (1) will
appear at the first number to be set. Using the
Digit Value key enter the first number to be set,
move the cursor one space to the right with the
Digit Select key and, with the Digit Value key,
enter the second digit, repeat for the third digit.
The display will now read LIGHT ------ (where ------
will be the selected hours).
116
• Touch the Menu/Enter key to memorise the
setting and return to the main menu. Depress the
Exit/Cancel key to return to the original display.
The service reminder is now set for the selected
period.

Two hours before the service is due the Light Service

symbol and the hours remaining will appear in the
DMD at ’key--on’ and will remain displayed for 4
seconds after the engine is started.

2--62
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Setting a Heavy Service Reminder

Select HEAVY on the main menu and repeat the

procedure used for setting the LIGHT service
reminder.

Ten hours before the service is due the Heavy

Service symbol and the hours remaining will appear
in the DMD at ’key--on’ and will remain displayed for
4 seconds after the engine is started.

117
Time Expiry Warnings

As the time to service expires, the relevant symbol

will appear hourly in the display for 20 seconds. The
number of hours remining before the service will also
be shown and this will be accompanied by the Amber
warning light. When time to service has expired, only
the symbol will appear hourly in the display.

If required, the service time countdown may be

terminated by re--setting the Service Reminder
interval to zero or by changing the period until the
next service is due.

2--63
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

TRANSMISSION OPERATION

16 x 16 (17 x 16) Electro Command

The Electro Command transmission has 4

powershift gears and four range gears providing 16
forward and reverse ratios. On 50 Km/h models, an
additional gear provides 17 forward ratios. When
operated simultaneously, the powershift and range
change buttons will provide clutchless changes on
the move through ratios 1--8 and 9--16 (17).

Ground Speeds MPH/K/mh Conversion Chart

K/mh → MPH MPH → K/mh
Ground speeds are displayed in the LCD on the
left-hand side of the instrument panel. However, as 5 → 3.1 5 → 8.0
a guide, ground speed charts for specific tyre sizes
are provided at the end of each transmission section. 10 → 6.2 10 → 16.0
15 → 9.3 15 → 24.1
If the rear tyres of your tractor are of a different size
to those shown in the charts, it may be necessary to 20 → 12.4 20 → 32.1
re--calibrate the speedometer as previously 25 → 15.5 25 → 40.2
described.
30 → 18.6 30 → 48.2
35 → 21.7 35 → 56.3
40 → 24.8
45 → 27.9
50 → 31.0

Ground Speed Conversion Chart Tyre Size Factor Tyre Size Factor
18.4R--30 0.879 480/70R--34 0.909
The size of the rear tyres on your tractor may vary
from those shown in the ground speed charts. When 12.4--32 0.788 520/70R--34 0.939
an alternative size of tyre is fitted, multiply the 16.9R--34 0.909 480/70R--38 0.970
ground speeds shown in the charts by the conversion
factors shown: 18.4R--34 0.939 540/65R--38 0.970
13.6R--38 0.909 650/60R--38 1.000
16.9R--38 0.970 650/65R--38 1.061
20.8R--38 1.061 320/90R--50 1.061
18.4R--42 1.061 ---- ----
14.9R--46 1.079 ---- ----

2--64
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

ELECTRO COMMAND TRANSMISSION

This transmission offers 16 or 17 forward, and 16

reverse ratios. An optional reduction gear set
(creeper gears) offers a further 16 ratios, forward and
reverse.

In the following text, operational information is based

on the 16 x 16 transmission (30 and 40 Km/h).
However, the 17 x 16 transmission (50 Km/h)
functions in exactly the same way.

NOTE: When fitted with a 40 Km/h Economy

Transmission, maximum tractor speed is
electronically limited to 40 Km/h (24.85 MPH) in 17th
gear.

IMPORTANT: When travelling at high road speeds

with trailed or semi--mounted equipment attached to
the tractor, ensure the equipment is rated for 50K/mh
operation in respect to its construction, brakes and
tyres.

The transmission is controlled by means of a main

shift lever, two powershift buttons and a range
change button. A shuttle lever mounted to the left of
the steering wheel selects forward or reverse drive.
Transmission and throttle controls are colour-coded
orange.

This transmission provides four powershift gears in

each of the four intermediate ranges A (1--4), B
(5--8), C (9--12), and D (13--16). Clutchless shifts
between gears 4 and 5, 12 and 13 are made by using
the range button in conjunction with the powershift
buttons. Range shifts between Low and High (8th.
and 9th. gears), can only be made with the clutch
pedal fully depressed.

Main Shift Lever

The main shift lever (1), is used to select both range

gears and main gears. When selecting High or Low
ranges (moving the lever forwards or rearwards) the 118
clutch pedal must always be depressed.

With the shuttle lever in neutral and clutch pedal fully

depressed, move the main shift lever rearward into
the Low (field) range. In this range, powershift gears
1--4 or 5--8 can be selected. Move the lever fully
forward to select powershift gears 9--12 or 13--16 in
the High range. To engage neutral, move the lever to
the mid position.

2--65
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

NOTE: With the tractor stationary and the shuttle

lever in forward or reverse drive, moving the main
shift lever from neutral without first depressing the
clutch pedal will result in the drive not being engaged.
Error code ‘N’ will appear in the transmission display
and an audible alarm will sound. Depress the clutch
pedal and shift the shuttle lever to neutral to clear the
display and re-engage the drive.

NOTE: To avoid power losses due to internal friction,

place both gearshift lever and the shuttle lever in
neutral when performing stationary operations.

119

The shift lever (1), incorporates two electrical push

buttons that are used to make instantaneous up or
down powershifts. Button (2) is depressed to make
upward changes, button (4) for downward changes.
It is not necessary to use the clutch pedal to make a
powershift.

For convenience, a duplicate set of shift buttons are

located on the right--hand control panel, see
Figure 121.

To make an upward change between gears 4 and 5

hold in the intermediate range change button (3) and
depress the upshift button (2),. The change will be 120
indicated in the gear display. Use the same
procedure to change from gear 12 to 13.

Downward changes are made using the same

procedure but depressing the downshift button (4).
If preferred, the clutch pedal may be used instead of
the intermediate range change button.

NOTE: Attempting to shift from one range to another

without using the range change button or clutch
pedal will cause the audible alarm to sound.

When the main shift lever is moved forward from

neutral or from any gear within the 1--8 range, 9th.
gear will always be selected.

Conversely, if the lever is moved rearward from 121

neutral or from the 9--16 range with the tractor
moving, the speed matching function will select the
most suitable gear between 5th and 8th. To select an
alternative gear, maintain pressure on the clutch
pedal and use the powershift buttons to engage a
different gear, then release the clutch pedal.

2--66
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Shuttle Lever

Selection of forward or reverse travel is by means of

an electrically operated shuttle lever (1), located to
the left of the steering wheel. The lever is
spring-loaded to prevent inadvertent movement, lift
toward the steering wheel before selecting forward or
reverse drive. It is not necessary to depress the
clutch pedal when operating the shuttle lever.

NOTE: Forward or reverse drive cannot be engaged

unless the operator is in the tractor seat. Additionally,
if the vehicle is moved in either direction with the
handbrake engaged, an audible alarm will be heard 122
and ’P’ will be displayed in the Dot Matrix and Digital
Gear Displays (where fitted).

NOTE: To avoid power losses due to internal friction,

place both gearshift lever and the shuttle lever in
neutral when performing stationary operations.

To reduce clutch damage caused by shuttle shifting

in too high a gear or at too high a speed, the tractor
will slow using engine braking and the transmission
will then downshift to the lowest gear within the
selected intermediate range before changing
direction.

Shuttle Mode

During normal shuttle operations the same gear is

used for both forward and reverse. However, if 13th
gear or above is selected, the shuttle gear will be 9th.

With Shuttle Mode selected, the electronic control

unit for the transmission is able to memorise shuttle
gear combinations within a range of gears. To
activate Shuttle Mode, carry out the following
procedure.

• With the key start off, move the shuttle lever to

the reverse position. Depress and hold the
transmission upshift button and turn the key start
on. Do not start the engine.

• The transmission symbol and DS H3 will appear

in the dot matrix display and the centre LCD will
show ’no’ or ’YES’. Release the upshift button.

• ’no’ indicates memory function is disabled, ’YES’

shows the memory function is activated.

• Use the upshift and downshift buttons to toggle

between ’no’ and ’YES’. With the appropriate 123
selection made, turn the key start off and return
the shuttle lever to neutral.

2--67
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Setting the Forward/Reverse Shuttle Gear

Start the engine and, with the clutch pedal

depressed, place the shuttle lever (1) in the forward
position. Do not release the clutch pedal. Using the
upshift/downshift buttons, set the forward gear.
Move the shuttle lever into reverse and repeat the
procedure to set the reverse gear. With the forward
and reverse gears set, return the shuttle lever to
neutral and release the clutch pedal. Shuttle Mode is
now activated.

NOTE: Selecting the shuttle gear with the lever in

neutral will result in the same ratio being set for both 124
forward and reverse.

WARNING
To prevent inadvertent tractor movement, always
stop the engine, place the shuttle lever in neutral and
firmly apply the parking brake before leaving the
tractor. The transmission will not prevent the tractor
from rolling when the engine is shut off.

Auto Take Off

The Auto Take Off feature permits the operator to

engage drive without using the clutch pedal by simply
moving the shuttle lever from neutral to the forward
or reverse position.
The Auto Take Off function is automatically enabled
under normal starting conditions. i.e. operator in the
driving seat, clutch pedal depressed, shuttle lever in
neutral.

After selecting the appropriate gear ranges with the

main shift lever simply move the shuttle lever to the
forward or reverse position without depressing the 125
clutch pedal. The Auto Take Off function will provide
a controlled start from rest.

NOTE: The Auto Take Off function will be disabled

if the vehicle is at rest with the shuttle lever in the
neutral position and the operator leaves the seat.
Should Auto Take Off be disabled for any reason, the
operator should carry out the following procedure to
re--enable this function.
While sitting in the seat, release the handbrake and
cycle the clutch pedal. The vehicle will then move off
in the direction selected on the shuttle lever.
Once enabled, the Auto Take Off function will
continue to function as long as the operator remains
in the seat.

2--68
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Gear Displays

Dependent upon tractor specification, two types of

gear display may be fitted.

LED Gear Display

An illuminated display (1), to the right of the main shift

lever indicates the gear selected.

As each gear is selected, the appropriate number (3)

will be illuminated in the display. With Auto Shift
engaged, the symbols for Active Road (2) and Active
Field (4) will also be illuminated. When changing the
Auto Shift point, symbol (5) will flash during the
programming procedure.

126

Digital Gear Display (where fitted)

The digital display provides a comprehensive range

of information that includes:

Headland Turn symbols (1). (where fitted)

Forward and reverse gears (2). The display
shows the current forward gear and the
corresponding reverse or ’shuttle’ gear.
Shuttle lever position. Forward, neutral and
reverse (3).
Gear span for each range (4).
127
Field and road Auto Shift (5) symbols.

Clutch Pedal

It is not necessary to use the clutch pedal (1) to make

a powershift or when shuttle shifting (changing
direction between forward and reverse). Use of the
clutch is recommended for positioning the tractor
when attaching equipment or operating in confined
spaces when the low gears are not slow enough, at
moderate/low engine speeds, to give precise control.

IMPORTANT: To avoid premature clutch wear, do

not use the clutch pedal as a footrest.

NOTE: There may be occasions when error codes 128

’N’ or ’CP’ flash in the Dot Matrix and Digital Gear
Displays (where fitted). Should this occur, move
shuttle lever to neutral (’N’) or cycle the clutch pedal
(’CP’) to clear the error.

2--69
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Driving the Tractor

With the main shift and shuttle levers in neutral,

depress the clutch pedal and start the engine.

NOTE: A neutral start switch prevents operation of

the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in neutral
and the clutch pedal is depressed.

For forward travel, with the engine idling, depress the

clutch pedal and move the range lever (1), forward
to the High range or rearward to the Low range, as
required.
129
When the tractor is initially started and the main shift
lever placed in gear, the electronic control will
automatically select the appropriate powershift ratio
for a smooth pull away, as follows:

Gear Lever Positions Ratio Selected

Field range (Low), 1 to 8 5th. gear
Road range (High), 9 to 16 9th. gear
For forward travel, with the engine idling, pull the
shuttle lever, toward the steering wheel, against light
spring-pressure, and move it up. It is not necessary
to depress the clutch pedal.

IMPORTANT: To select 14th gear or above, the

tractor must be travelling at a suitable speed before
the higher gears will engage. 14th gear or above
cannot be engaged when the tractor is stationery.
130

Once moving, press the upshift button (1), three

times and gears 6, 7 and 8 will be selected in
sequence. Alternatively, hold the button in and the
transmission will make sequential gear changes at
1.75 second intervals until the button is released or
8th. gear is reached. Use the downshift button (2) in
the same manner to make down shifts.

IMPORTANT: Downshifts of either one or more

gears, cannot be made if the tractor engine speed is
too high. To downshift, reduce tractor speed (and
therefore engine speed) before attempting to
downshift.
131
IMPORTANT: Always use the clutch pedal when
changing between ranges 8th and 9th gears.

NOTE: When operating in temperatures below --18°

C (0° F) with cold transmission oil, avoid excessive
shuttle operations until the oil has warmed up.

2--70
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

To reverse the direction of travel pull the shuttle lever

toward the steering wheel, then move it down.
Transmission output speed and clutch pack
engagement are automatically monitored to take up
the drive smoothly in the opposite direction. Control
tractor speed by means of the throttle.

NOTE: If, for example, 3rd. gear is selected in

forward travel, then the same ratio will be selected
when the shuttle lever is moved to the reverse travel
position.

If it is necessary to hillstart with a heavy trailer in low

range then, when 8th. speed is reached, change to 132
the high range, the transmission will automatically
select the lowest ratio (9th.) in the high range.

When starting off in the highest range, the

transmission will always try to set off in 9th. gear. If
required, this feature may be overridden and a higher
gear selected by partially releasing the clutch then
powershifting up to the required gear before the
clutch ‘bite’ point is reached.

IMPORTANT: A tractor with electronic transmission

cannot be tow-started and must not be towed other
than to remove it from a field or onto a trailer or truck.

Changing the Shuttle (reverse) Gear

(Digital Gear Display Only)

For certain applications it may be beneficial to

change the reverse gear ratio from the one normally
selected when shuttling i.e. 4th forward gear will be
matched by 4th reverse gear. If required, a reverse
ratio up to three gears higher, or lower, may be set
providing they are within the same range.

To select an alternative reverse ratio to the default

gear i.e. 4th, move the shuttle lever into reverse and,
with the tractor moving select 2nd gear using the
downshift button. The transmission will now
automatically select 2nd gear when moving the 133
shuttle lever into reverse.

This procedure may be applied in gear ranges 1--4

and 5--8. When moving from one range to another,
either upwards or downwards, the default reverse
gear will always be selected until the operator
chooses an alternative ratio.

When operating in the higher ratios 13--16, the

default reverse gear will always be 9th unless a lower
ratio is selected by the operator.

2--71
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Speed Matching

Speed matching will normally only permit a downshift

to a lower gear. It will however, select a higher gear
if the the engine attempts to overspeed.

When travelling on the road in High range, gears 13

to 16, the transmission will automatically select a
gear to match engine speed to road speed if the
following method is adopted:

To downshift: Decrease engine speed, depress the

clutch pedal while simultaneously increasing engine
speed by pressing the foot throttle further down.
When the clutch pedal is released, the transmission
will automatically select a lower gear (provided 13th.
speed is not already selected) matching engine
speed to road speed.

NOTE: When operating in Auto Shift high range, the

lowest downshift gear will become 9th, see text on
Auto Shift.

In high range, the operator can manually select

another gear without affecting the speed matching
function.

With the range lever placed in low, speed matching

will operate down to 5th gear.

NOTE: The speed matching function will be disabled

if the operator manually selects a gear when in the
low range.

2--72
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Auto Shift Function

(Active Electro Command Only)

With Auto Shift engaged, the transmission on your

tractor is able to make automatic gearshifts, both up
and down, within a 4 gear span based on speed and
load. This can be extended to an 8 gear auto shift in
the high range for road use.

Auto Shifting in Active Field Gears

In Active Field, auto shifts can be made within gear

spans 1--4 or 5--8. With the main shift lever in the low
range (lever fully rearward), momentarily depress
the Auto Shift button. The Active Field symbol
(plough) will appear in the gear display and the Auto
switch will illuminate to confirm engagement.

Moving off in 1st gear, the transmission will

automatically upshift through gears 2 and 3 until 4th
gear is engaged. To Auto Shift through gears 5 to 8,
select 5th gear using the range change button and
depress the Auto Shift button again, the transmission
134
will now automatically upshift through gears 5 to 8.

As the tractor speed reduces, or the load on the

engine increases, the transmission will automatically
downshift to a lower gear.

If necessary, Active Field can be extended to include

gears 9 to 12. To engage, move the main shift lever
fully forward to select any gear in the 9 to 12 range,
then depress the Auto Shift button again. To confirm
engagement, both Active Field and Active Road
symbols will illuminate.

In ranges 1--4, 5--8 and 9--12, Auto Shift may be

linked to 3--point hitch operation. Raising the 3--point
hitch with the fast raise switch will put Auto Shift into
135
standby mode, lowering the hitch will re--activate the
Auto Shift function.

NOTE: If the 3--point hitch was in the raised position

when the Auto Shift function was activated and has
not been moved, then Auto Shift will operate without
lowering the hitch.

Auto Shift will also enter standby mode if the clutch

pedal is depressed or the shuttle lever is moved from
the forward drive position.

To cancel Auto Shift press and release the switch or

operate the upshift or downshift button.

NOTE: When using engine braking to slow the

tractor, operating the upshift or downshift buttons will
not disable Auto Shift unless the selected gear is
outside the Auto Shift range.

2--73
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Changing the Active Field Auto Shift Gear

Span

In some field operations it may be beneficial to

reduce the number of Auto Shift gears in the span to
provide a more consistent tractor speed or engine
speed.

The Active Field Auto Shift function normally

operates within a four gear span, such as 1--4, 5--8
or 9--12. However, the number of auto shifts within a
selected range may be reduced from a 4 gear span
to a 3, or a 2 gear span as required.

NOTE: All adjustments to the Auto Shift span must

be made with the tractor moving and the relative Auto
Shift range selected.

NOTE: Changes made to the Auto Shift gear span

will not be retained at key--off.

Reducing the gear span upper limit: Increase

tractor speed until the current Auto Shift upper gear
is engaged then momentarily depress the downshift
button (2). The transmission will downshift one gear
which becomes the new upper limit Auto Shift gear.
To reduce the span further, depress the downshift
button again.

Raising the gear span upper limit: Increase

tractor speed until the upper gear is engaged then
momentarily depress the upshift button (1). 136
Providing the currently engaged gear is not the
highest in the range, the transmission will upshift to
the next gear. This becomes the new Auto Shift
upper limit gear.

Reducing the gear span lower limit: Slow the

tractor until the lowest Auto Shift gear is engaged and
depress the downshift button (2) once. Providing the
currently engaged gear is not the lowest in the range,
the transmission will downshift one gear. This
becomes the new lower limit Auto Shift gear.

Raising the gear span lower limit: Reduce tractor

speed until the lowest Auto Shift gear is engaged and
momentarily depress the upshift button (2). The
transmission will upshift one gear, this becomes the
new lower limit Auto Shift gear.

2--74
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

The Auto Shift gear span is shown in the

transmission display. Figures 137 and 138 show a 3
gear span of 6, 7 and 8. The currently selected gear
is 7th.

Digital Display: The span of gears will be

represented by flashing bars and the selected gear
by the solid block, see Figure 137.

LED Display: The span of gears will be identified by

flashing digits and the engaged gear by the
permanently lit digit, see Figure 138.

137

With Auto Shift in standby mode, the operator can

manually shift to any gear, even if it is outside the
current range of Auto Shift gears. Providing the
operator selects a gear within the current Auto Shift
range prior to exiting standby mode (i.e. lowering the
3--point hitch), then the Auto Shift function will be
resumed.

However, if the gear selected is outside the current

range when exiting standby, the Auto Shift function
will be cancelled.

If 8th gear is selected and the Auto Shift span is 5,

6 and 7, then the transmission will immediately 138
downshift to 7th gear on exiting standby mode.

If the Auto Shift span is 6, 7 and 8 and 5th gear is

selected on exiting the standby mode, then the
transmission will remain in 5th until conditions permit
a normal auto upshift to 6th gear. At this point the
original Auto Shift gear span of 6, 7, and 8 will be
re--instated.

2--75
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Auto Shifting in Road Gears

In Active Road, Auto Shift will make upshifts or

downshifts through gears 9--12 or 13--16. With the
main shift lever moved fully forward, momentarily
depress the Auto Shift button (1), the Active Road
symbol (trailer) will illuminate in the gear display to
confirm engagement.
The transmission will now make automatic shifts
through gears 9 to 12 or 13 to 16 dependant on the
range selected.
By depressing the Auto Shift button twice, Active
Road can be programmed to automatically upshift or 139
downshift through gears 9 to 16 including the range
change from 12th to 13th gear.

The Electro Command transmission allows

automatic shifts to be made between 9th and 16th
gears when operating in extended Active Road. This
extended span of gears will require a range change
between 12th and 13th gears.

The duration of a shift between 12th and 13th gears

will, by necessity, be longer in duration than shifts not
requiring a range change. In most situations, the time
delay will not be noticeable and the shift will complete
as expected. However, in certain conditions, e.g.
accelerating uphill whilst pulling a fully laden trailer,
this delay may cause the tractor to lose momentum
resulting in a downshift rather than to upshift as
expected.

Where conditions of this type are encountered, it is

recommended to operate the tractor in Active Road
and manually shift between 12th and 13th gears. The
duration of the shift can be further reduced by
momentarily depressing and releasing the clutch
pedal instead of the using the range button.

Also, when operating on a downhill slope, a 13th --

12th downshift will promote a momentary loss of
drive as the range change occurs. As with any
vehicle, it is important to select the correct gear
before descending a steep gradient but if a downshift
between 13th to 12th gears is required, then it is
recommended to briefly apply the tractor footbrakes
during the shift.

2--76
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Changing the Shift Point

To suit different applications, the point at which the

transmission makes an automatic gear shift may be
adjusted from the default setting of 20%. Auto Shift 1
gear changes are related to an increase or decrease
in engine speed which can be set at 5, 10, 15, 20 or
25 percent.
NOTE: For transport operations the shift point will
automatically default to 20% if a lower figure has
been set. If the shift point is set at 25%, it will remain
at that setting.
With the shift point set at 10%, a transmission upshift 140
will occur every time the engine speed increases by
10%. Consequently, as the engine speed decreases
by the same amount, the transmission will make a
downshift.
It is recommended that during field operations the
shift point is set at a low percentage, and for road
transport applications, set at a higher figure.

To change the shift point, depress and hold the Auto

Shift button for at least one second. The current shift
point figure appears in the Display of Gears and the
’ramp’ symbol (1) begins to flash. Depress the Auto
Shift button repeatedly to scroll through the shift 1
points.

With the new shift point selected, release the Auto

Shift button and pause for five seconds. The new
setting will be memorised and the display will return
to normal.

IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), electronic

programme settings made during tractor operation
are transferred from the operating memory to the 141
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay
before turning the key on again.

2--77
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Error Codes

In the unlikely event of a fault occurring in the

transmission controls or electronic circuitry, the 1
malfunction symbol (1) and a four-digit error code
(2), will appear in the Dot Matrix Display on the
instrument panel.

The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the 2

type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. In
this event, the tractor will require the attention of your
authorised dealer. Error codes for the transmission
will start with the figure ’2’.
142
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become
disabled, contact your authorised dealer and report
the error code displayed.

There are a number of ’action reqired’ error codes

that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display, these are
listed below.

Error
Code Action Required
P Park brake on, release brake lever.
CP Depress clutch pedal to enable
transmission (restore drive).
N Place the shuttle lever in neutral.

Transmission Calibration

Should transmission shifts become slow or jerky, the

clutches in the transmission may require
re--calibrating. Consult your authorised dealer.

2--78
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Creeper Gears (where fitted)

For operations requiring extra low ground speeds,

reduction gear sets (creeper gears) are available.
The reduction gear set is installed within the rear axle
assembly.

As the name implies, the reduction gear set has the

effect of reducing all the ratios within the main
transmission to provide an additional sixteen gears
in forward and reverse.

The creeper gears are selected by means of a rocker

switch located on the right-hand control console. 143

With the engine running, clutch depressed and the

shuttle lever in neutral, apply and hold down the
tractor footbrakes. Momentarily depress the upper
part of the selector switch Figure 143, to engage the
creeper gears.

The creep speed symbol (1), will appear flashing in

the transmission display. When the creep gears are
fully engaged the symbol will cease to flash and
become steady.

To disengage creeper gears, repeat the above

procedure and depress the selector switch again.
The creep speed symbol will cease to illuminate. 144

IMPORTANT: The creeper gears offer very low

ground speeds. Do not use the low gearing
advantage to apply excessive draft loads to the
tractor.

2--79
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min)
with 30 Km/h Transmission (16 x 16) and Creeper Speeds -- All Models

Rear Tyre Size

Gear Ratio Range
18.4R--38, 520/70R--38, 600/65R--38
FORWARD RATIOS Standard Speeds Creeper Speeds
F1 A 2.28 (1.42) 0.23 (0.14)
F2 A 2.78 (1.73) 0.28 (0.17)
F3 A 3.40 (2.12) 0.34 (0.21)
F4 A 4.15 (2.59) 0.41 (0.26)
F5 B 5.35 (3.33) 0.53 (0.33)
F6 B 6.53 (4.07) 0.65 (0.40)
F7 B 7.98 (4.98) 0.79 (0.50)
F8 B 9.75 (6.08) 0.97 (0.61)
F9 C 7.07 (4.41) 0.70 (0.44)
F10 C 8.63 (5.39) 0.86 (0.54)
F11 C 10.56 (6.58) 1.05 (0.65)
F12 C 12.90 (8.04) 1.28 (0.80)
F13 D 16.60 (10.35) 1.65 (1.03)
F14 D 20.28 (12.65) 2.02 (1.26)
F15 D 24.80 (15.47) 2.47 (1.54)
F16 D 30.30 (18.90) 3.01 (1.88)

REVERSE RATIOS Standard Speeds Creeper Speeds

R1 A 2.25 (1.40) 0.22 (0.14)
R2 A 2.75 (1.71) 0.27 (0.17)
R3 A 3.36 (2.10) 0.33 (0.21)
R4 A 4.11 (2.56) 0.41 (0.25)
R5 B 5.28 (3.29) 0.53 (0.33)
R6 B 6.45 (4.03) 0.64 (0.40)
R7 B 7.89 (4.92) 0.78 (0.49)
R8 B 9.64 (6.01) 0.96 (0.60)
R9 C 6.98 (4.36) 0.69 (0.43)
R10 C 8.53 (5.32) 0.85 (0.53)
R11 C 10.44 (6.51) 1.04 (0.65)
R12 C 12.75 (7.95) 1.27 (0.79)
R13 D 16.41 (10.23) 1.63 (1.02)
R14 D 20.05 (12.50) 1.99 (1.24)
R15 D 24.52 (15.29) 2.44 (1.52)
R16 D 29.96 (18.67) 2.98 (1.86)

2--80
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) with 40
and 50 Km/h Transmission (16 x 16 or 17 x 16) and Creeper Speeds -- All Models

Rear Tyre Size

Gear Ratio Range
18.4R--38, 520/70R--38, 600/65R--38
FORWARD RATIOS Standard Speeds Creeper Speeds
F1 A 2.27 (1.41) 0.19 (0.12)
F2 A 2.78 (1.73) 0.23 (0.14)
F3 A 3.39 (2.11) 0.28 (0.17)
F4 A 4.15 (2.59) 0.34 (0.21)
F5 B 5.32 (3.32) 0.53 (0.33)
F6 B 6.53 (5.32) 0.65 (0.40)
F7 B 7.95 (4.96) 0.79 (0.49)
F8 B 9.75 (6.08) 0.97 (0.61)
F9 C 8.86 (5.53) 0.88 (0.55)
F10 C 10.87 (6.78) 1.08 (0.67)
F11 C 13.24 (8.26) 1.32 (0.82)
F12 C 16.24 (10.13) 1.61 (1.01)
F13 D 20.82 (12.98) 2.07 (1.29)
F14 D 25.54 (15.93) 2.54 (1.58)
F15 D 31.09 (19.39) 3.09 (1.93)
F16 D 38.14 (23.79) 3.79 (2.37)
F17 (F17E) D 45.82 (*40.00) (28.47) (*24.85) -- --
NOTE: *Maximum speed with 40 Km/h Economy Transmission
NOTE: Ratio F17 not available with 40 km/h transmission
NOTE: Creeper Speeds not available with 50 km/h transmission
REVERSE RATIOS Standard Speeds Creeper Speeds
R1 A 2.24 (1.40) 0.19 (0.12)
R2 A 2.75 (1.71) 0.23 (0.14)
R3 A 3.35 (2.09) 0.28 (0.17)
R4 A 4.10 (2.56) 0.34 (0.21)
R5 B 5.26 (3.28) 0.52 (0.33)
R6 B 6.45 (4.03) 0.64 (0.40)
R7 B 7.86 (4.90) 0.78 (0.49)
R8 B 9.64 (6.01) 0.96 (0.60)
R9 C 8.76 (5.46) 0.87 (0.54)
R10 C 10.74 (6.70) 1.07 (0.67)
R11 C 13.08 (8.16) 1.30 (0.81)
R12 C 16.05 (10.01) 1.60 (0.99)
R13 D 20.57 (12.83) 2.05 (1.28)
R14 D 25.24 (15.74) 2.51 (1.56)
R15 D 30.73 (19.17) 3.06 (1.91)
R16 D 37.70 (23.51) 3.75 (2.34)

2--81
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

Four wheel drive tractors have a differential lock

installed in the front and rear axles to lock all four
wheels together in conditions where wheel slip may
occur. Two wheel drive tractors have a differential
lock in the rear axle only.

The differential locks are controlled by a spring

centered rocker switch on the console to the right of
the seat.

The differential lock(s) may be operated in manual

mode or automatic mode. To confirm mode selected, 145
the appropriate symbol on the switch will illuminate
when engaged.

WARNING
Avoid using the differential lock at speeds above
8km/h (5 MPH) and never at speeds above 15 km/h
(9 MPH) or at any time when turning the tractor.
When engaged, the differential lock will make
steering the tractor very difficult.

IMPORTANT: If wheel spin is encountered, reduce

engine speed before engaging the differential lock,
to avoid shock loads to the transmission.

Operating in Manual Mode (all models)

In slippery conditions, momentarily depress the

bottom of the switch Figure 145 , to lock both wheels
together. The differential lock(s) will engage and a
warning light in the switch and on the instrument
panel (1) will light up.

When one or both brake pedals are applied or if the

switch is returned to the off (central) position,
disengagement will occur and the warning lights in
the switch and instrument panel will go out.
Alternatively, depress the bottom of the switch again
to disengage the differential lock(s). 146

NOTE: The lock(s) will remain engaged until traction

at the wheels equalises.

2--82
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

Operating in Automatic Mode

To engage both front and rear differential locks in

automatic mode, depress the top of the switch. The
warning light in the switch will illuminate. The
indicator light (1) Figure 148 on the instrument panel
will also illuminate but will only remain lit while the
differential locks are engaged.

In automatic mode, disengagement of the locks will

occur as follows:

147

Fast raise switch Temporary

activated (to raise the disengagement (will
rear 3--point hitch) re--engage when 3--point
hitch is lowered
Either brake pedal is Temporary
applied disengagement
Both brake pedals are Differential lock remains
applied simultaneously engaged
Tractor speed exceeds Differential locks will
15 Km/h (9 MPH) permanently disengage
Front steering angle Temporary
exceeds pre--set limits disengagement (will
(where fitted) re--engage when
steering angle is 148
reduced)
Momentarily depress the Differential locks will
top of the differential lock permanently disengage
rocker switch

NOTE: If the differential lock is active when the

key--start is turned off, it will remain active when the
key--start is switched on again.

2--83
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

Four wheel drive greatly improves traction in difficult

conditions. The drive to the front wheels is designed
to be engaged or disengaged with the tractor
stationary or moving.

NOTE: The drive to the front wheels is actuated by

a three position rocker switch on the right--hand
control console. To confirm mode selected, the
appropriate symbol on the switch will illuminate when
engaged.

149

Operating in Manual Mode

Press the bottom of the switch to engage the drive to

the front wheels. Warning lights in the switch and
instrument panel will illuminate when four wheel drive
is engaged. To disengage four wheel drive return the
switch to the off (central) position.

NOTE: If four wheel drive is engaged when the

key--start is turned off, it will remain engaged when
the key--start is switched on again.

Operating in Automatic Mode (where fitted)

To engage automatic four wheel drive mode

momentarily depress the top of the four wheel drive
switch Figure 149. The warning light in the switch will
illuminate. The indicator light (1) Figure 150 on the
instrument panel will also illuminate but will only
remain lit while four wheel drive is engaged.

Four wheel drive will remain permanently engaged

unless one of the following occurs:

• Wheel speed exceeds 20 Km/h (12.4 MPH).

Four wheel drive will re--engage when wheel 150
speed falls below 18 Km/h (11.1 MPH)

2--84
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

NOTE: The following applies only to tractors fitted

with a steering angle sensor.

• Wheel speed falls below 10 Km/h (6.2 MPH) and

steering angle exceeds 30° (21° with
SuperSteer). Four wheel drive will re--engage
when the steering angle is reduced.

• Wheel speed is between 10 and 20 Km/h (6.2

and 12.4 MPH) and steering angle exceeds 25°
(17° with SuperSteeer). Four wheel drive will
re--engage when the steering angle is reduced.

NOTE: The above steering angles are set during 151

manufacture, if an alternative angle setting is
required, consult your authorised dealer.

The indicator light (1) Figure 151 on the instrument

panel will also illuminate but will only remain lit when
four wheel drive is engaged.

NOTE: To avoid excessive tyre wear when travelling

on the public highway or any hard surface, it is
recommended that four wheel drive be disengaged.

WARNING
Tractors with four wheel drive engaged or
disengaged should not be allowed to overspeed by
towing or coasting downhill with clutch depressed or
transmission in neutral. This may cause loss of
control, personal injury to the operator or bystanders
or failure of the drive shaft.

NOTE: Keep the tractor in the same gear going

downhill as would be used when going uphill.

WARNING
Your tractor is equipped with very efficient,
hydraulically actuated rear wheel brakes. On four
wheel drive tractors the drive to the front axle is
automatically engaged, at speeds above 8.5 km/h
(5.2 MPH), when the brakes are applied, to provide
four wheel braking. Owners should be aware of the
effectiveness of four wheel braking which greatly
enhances braking performance. Care should be
taken during heavy braking, particularly if the rear of
the tractor is unballasted.

2--85
 SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION

TERRAGLIDE™ FRONT AXLE

SUSPENSION (where fitted)

The optional, self-levelling, front axle suspension will

provide improved stability, control, comfort and
traction. Terraglide is automatically activated each
time the tractor is started but will not function at
speeds below 1.5 k/mh (0.9 MPH).

When operating at speeds up to 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH),

the front axle suspension may be locked out if not
required. A warning light in the switch will indicate
lock out is engaged.
152
To lock out the suspension, press the top of the
switch on the right-hand control panel. Press the top
of the switch again to reactivate the suspension
facility.

At speeds above 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH), the suspension

will automatically re--engage, overriding axle lock
out. In this situation the warning light will remain on.

NOTE: Should the lock out switch warning light begin

to flash, this would indicate a malfunction of the
suspension system. Consult your authorised dealer.

IMPORTANT: See Ballasting and Tyres, page

3--149, regarding the use of front end weights with
front axle suspension.

WARNING
Hydraulic oil in the front axle suspension system
operates under very high pressure. Escaping
hydraulic oil under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury. Unqualified persons should
not attempt to disconnect any pipework in the front
axle hydraulic system. Failure to follow these
instructions can result in serious injury.

WARNING
If a transmission ratio is engaged, with the engine
running and the tractor supported on axle stands, the
self-levelling function of the suspension may cause
the axle to make corrections (move up and down).
The suspension should be locked out to maintain
stability.

2--86
 SECTION 3
FIELD OPERATION

BEFORE OPERATING

CAUTION Page Subject

Before driving or operating the tractor, study the
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual. Important Information 3--2
Operating in Cold Temperatures 3--4
Read this section carefully for a thorough Boosting the Tractor Battery 3--7
understanding of operational requirements. Even if
you operate other tractors, you should thoroughly Starting the Engine 3--8
read this section of the manual and ensure that you Stopping the Engine 3--11
are familiar with the location and function of all the
features of the tractor. Engine Power Management 3--13
Constant Engine Speed Control 3--14
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate
the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the Headland Turn Sequence 3--16
controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is
moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of Fast Steer Operation 3--28
the tractor, consult your authorised dealer. Rear Power Take--Off 3--30

See Section 4 for lubrication and maintenance Front Power Take--Off and 3--point Hitch 3--51
requirements. Tractor specifications will be found in Electronic Draft Control 3--59
Section 8.
Remote Control Valves 3--71
This section is split into a number of different Electro--Hydraulic Remote Control Valves 3--81
subjects, as follows. A comprehensive index is
provided at the end of this manual. Hydraulic Power Beyond Ports 3--93
Using Remote Hydraulic Equipment 3--95
PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS
Rear Three-point Hitch 3--97
Your tractor utilises two memory facilities to control Quick Hitch 3--104
and memorise settings for the various electronic
functions. The operating memory temporarily stores Linkage Stabilisers 3--106
setting adjustments made while operating the tractor
Drawbars and Towing Attachments 3--111
and these are uploaded to the main memory when
you key--off (engine stop). Hydraulic Trailer Brakes 3--128
Air-Operated Trailer Brakes 3--130
If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data
is being uploaded, some of it may be lost or Front Wheel Track Adjustment 3--135
corrupted.
Rear Wheel Track Adjustment 3--141
If you have made changes to any memorised Ballasting and Tyres 3--148
settings while operating the tractor, pause for five
seconds between key--off and key--on to allow the
data to upload from the operating memory to the
main memory. Once uploaded, the new settings will
remain unchanged until they are re--programmed.

3--1
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

RUNNING--IN PROCEDURE PRE-OPERATION CHECKS

Your new tractor will provide long and dependable Before operating the tractor, ensure that you are
service if given proper care during the 50 hour thoroughly familiar with the location and operation of
running--in period and if serviced at the the controls.
recommended intervals.
Perform all daily lubrication and maintenance
Avoid overloading the engine. Operating in too high
operations in accordance with Section 4.
a gear under heavy load may cause excessive
engine overloading. Overloading occurs when the
engine will not respond to a throttle increase. After completing the daily maintenance operations,
perform a walk around visual inspection of the
Do not operate without a load on the engine. This can tractor. Pay particular attention to the following
be as harmful to the engine as overloading. Vary the items:
type of operation undertaken so that the engine is
subjected to heavy as well as light loads during the • Fan belt for cracks
running--in period.
• Engine area for accumulation of debris
Use the lower gear ratios when pulling heavy loads
and avoid continuous operation at constant engine
• Hoses, lines and fittings for leaks or damage.
speeds. Operating the tractor in too low a gear with
a light load and high engine speed will waste fuel. You
will save fuel and minimise engine wear by selecting • Tyres for damage
the correct gear ratio for each particular operation.
• Hardware for looseness
Check the instruments and warning lights frequently
and keep the radiator and various oil reservoirs filled • Driveline and hydraulic pump areas for leaks or
to the recommended levels. debris accumulation

Make any necessary repairs before using the tractor.

PRESSURE WASHING THE TRACTOR

Your tractor is fitted with a number of electronic

control units (ECU’s) that are linked to various
sensors throughout the vehicle. The ECU’s control,
monitor, and provide information relating to engine,
transmission, P.T.O. and hydraulic functions.

It is very important therefore, when cleaning the

tractor body or chassis with a high pressure water jet,
that care should be taken not to aim the water jet
directly at any electrical component, wiring harness
or connector.

3--2
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TOWING THE TRACTOR CARRYING THE TRACTOR ON A

TRANSPORTER
IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a
short distance, such as out of a building. Do not tow Transport the tractor with all four wheels on a flat bed
on roadways or as a method of transport. trailer or truck. Securely chain the tractor to the
transporter.
IMPORTANT: If it is necessary to tow the tractor, all
gear levers must be moved to the neutral position IMPORTANT: Do not chain around the four wheel
before stopping the engine otherwise damage to drive shaft, steering cylinders, front wheel drive axle
transmission components may occur during towing. or other components that could be damaged by
If creeper gears (reduction gear set) are fitted, then contacting the chain or by heavy loading.
the selector control must be in the off position.
Use the drawbar or drawbar hanger for a rear tie
Use a strong chain when towing the tractor. Tow the down point.
tractor from the rear using only the drawbar, rear tow
hitch or the three-point hitch. Tow the tractor from the IMPORTANT: Cover the silencer outlet so that the
front using the tow pin in the front weights or front wind does not spin the turbocharger and damage the
support. Have an operator steer and brake the bearings. Turbocharger turbine freewheeling
tractor. (turning without engine running) must be avoided
since lubrication will not be provided to the
To avoid damaging the transmission or other turbocharger bearings.
components that turn but are not lubricated during
towing, observe the following:

• Only tow a short distance Where road speeds in excess of 50 Km/h (31 MPH)
are likely to occur when transporting the tractor, it is
• Keep speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h) advisable to secure the high visibilty roof panel with
ties to prevent it from opening.
• If possible, run the engine to provide lubrication
to the transmission and power steering.

CAUTION
Do not tow the tractor faster than 8 Km/h (5 MPH).
The steering is much slower and steering wheel
effort is much greater without the engine running.

WARNING
Do not use cables or rope to tow the tractor. If the
cable or rope breaks or slips, it may whip with
sufficient force to cause serious injury. When using
a chain, attach the chain with the hook open side
facing up. If the hook slips, it will drop down instead 1
of flying up.
Secure both handles to the sunvisor support using
a flexible strap such as a cable tie (1) as shown in the
illustration above. Do not use wire or metal straps as
NOTE: Four wheel drive will be engaged if the engine
these may damage the paintwork.
is not running, regardless of the position of the 4WD
activation switch.

3--3
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

OPERATING IN COLD TEMPERATURES

To start and operate your tractor during ambient During cold ambient temperatures, the engine may
temperatures of --1° C (30° F) and below, observe the not reach or maintain the correct operating
following instructions. temperature. Slow engine speeds in cold
temperatures can cause damage to the engine. Use
• BATTERIES -- Ensure the batteries are fully the following procedure to warm the engine and
charged and the terminals are clean and tight. transmission oils and to maintain the correct
operating temperatures.
• FUEL -- Must be clean and free of water. Consult
your fuel supplier for cold weather fuel Warming the Engine and Transmission
requirements in your area.
• Start the engine using the procedure shown in
• ENGINE OIL -- Ensure the oil is the correct the ’Starting the Engine’ section of this manual.
viscosity for the ambient temperature range.

• TRANSMISSION/HYDRAULIC OIL -- Use low NOTE: During engine warm up, an electronically
ambient temperature transmission oil, see your controlled engine may not run smoothly until the
authorised dealer. temperature increases.

NOTE: If continuous operation is required in • To heat the transmission oil to an operating

temperatures below --28° C (--20° F), change the temperature, run the engine at 1500 r.p.m. for
transmission/hydraulic oil to one of a lower approximately five minutes with the
temperature rating. This type of oil is more fluid at transmission/shuttle lever in neutral and the
extremely cold temperatures. parking brake applied.

• ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM -- Must have a NOTE: At temperatures below 0° C (32° F), the
minimum of 50% ethylene glycol solution for tractor must be run at 1500 r.p.m. until it warms up.
system protection. Erratic transmission operation and heavy steering
may occur until the oil is warm. Always use a
• TYRES -- If the tyres contain liquid ballast they transmission oil heater and engine coolant heater to
must be protected against temperatures below reduce warm up time.
0° C (32° F). Consult your dealer.
Maintaining Engine Temperature
• CONDENSATION IN THE FUEL TANK -- To
prevent condensation forming in the fuel tank When the engine is operating in cold ambient
and water entering the fuel system, fill the fuel temperatures without load, maintain correct
tank at the end of each day. operating temperature as described below.
• WATER IN THE FUEL SYSTEM. Drain the
pre--filter and water separator on a regular basis • Run the engine at approximately 1500 r.p.m.
to prevent build up of water in the system.
• Cover the front grille of the tractor to control the
• TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER. Use a amount of air passing through the engine
transmission oil heater to maintain oil radiator.
temperature when the tractor is not being used.
Stopping the Engine
Maintaining Operating Temperatures
• Run the engine at a slow speed for a short period
of time. This will permit the engine temperature
IMPORTANT: During cold ambient temperatures, to decrease gradually before stopping the
never run the engine at low idle speed for long engine.
periods of time or when the coolant temperature is
below normal.

3--4
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

COOLANT IMMERSION HEATER

(where fitted)

WARNING
To avoid shocks or other injuries, never use an
unearthed or inadequate extension lead with the
coolant or oil heater. Always use an earthed, three
core extension lead, which is rated for at least a 15
amp load, in conjunction with a residual current
circuit breaker or earth leakage trip device.

This accessory consists of a heating element fitted

into one of the core plug apertures on the right--hand
side of the block. The heater is available in 120 or 240
volts A.C only. This accessory provides easier
starting down to --29° C (--20° F).
2

To operate the heater, connect the heater extension

cable to the socket (1) adjacent to the right--hand cab
steps. Plug the free end of the heater cable into a
suitable outlet (using a voltage transformer, if
necessary) for up to four hours before carrying out
the cold weather starting procedure.

FUEL HEATER
(where fitted)

The fuel heater consists of a heating element

installed in the primary fuel filter. The heater operates
in conjunction with the grid heater in the engine inlet
manifold.

Operation of the grid heater/fuel heater is automatic

when the ambient temperature falls to --29° C (--20°
F).

See Grid Heater Cold Start Aid on page 3--9.

3

3--5
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER

(where fitted)

This accessory consists of a 120 volt or 240 volt A.C.

heating element installed in the transmission
housing.

This accessory provides for faster warm up of the

transmission/hydraulic oil when operating in low
ambient temperatures.

Connect the 120 volt heater extension cable to the

plug at (1), Figure 4.
4
Connect the 240 volt heater extension cable to the
plug at (1), Figure 5.

To operate the heater, connect the plug on the free

end of the heater cable to a suitable outlet (using a
voltage transformer, if necessary) for up to four hours
before starting the engine.

NOTE: Do not use the heater when the oil is very cold
as this may ’scorch’ the oil. Use the heater after the
tractor has been operated and the transmission oil is
still wram. This will maintain oil temperature for
easier starting in very cold weather.
5

3--6
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

BOOSTING THE TRACTOR BATTERY

Using Remote Jump Terminals

WARNING
Always sit in the driver’s seat to operate the starter
motor. If the key-start switch is by-passed and the
tractor has been left in gear, sudden and unexpected
movement of the tractor or a tractor runaway may
result which could cause serious injury. Wear eye 1
protection when starting the tractor with jump leads
or when charging the battery.

If it is necessary to use jump leads (booster cables)

to start the tractor, use only heavy duty leads and 2
proceed as follows: 50032874

6
The remote jump terminals, installed on the
right-hand side of the engine, provide an easy
method of boosting the tractor battery without having
to remove the battery cover.

The positive terminal (1), is attached to the starter

solenoid, and is encased in a plastic housing.

The negative terminal (2) attaches to the upper

mounting bolt of the starter.

Connect one end of red jump lead, to the positive,

(+), remote jump terminal, (1), and the other end to
the positive, (+), terminal of the auxiliary battery.

Connect one end of black jump lead, to the negative,

(--), remote jump terminal,(2), and the other end to
negative, (--), terminal of auxiliary battery.

When the engine starts allow it to run at idle speed,

turn on all electrical equipment (lights, etc.) then
disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the
connecting procedure. This will help protect the
alternator from possible damage due to extreme load
changes.

3--7
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Turn off all electrical equipment not required and run

the tractor engine until the battery is fully charged.

IMPORTANT: When using an auxiliary battery to

start the engine, ensure that the polarity of the jump
leads is correct -- positive to positive, negative to
negative, otherwise the alternator may be damaged.
Only use an auxiliary battery if the tractor batteries
are discharged. Excessive amperage (above 1600
cca) may damage the starting motor. In the event of
the batteries being severely discharged, such that
terminal voltage is below 7 volts, recovery will require
a special charging procedure. See your authorised
dealer.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting the engine, always carry out the

following procedure:
• Sit in the driver’s seat.

• Ensure the parking brake is firmly applied.

• Ensure that all gearshift levers are in neutral.

• Ensure the shuttle lever is in neutral.

• Ensure that the P.T.O. knob is in the ‘off’ position.

• Place the remote control valve levers in the
neutral position.
• Move the hydraulic lift control lever fully forward.

WARNING
Check the area beneath the equipment to ensure
that no injury or damage will be caused when
equipment is lowered.

• Depress and hold the clutch pedal.

IMPORTANT: The high operating speed of the

turbo-charger makes it essential that adequate
lubrication is assured when the engine is started.
Therefore, idle the engine at 1000 rev/min for
approximately one minute before driving the tractor.

3--8
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

GRID HEATER COLD START AID

(where fitted)

WARNING
Your tractor may be equipped with an electronic cold
weather starting aid, do not use ether with the cold
start aid installed. It will explode in the intake
manifold. If any difficulty is experienced when trying
to start your tractor in cold temperatures, consult
your authorised dealer.

The grid heater, which is effective in ambient

temperatures down to --18° C (0° F), consists of a
heating element installed in the intake manifold.
Operation of the grid heater is automatic when the
the engine coolant temperature falls to --3° C (26.6°
F) or below.

A warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate

to confirm operation.

If temperatures below --18° C (0° F) are

encountered, a block coolant heater is available as
an accessory. The block coolant heater is effective
in ambient temperatures down to --29° C (--20° F)
when used in conjunction with the grid heater.

Key Start Switch

A five-position key-start switch is installed. The

key-start switch positions are as follows:

Position 1 Not used

Position 2 Off
Position 3 Accessories on
Position 4 Warning lights, instruments and
Grid Heater on
Position 5 Grid heater on, Starter motor
engaged

IMPORTANT: Never push or tow the tractor to start 7

the engine. Use an auxiliary battery and jump leads.

NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of

the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in the
neutral (N) position.

3--9
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Starting in cold weather (with a cold engine)

• Open the hand throttle halfway and turn the

key-start switch clockwise to position (4). An
indicator light (1) Figure 9, on the instrument
panel will illuminate for 10 to 15 seconds to show
the grid heater has been activated.

• When the light extinguishes, turn the key fully

clockwise to position (5). Crank the engine until
it starts but do not operate the starting motor for
more than 60 seconds.

NOTE: If cranking is not carried out within 30 8

seconds of the light extinguishing, turn the key--start
to the ’off’ position, pause and re--start the sequence.

• If the engine fails to start, repeat the foregoing

procedure. If the engine still fails to start, allow
the battery to recover for 4 -- 5 minutes then
repeat the procedure.

• When the engine starts, return the throttle to the

idle position and check that all warning lights
extinguish and gauge readings are normal.

9
Starting in warm weather or when the engine is
hot

• Open the hand throttle halfway and turn the

key-start switch fully clockwise to position (5)
Figure 8, to operate the starting motor. Crank the
engine until it starts but do not operate the
starting motor for more than 60 seconds.

NOTE: Once the starter motor has been operated,

it is necessary to return the key-start switch back to
the ‘off’ position before the starting motor can be
re-activated.

• Return the throttle to the idle position and check

that all warning lights extinguish and gauge
readings are normal.

3--10
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

STOPPING THE ENGINE

IMPORTANT: Before stopping, idle the engine at

1000 rev/min for approximately one minute. This will
allow the turbo--charger and manifold to cool and
prevent possible distortion of components.

To stop the engine, carry out the following procedure:

• Sit in the driver’s seat.

• Close the throttle.
• Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied.

• Ensure that all gearshift levers are in neutral.

• Ensure the P.T.O. is disengaged.
• Place the remote control valve levers in the
neutral position.

• Lower 3 point hitch mounted equipment to the

ground.
• Turn the key--start switch off -- position (2).

AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN

IMPORTANT: Before attempting to start an engine

that has automatically shutdown, trace and rectify
the fault that caused the engine to be stopped.

Automatic engine shutdown is operated through the

electronic engine controller (ECU). In the unlikely
event that one or more of the following conditions
occurs then the engine will be shut down after 30
seconds.

• A critical error is detected within the engine

electronic control system.
• The generated engine horsepower attempts to
exceed the specified design limit.

Should either of the above occur and the engine

shuts down, consult your authorised dealer before
attempting further operations with the tractor.

NOTE: Automatic engine shutdown function is

permanantly activated and cannot be switched off.

3--11
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Automatic Engine Shutdown with Enhanced

Keypad (where fitted)

The automatic engine shutdown system on tractors

equipped with the optional Enhanced Keypad
provides a further level of protection. The system
monitors four key areas that are critical to the safe
operation of engine and driveline and, in the unlikely
event that one or more of these reaches a critical
condition, the engine will be shut down.

• Engine oil pressure falls below safe limits.

• Engine coolant temperature exceeds safe limits.

• Driveline oil pressure falls below safe limits.

• Driveline oil temperature rises above safe limits.

Prior to engine shutdown the red Stop light will start

to flash and the critical alarm will sound. In addition,
the engine fault warning and malfunction symbols
will flash alternately in the Dot Matrix Display. If, after
30 seconds, the operator has not stopped the
engine, the automatic shutdown feature will be
activated and the engine will be shut down.
10
After the engine has shut down, the red Stop light will
remain on but the alarm will cease to sound. Both
engine and malfunction symbols will continue to flash
alternately.

The automatic engine shutdown function may be

programmed by your authorised dealer to operate in
one of three modes:

1. No engine shutdown. In this mode the engine is

not capable of automatic shutdown.

2. Always engine shutdown. The engine will

shutdown at any time if one or more of the
monitored conditions reaches a critical level.

3. Stationary engine shutdown. The engine will

shutdown only during stationary operations if
one or more of the monitored conditions reaches
a critical level.

Although the Automatic Engine Shudown linked to

the Keypad can be disabled, the ECU controlled
system will continue to function in the normal way.

3--12
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

ENGINE POWER MANAGEMENT

(where fitted)

Engine Power Management is an automatic system

designed to boost engine power levels where tractor
performance may be compromised due to increased
loads.

Once activated, EPM will monitor and respond to

increased power demands by gradually raising the
level of horsepower available.

IMPORTANT: Engine Power Management will be

disabled if the engine coolant temperature exceeds
105°C (221°F). In this situation either increase the
engine speed or reduce the load on the engine until
the coolant temperature is reduced.

P.T.O. Operations

Before EPM will operate the following must apply:

Engine sped above 1300 e.r.p.m.
Tractor forward speed above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH).
PTO power output is above 27 kW (36.2 hp.).
PTO driveline torque is above 250 Nm.

NOTE: Engine Power Management will operate at all

P.T.O. speeds, i.e. 540, 540E and 1000 r.p.m.

With the tractor moving and the engine speed above

1300 r.p.m. engaging the rear P.T.O. will put EPM
into standby mode. As the torque and load on the 11
PTO reaches or exceeds the above levels, the
warning light (1) will illuminate and Engine Power
Management will be activated.

When the power requirement is reduced, the amount

of boost is also reduced until the system reverts to
standby.

Road Transport Applications

Before EPM will operate the following must apply:

16th gear or above must be selected.
Auto Transport mode selected.
Engine speed between 1800 and 2200 e.r.p.m.

Engine Power Management will only function when

Auto Shift is selected and the tractor is operating in
16th gear or above. EPM will be de--activated if one
or more of the following occurs:
Downshifting below 16th gear.
Engine speed falls below 1800 e.r.p.m.
Auto Shift is disengaged.

3--13
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

ENGINE SPEED MANAGEMENT

(where fitted)

With Engine Speed Management, the operator may

pre--set one or two fixed engine speeds appropriate
to the work in hand.

With ESM engaged the indicator light on the

instrument panel (1), will illuminate to confirm
operation.

When in operation ESM constantly monitors engine

load and speed for any change. If engine load
increases and the r.p.m. drops, ESM will adjust the 12
engine speed control unit to compensate, thereby
maintaining a constant engine r.p.m.

Setting Engine Speed Management

With the engine running, set the hand throttle to 1000

r.p.m. To activate Speed Management, momentarily
depress the top of the switch (2) on the right--hand
console. To deactivate, depress the top of the switch
again.

Select programme 1 by momentarily depressing the

bottom of switch (2) and then, using the speed
control switch (1), increase the engine speed to the
desired level. When the speed for programme 1 has
been entered, programme 2 can then be selected (if
required) by momentarily depressing the bottom of 13
switch (2) again. Repeat the above procedure to set
the second speed.

NOTE: Momentarily depressing the speed

adjustment switch will increase or decrease the
speed in 10 rpm increments. Maintaining pressure
on the switch will permit the speed to ramp up or
down at 100 rpm/second, providing there is no load
on the engine.

IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), electronic

programme settings made during tractor operation
are transferred from the operating memory to the
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay
before turning the key on again.

3--14
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Operating with Engine Speed Management

The Engine Speed Management function can be

engaged at any time providing the engine is running
above 1000 r.p.m. Momentarily depress the Speed
Control switch (2) to activate ESM. The system will
automatically default to programme 1, depress the
bottom of the control switch to select programme 2.

When operating in the field, shuttling between

programmes 1 and 2 may be achieved by repeatedly
depressing the bottom of the control switch or, if
more convenient, the Headland Turn Sequence step
switch (1) Figure 15. 14

NOTE: If the HTS step switch is used to shuttle

between ESM speeds, the control switch (2),will be
disabled. To re--enable switch operation, exit and
re--enter the ESM function.

NOTE: Moving the hand throttle in ESM mode will

disable the speed settings and return engine speed
control to the hand or foot throttle.

Accessing a Previously Stored Setting

3
To access a previously stored speed setting, depress
and hold the top of the ESM switch (2), Figure 14.
The indicator light will start to flash in the instrument
panel.

NOTE: The hand throttle must be set to 1000 e.r.p.m.

before depressing the switch.

Continue to hold the switch until the light stops

flashing and goes out, the engine speed will increase
or decrease to the previously stored setting. Depress
the bottom of the control switch (2) or the HTS switch 15
(3) to select the required ESM programme.

NOTE: If the ESM switch (2) is released whilst the

light is flashing, Engine Speed Management will
reset to the default setting, depress and hold the
ESM switch again to re--start the procedure.

To exit Engine Speed Management:

Depress the ESM control switch

Move the hand throttle to idle.
Turn the key--start to the off position.

3--15
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

HEADLAND TURN SEQUENCE

(where fitted)

Quick Guide to Headland Turn Sequence (HTS)

Where there is a need to repeat a sequence of

actions, such as those made during a headland turn,
HTS can be used to create, store and play--back a
programme of these actions.

The following text is provided as a quick guide to the

operation of Headland Turn Sequence. A more
comprehensive guide to the operation of HTS can be
found beginning on page 3--18.

NOTE: For HTS to function, the hand throttle must

be set above 900 e.r.p.m. and the tractor travelling
at a speed above 0.5 K/mh (0.3 MPH).

ACTION -- RECORDING CONTROL VISUAL

1. Depress and hold the top of the record switch for three
seconds. The recording symbol will flash in the Display of
Gears.

2. To start recording a sequence, momentarily depress the step

switch. The recording symbol will cease to flash and will
remain displayed.

3. Carry out the headland turn sequence in the normal way. As

each step in the sequence is recorded, the relevant symbol
will appear in the Display of Gears.
Gears When a step is completed
and a new one started, the symbol for the completed step will
scroll downwards to be replaced by the new one.

To record a second HTS sequence go to paragraph 4. To end

the current recording go to paragraph 6.

4. To record a second sequence after the first one is completed,

depress and hold the step switch for three seconds, the
recording symbol will start to flash.

5. To start recording, depress the step switch again. The

recording symbol will cease to flash and will remain on, the
sequence can now be started.

6. When the HTS recordings are completed, momentarily

depress the top of the record switch to save the recorded
sequences and exit HTS.

3--16
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

ACTION -- PLAYBACK CONTROL VISUAL

1
1. To enter play--back mode, depress and hold the top or
bottom of the play--back switch. The programme number will
appear at the top of the HTS display.
Release the switch and the number will be replaced by a
flashing play--back symbol.

NOTE: Depress the top of the switch to provide AUTOMATIC

re--play of all programme steps, depress the bottom of the
switch to select MANUAL re--play of each individual step.

2. If a second sequence was recorded, continue to depress the

top or bottom of the play--back switch until the required
programme number, 1 or 2 is displayed, then release the
switch.
2
The programme number will be replaced by a flashing
play--back symbol.

3. To begin play--back, depress and hold the step switch until a

’beep’ is heard. The play--back symbol will stop flashing and
will remain on.
NOTE: In MANUAL re--play the programme will pause after
each step is completed, momentarily depress the step switch
to re--play the next step.

3. During play--back, the function symbols will scroll upwards

towards the top of the HTS display.

4. After the current sequence has been re--played, the next

sequence will be held in standby mode (play--back symbol
flashing). Depress and hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is
heard, release the switch to begin play--back of the next
sequence.

5. To skip a play--back sequence it will be necessary to exit HTS

by depressing the record switch. To re--enter HTS, start at
paragraph 1 above.

See page 3--20 for an explanation of HTS symbols.

3--17
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Headland Turn Sequence Operation (HTS)

In the recording mode a sequence of actions or

’steps’ are recorded to create a programme. In
play--back mode, HTS will re--play the sequence
exactly as recorded.

Programmes may be re--played as a continuous

operation (AUTOMATIC) or as a series of individual
steps (MANUAL) each one initiated by depressing
the step switch.

HTS permits up to 28 individual steps to be recorded

as one or two separate programmes.

Three switches control the operation of HTS:

1. Play--back switch. To re--play a programme
momentarily depress the top of this switch (A) for
AUTO re--play, depress the bottom of the switch
for MANUAL re--play.
2. Record switch. This switch is used to activate or
de--activate the system and to select the record
mode.
3. Step switch. The step switch is used to start,
pause or stop a programme. The step switch can 16
also be used to insert pauses during a recording
or to pause a programme during play--back.

NOTE: Each pause inserted during a recording will

be recognised as a programme step by HTS.

Where HTS is used to create a recording, the

following actions or functions may be included in the
3
programme.

• Regulate engine speed.

• Shift transmission gears up, and/or down.
• Raise and lower the rear three point hitch.*
• Raise and lower the front three point hitch.*
• Operate rear electronic remote valves.
• Hydraulically adjustable top link and left--hand lift
rod.
17

3--18
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

IMPORTANT: When operating In Field Auto Mode,

activating HTS will suspend the Auto Mode function.
After completing a headland manoeuvre
programme, HTS will be suspended and the Field
Auto Mode programme will be resumed.
In a similar way, ESM will also be disabled when HTS
is active and will be re--enabled when HTS is
suspended. However, the ESM light will still remain
illuminated while the programme is disabled.

When HTS is activated, the symbol (1), will appear

in the Display of Gears.

The symbol at (2), Figure 19, will show whether HTS

is in record or play--back mode.

When recording or re--playing a programme, each

action or step will be represented by the appropriate
symbol, i.e. a gear change or series of gear changes
will be accompanied by a transmission symbol.

See page 3--20 for an explanation of HTS symbols.

As each step is recorded the accompanying symbol 18

will move down the display as the next step begins.
The symbol for the new step will appear immediately
below the record symbol.

During play--back, symbols will scroll upwards from

the bottom of the display. When a symbol reaches
the top of the display (below the play--back symbol)
the corresponding function will begin to operate.

A maximum of seven symbols may be displayed at

one time.

IMPORTANT: If a programme fault occurs and the

error symbol is displayed, exit and re--enter HTS to
clear the fault.

19

3--19
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Explanation of HTS Symbols

The symbols shown below are examples of those which may, depending on programme content, appear in the
transmission gear display when HTS is active.

HTS Programme Engine Speed -- Decrease

2 Programme Number Transmission Upshift

Switch Symbol -- Record Mode Transmission Downshift

Record Mode Remote Cylinder -- Retract

Switch Symbol Remote Cylinder -- Extend

Manual Playback Mode

Switch Symbol Remote Cylinder -- Float

Automatic Playback Mode

Auto Playback Mode Rear 3--Point Hitch -- Raise

Manual Playback Mode Rear 3--Point Hitch -- Lower

Pause Programme Front 3--Point Hitch -- Raise

Error Front 3--Point Hitch -- Lower

Engine Speed -- Increase

3--20
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Explanation of HTS Symbols (continued)

The symbols shown are examples of those which may, depending on programme content, appear in the
transmission gear display when HTS is active.

Hydraulic Top Link -- Extend

Hydraulic Top Link -- Retract

Right--Hand Lift Rod -- Extend

Right--Hand Lift Rod -- Retract

3--21
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Recording a Programme

NOTE: For HTS to function, the hand throttle must

be set to provide an engine speed above 900 e.r.p.m.

To record a Headland Turn Sequence, depress and

hold the top of the record switch (2), for three
seconds. This will activate HTS but the system will
remain in standby mode.

The HTS symbol will appear in the upper part of the

display accompanied by the recording symbol which
will start to flash.
20

To start recording, momentarily depress the step

switch (3). As each HTS linked control is operated,
3
a grey coloured symbol will appear in the display
immediately below the recording symbol.

As each symbol moves down the display to be

replaced by the next one, the colour will change from
grey to black.

NOTE: Symbols relating to the function in current

use, either in record or play--back mode, will always
appear inversed (grey symbol on black background).

After the first HTS sequence has been completed, a 21

second (opposite headland) sequence may be
recorded.

Depress and hold the step switch (3) for three

seconds to end the first recording and enter standby
mode. The recording symbol will start to flash.

To start recording a second sequence, momentarily

depress the step switch (3).

NOTE: Transmission shifts made whilst the tractor is

in reverse will not be recorded or played back by
HTS. A pause will be automatically entered in the
programme at this point.

3--22
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

During a recording, pauses may be inserted into the

programme by momentarily depressing the step
3
switch (3). HTS recording will pause at this point and
a pause symbol will be inserted in the sequence,
depress the step switch again to resume recording.

To store a recorded sequence, depress the the top

of the record switch (2) Figure 20. This will
de--activate the HTS function and no further
recording will occur.

IMPORTANT: If, during a recording sequence, the

engine is stopped (key--off) then all steps recorded
up to that point will be saved. 22

NOTE: Shuttling actions are not recorded but a

pause is automatically inserted into the sequence
when the shuttle lever is operated.

IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), any

adjustments to electronically stored settings made
during tractor operation are transferred from the
operating memory to the main memory. To allow
sufficient time for the data to transfer, pause for a
minimum of five seconds before turning the key on
again.

IMPORTANT: When including electronic remote

valve operation in a HTS sequence, it is important to
allow sufficient time for the movement of the control
lever to be recorded as it passes through R, N, L and
F positions (or vice versa). Pausing the lever in each
position for approximately 1/2 second will provide
sufficient time for the step to be recorded accurately.
Moving the lever too quickly may confuse data
transfer causing the implement to respond
incorrectly on play--back.

NOTE: The maximum time permitted for a single

step in an EHR valve sequence is 12 minutes.
23

3--23
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Playback a Programme

CAUTION
Before commencing work, it is recommended that
HTS programmes are given a ’dry run’ to ensure all
programme steps have been retained in the memory,
and any timed EHR sequences replay correctly.

To replay a recorded sequence, momentarily

depress the top of the play--back switch (1) for AUTO
re--play, depress the bottom of the switch for
MANUAL re--play. Play--back will be activated but will
remain in standby mode.

If the suspend/resume function (step switch) was

used to record a second programme, the operator
may now cycle between programmes 1 and 2 by
holding down the AUTO or MANUAL side of the
play--back switch.

When the correct number appears at the top of the

transmission display, release the switch. The 24
programme number will be replaced by a flashing
play--back symbol.

When reaching the point at which the programme is

to start, depress and hold the step switch (3) until a
3
’beep’ is heard. When the programme start point is
reached, release the switch. Play--back will start as
soon as the switch is released and the first symbol in
the sequence will appear below the play--back
symbol.

NOTE: To initiate playback, the engine speed must

be above 900 e.r.p.m. and the groundspeed must be
above 0.5 K/mh (0.31 MPH).

When play--back begins, the symbol will stop

flashing and will remain displayed. 25

As each function comes into play, the corresponding

symbol will appear immediately below the play--back
symbol. At this point it will change from black on grey
to grey on black (inversed).

3--24
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Subsequent symbols in the programme sequence

will appear below the one currently in play. As each
step is completed, the corresponding symbol will
disappear from the display to be replaced by the next
one.

If play--back is activated in MANUAL mode,

depressing the step switch will only play the first step
in the sequence. When the first step is completed the
programme will pause until the step switch is
depressed again to start the next action in the
sequence.

In play--back, each step will be re--played exactly as

it was recorded.

NOTE: If necessary, the foot throttle may be used to

increase engine speed during HTS play--back.

If pauses were inserted into the sequence during

recording, play--back will automatically stop at each
3
pause point. To resume the sequence, depress and
hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard. The next
step will start immediately the switch is released.

By delaying the point at where the step switch is used

to re--start a programme in AUTOMATIC mode,
adjustments can be made to the time span of a
sequence or to extend the delay between individual
steps. This only applies to pauses inserted at the
recording stage.

In play--back mode, the programme may be stopped

at any time by depressing the step switch (3). The 26
programme will pause and play--back symbol will
begin to flash.

3--25
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

IMPORTANT: If the step switch is used to suspend

a function in play, all current HTS actions, including
timed electronic remote valve sequences, will be
aborted and it may be necessary to manually
complete the paused step before re--starting HTS
play--back.

To resume programme play--back, depress and hold

the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard, release the
switch.

IMPORTANT: During play--back, one or more of the

following actions will cause HTS to be stopped and
all automated functions, including timed EHR
sequences, to be terminated:

• Tractor speed drops below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH),

or is stationary for more than 10 seconds.
• The operator leaves the seat for more than 2
seconds.
• Fender mounted 3--point hitch or P.T.O. controls
are operated.
• Hand throttle is set to idle.
• Operating one or more of the HTS linked tractor
controls to override the programme.

NOTE: A control is not regarded as overridden by

HTS until the sequence reaches the point at which
the automated operation of that control begins. At
this time, the sequence will be stopped.

On completion of a sequence, or if HTS is halted

during play--back, electronic remote valves will not
return to float even if the relevant lever is in the float
position unless:
• The lever was in the float position when the HTS
system was activated.
• The last HTS command step selected the valve
float function.

3--26
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

If an EHR function is in play and the step switch (3)

is used to cancel the action i.e. to stop a hydraulic
3
cylinder extending, then the cylinder will stop and
play--back will be suspended. The cancelled action
will be by--passed and the programme will move on
to the next step when play--back is re--started.
However, the cancelled action will remain in the
programme memory for subsequent re--plays.
To continue the programme, depress and hold the
step switch until a ’beep’ is heard, then release the
switch.

NOTE: When a HTS programme is suspended, the 27

symbols will flash in the display until the step switch
is depressed to re--start the programme.

IMPORTANT: If an HTS programme is halted by the

operator leaving the seat for more than 2 seconds,
the current engine speed will be maintained until the
operator returns to the seat or the throttle setting is
changed.
Before leaving the seat, always de- activate HTS
and apply the tractor parking brake.

3--27
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

FAST STEER (where fitted)

The optional Fast Steer system is designed to

provide a quick steering response when required i.e.
when operating with a front loader or carrying out a
headland manoeuvre.

From the straight ahead position, Fast Steer will

provide full right or left hand steering lock with less
than a 10° movement of the steering wheel.

IMPORTANT: Before travelling on the public

highway Fast Steer must be de--activated and
normal steering re--instated. To check normal 28
steering operation, turn the wheel fully from lock to
lock before starting your journey.

NOTE: Fast Steer will not operate if the tractor speed

is above 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH).

To activate the Fast Steer function, depress the

isolator switch Figure 28. A warning light in the
switch will illuminate to confirm activation.

To operate Fast Steer, depress and hold the centre

ring (3) on the steering wheel, to disengage, release
the ring. With the centre ring depressed, the indicator
light (2) will illuminate on the instrument panel. It will
extinguish when the centre ring is released.

29

NOTE: If the isolator switch is left in the ’ON’ position

at engine key--off, then Fast Steer will be
de--activated at key--on. The isolator switch warning
light will not illuminate and the indicator light (2) will
flash if the centre ring is depressed. To re--activate
Fast Steer turn the isolator switch ’OFF’ and then
’ON’.

30

3--28
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Fast Steer can only be operated if the following three

conditions are met.
1. The isolator switch is in the ON position and the
switch warning light is illuminated.
2. The speed of the tractor is below 10 K/mh
(6.2 MPH)
3. The transmission oil temperature is above 5° C.

NOTE: Attempting to use the Fast Steer function

without meeting all the above conditions, will cause
the indicator light (2) to flash.

NOTE: If tractor speed exceeds 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH)

with Fast Steer in operation, it will be disengaged and
the indicator light (2) will flash.

NOTE: Where the transmission oil temperature is

low and Fast Steer is to be used, it is recommended
to turn the steering wheel twice, from full lock to full
lock, before commencing Fast Steer operation.

Fast Steer will be disabled if a fault occurs. Should

the system become disabled, an audible warning will
sound and an error code will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. If the fault is of a critical nature, the ’STOP’
warning lamp will also flash on the instrument panel, 31
consult your authorised dealer.

To re--activate Fast Steer, turn the isolator switch

’OFF’, correct the fault, and then turn the isolator
switch ’ON’.

IMPORTANT: To promote safe operation of Fast

Steer, it is advised that the operator become familiar
with the system before operating in the field.

3--29
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

REAR POWER TAKE--OFF

Description

The P.T.O. is engaged and disengaged by means of

a knob (1) on the right-hand console. The adjacent
warning light (2) will illuminate when the P.T.O. is
engaged.

Four types of rear P.T.O. system are available,

dependent upon tractor model and country.

a) Two--speed P.T.O. with inter-changeable output

shafts.

b) Two--speed, shiftable P.T.O. with

inter--changeable output shafts and the option of
fender--mounted switches for stationary P.T.O. 32
work.

c) Three--speed, shiftable P.T.O. with

inter-changeable output shafts and the option of
fender-mounted switches for stationary P.T.O.
work.

d) Three--speed ground drive P.T.O., available in

conjunction with three speed shiftable P.T.O.
above.

An automatic ‘soft start’ facility is provided on all

models to permit easy start up of heavy, high inertia,
P.T.O.--driven equipment.

Soft start modulates P.T.O. clutch torque over the

first 5 seconds of engagement to provide a slower,
gradual take up of the drive.

NOTE: Soft start only operates at engine speeds of

1800 rev/min and below. Above this speed, normal
P.T.O. engagement will occur.

3--30
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

PTO Switch Operation -- Time--Out

To engage the PTO, depress the knob (1) then lift the
collar (3) and knob together. This movement should
be decisive in its application as hesitant or incorrect
operation of the knob or collar may cause the PTO
system to Time--Out.

Do not:
• Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than 30
seconds.
• Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (3)
for more than 10 seconds without engaging the 33
PTO.
• Operate the fender mounted and internal PTO
controls simultaneously or within 2 seconds of
each other.

Any or all of the above actions will cause the PTO to

become inoperable (Timed--Out) for 10 seconds and
a Time--Out symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display.

Should this occur, the non--critical alarm will sound

for 4 seconds and the amber warning light on the
instrument panel will flash for 10 seconds.

During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has

Timed Out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls
as this may extend the duration of the Time--Out
period.
34
When the Time--Out period is complete and the
symbol disappears from the display, normal P.T.O.
operation is re--enabled.

3--31
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

P.T.O. Range Lever

With shiftable P.T.O., a range lever is provided. The

lever is used to select one of two or three P.T.O.
speed ranges to provide power or economy. The
range lever is located at the rear of the right-hand
console.

Depending on country and vehicle specification, your

tractor may be fitted with a P.T.O. range lever as
shown in Figure 35 or the alternative ’T’ handle lever
featured in Figure 36.

Conventional Lever

With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, select the required
speed by means of the range lever. Lift the
spring-loaded collar (2) beneath the knob (1) and
move the lever to engage the required P.T.O. speed.

To aid smooth shifting between P.T.O. speeds,

depress and hold the P.T.O. brake release switch (3)
while selecting an alternate range.

35

’T’ Handle Lever

With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, select the required
speed by means of the range lever. Lift the
spring-loaded collar (3) beneath the ’T’ handle (2)
while simultaneously depressing the P.T.O. brake
release button (1). Move the lever to engage the
appropriate P.T.O. speed.

36

3--32
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Groundspeed Selector Lever

Ground drive P.T.O. is available, in conjunction with

3--speed, shiftable P.T.O., on all models. As
suggested by the name, ground drive P.T.O. speed
is directly related to rotation of the rear wheels rather
than engine speed. When ground drive P.T.O. is
installed, a second lever (2) is provided.

Three ground speed ranges are provided, selected

by means of the P.T.O. range lever (1).

37

3--33
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

ATTACHING P.T.O. DRIVEN EQUIPMENT

CAUTION
Before attaching or detaching equipment or
changing the P.T.O. shaft:
• Firmly apply the parking brake.
• Place the shuttle lever in Neutral.
• Ensure that all gearshift levers are in neutral.
• Disengage the P.T.O. (knob fully down) and wait
until the P.T.O. and equipment stops.
• Switch off the engine before getting off the
tractor.

Mount or hitch the equipment to the tractor as

outlined in THREE--POINT LINKAGE on page 3--97.

With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is released

and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid
implement shaft alignment.

A flip-up P.T.O. guard is fitted as standard. Remove

the ’R’ clip (1) from the locating pin and slide the
guard upwards to clear the pin. Rotate the guard to
gain access to the P.T.O. shaft. A second locating pin
allows the guard to be fixed at 45° if required.

The P.T.O. guard also serves as a support for

drive-line shields used with P.T.O.-driven equipment
and provides for your safety. Do not modify the
guard. 38

NOTE: Tractors with slider type, vertically adjustable

drawbars have a flip--up P.T.O. guard plate fixed to
the slider frame. See ’Slider Frame Drawbars’ in this
section.

To connect P.T.O.-driven equipment to the P.T.O.

shaft, tilt the guard up for access. Pull the plastic cap
(1) from the shaft and store it in the tractor toolbox.

The plastic P.T.O. cap should always be installed

over the shaft when the P.T.O. is not in use.

39

3--34
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Attach the implement to the P.T.O. shaft, ensuring

that the implement driveshaft coupler lock pin (3) or
detent balls engage the groove in the P.T.O. shaft (2).
If the coupler does not have a locking arrangement,
pin the coupler to the shaft. Lower the flip-up guard
and replace the ’R’ clip.

IMPORTANT: After attaching mounted equipment,

carefully raise and lower using Position Control and
check clearances and P.T.O. shaft slide range and
articulation. When attaching trailed equipment,
ensure that the drawbar is correctly set.

40

P.T.O. OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

WARNING
Whenever operating P.T.O. equipment, observe the
following precautions:

• Check that you are using the correct P.T.O.

speed for the implement. Follow the instructions
in the equipment operator’s manual.

• Ensure that the P.T.O. guard is installed when

using P.T.O. driven equipment.

• Do not wear loose clothing when operating

P.T.O. driven equipment.

• Firmly apply the parking brake, place all

gearshift levers in neutral and block all four
wheels before operating any stationary P.T.O.
equipment. 41

• Do not approach, clean or adjust P.T.O. driven

equipment while the tractor engine is still
running. Disengage the P.T.O. (knob fully down)
and wait until the P.T.O. and equipment stops.
Switch off the engine before getting off the
tractor.

• With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is

released and the shaft may be turned by hand to
aid the installation or removal of the implement
P.T.O. shaft.

42

3--35
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TWO and THREE--SPEED P.T.O. SYSTEMS

General Information

Generally speaking, P.T.O. driven equipment not

having a high power requirement is designed to run
at 540 P.T.O. rev/min and will have a 6--spline female
coupling. A P.T.O. shaft speed of 540 rev/min is
obtained at an engine speed of 1970 rev/min.

Equipment having a high power requirement is

designed to operate at 1000 P.T.O. rev/min and will
be provided with a 21--spline female coupling. With
the 21--spline shaft installed, run the engine at 2120
rev/min to provide a P.T.O. speed of 1000 rev/min.

Equipment that requires very low power to operate

may be run in the alternative P.T.O. speed range at
a lower engine speed with a consequent reduction in
fuel consumption and engine wear.

Tractors with 3--speed P.T.O. have the advantage of

running low power 540 P.T.O. driven equipment at a
reduced engine speed by selecting 540E on the
lever. See page 3--42 for P.T.O. and engine speeds.

IMPORTANT: Implements with a high power

requirement should be operated with the 1000
rev/min. P.T.O. (21--spline shaft). If it is necessary to
use the 6--spline shaft (at 540 rev/min.) to operate
implements having a power requirement of more
than 75 horsepower, then it is strongly
recommended that the implement is fitted with a slip
clutch to avoid damage to the P.T.O. output shaft and
other tractor components.

NOTE: When required, change the P.T.O. shaft to

suit the operation and equipment in use, as
described under ‘Changing the P.T.O. Output Shaft’
on page 3--48 .

3--36
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TWO--SPEED P.T.O. WITH REVERSIBLE

OUTPUT SHAFT (where fitted)

Tractors with a reversible shaft P.T.O. system will be

supplied with a single output shaft having 6 and 21
splines.

Operating

With the engine running at 1000 rev/min., press the

knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and knob up to engage
the P.T.O. The knob will remain up while the P.T.O.
is engaged and the adjacent warning light (2) will be
illuminated.

IMPORTANT: To avoid shock loads to the P.T.O.,

reduce engine speed to approximately 1000 rev/min
when engaging the P.T.O.

43

Open the throttle to obtain the required engine/P.T.O.

speeds. The P.T.O. speed can be displayed in the
central LCD on the instrument panel (1).

NOTE: The light (2) Figure 43, will be illuminated

when the P.T.O. is engaged. If overspeeding of the
P.T.O. occurs (P.T.O. speed exceeds 630 rev/min)
the light will flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady.
When the 1000 rev/min/shaft is in use, the light may
also flash (but may be ignored) as P.T.O. shaft speed
passes through the 630 rev/min range. The light will
flash again at 1170 P.T.O. rev/min to indicate that
overspeeding has occurred in the 1000 rev/min
P.T.O. range.
44
Press the knob firmly down to disengage the P.T.O.

3--37
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the P.T.O. will not

operate when the engine is restarted until the P.T.O.
knob (1) is reset. Return the control knob manually
to the ‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then
re-engage the P.T.O., as previously described.

45
IMPORTANT: An automatic P.T.O. brake is installed
to stop shaft rotation quickly when the P.T.O. is
disengaged. To avoid overstressing the P.T.O.
brake, slow down the implement by reducing engine
speed before disengaging the P.T.O. This is
particularly important with implements having a high
inertia. Such implements should, ideally, be
equipped with an overrun clutch. To avoid damage to
the brake when operating high inertia implements,
hold down the top of the switch (1), to disengage the
brake and allow the implement to come to rest
naturally.

DANGER 46
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement,
disengage the P.T.O. after each use.

CHANGING THE P.T.O. SHAFT SPEED

IMPORTANT: Before changing the speed of the

output shaft, switch off the P.T.O., stop the engine
and apply the handbrake.

Using a suitable tool, compress the lugs on the circlip

and remove it from the P.T.O. housing. Carefully
withdraw the output shaft.

NOTE: To aid removal, rotate the circlip until the lugs

(2), align with the flat on the P.T.O. shaft (1).

Thoroughly clean the P.T.O. shaft before re--inserting 47

it into the housing. Ensure the number of splines on
the shaft (3), correspond to those on the implement
drive shaft.

Replace the circlip ensuring it engages fully with the

groove in the P.T.O. housing.

IMPORTANT: After re--fitting, rotate the circlip 180°

in the housing so the lugs are opposite the flat on the
output shaft.

3--38
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TWO--SPEED, SHIFTABLE P.T.O.

(where fitted)

A 6--spline P.T.O. output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm)

diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540
rev/min.

Dependent upon tractor specification, an alternative

21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter,
designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., may also be
supplied with the tractor or is available from your
dealer.

Operating

Before engaging the P.T.O., select a P.T.O. ratio, as

follows:

With 6--spline shaft installed

• With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, select the
required speed by means of the range lever (1).
Lift the spring-loaded collar (2) beneath the knob
and move the lever to engage the power or
economy range.

Engine and P.T.O. shaft speeds are as follows:

Range Lever Engine Speed P.T.O. Speed

Position (rev/min) (rev/min)
48
Fully rearward 1970 540
(6--spline shaft)

Fully forward 1145 540

(6--spline shaft) (light operations only)

IMPORTANT: The P.T.O. range lever cannot be

moved until the spring-loaded collar beneath the
knob is lifted. This feature is incorporated to prevent
inadvertent selection of the economy range which
could result in overspeeding of a P.T.O. driven
implement.

3--39
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

With 21--spline shaft installed

• With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, lift the
spring-loaded collar (2), beneath the knob, and
move the lever (1) fully to the right. This will
provide a P.T.O. speed of 1000 rev/min at 2120
engine rev/min.

NOTE: The P.T.O. range lever should always be in the

2120 position when the 21--spline shaft is installed. If
you only ever operate with a 21--spline shaft, leave the
range lever in this position.
49
With 6-- or 21--spline shaft installed

IMPORTANT: To avoid shock loads to the P.T.O.,

reduce engine speed to approximately 1000 rev/min
when engaging the P.T.O., then increase engine
speed by means of the throttle to obtain the required
P.T.O. speed.

With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less,

press the knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and knob up
to engage the P.T.O. The knob will remain up while
the P.T.O. is engaged and the adjacent warning light
(2) will be illuminated.

To disengage the P.T.O., press the P.T.O. control

knob (1), down.

NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the P.T.O. will not

operate when the engine is restarted until the P.T.O.
knob is reset. Return the control knob manually to the
‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then
re-engage the P.T.O., as previously described. 50

IMPORTANT: Although the P.T.O. may be engaged

or disengaged with the tractor moving or stationary,
do not attempt to change from one P.T.O. speed
range to another unless the tractor is stationary and
the P.T.O. disengaged -- control knob (1), fully down.

3--40
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

NOTE: The P.T.O. shaft speed (1) may be displayed

in the central LCD if required.

51

NOTE: If overspeeding of the P.T.O. occurs (i.e.

P.T.O. speed exceeds 630 rev/min) the light (2) will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. When the
1000 rev/min shaft is in use, the light may also flash
(but may be ignored) as P.T.O. shaft speed passes
through the 630 rev/min range. The light will flash
again at 1170 P.T.O. rev/min to indicate that
overspeeding has occurred in the 1000 rev/min
P.T.O. range.

52

IMPORTANT: An automatic P.T.O. brake is installed

to stop shaft rotation quickly when the P.T.O. is
disengaged. To avoid overstressing the P.T.O.
brake, slow down the implement by reducing engine
speed before disengaging the P.T.O. This is
particularly important with implements having a high
inertia. Such implements should, ideally, be fitted
with an overrun clutch. To avoid damage to the brake
when operating high inertia implements, hold down
the switch (1), to disengage the brake and allow the
implement to come to rest naturally.

DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement, 53
disengage the P.T.O. after each use.

3--41
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

THREE--SPEED, SHIFTABLE P.T.O.

(where fitted)

A 6--spline P.T.O. output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm)

diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540
rev/min.
Dependent upon tractor specification, an alternative
21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter,
designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., may also be
supplied with the tractor or is available from your
dealer.
Operating
Before engaging the P.T.O., select a P.T.O. ratio, as 54
follows:

IMPORTANT: If your tractor has the optional ground

drive P.T.O., an additional lever (2) is provided. To
prevent damage to the P.T.O. driveline, ensure that
this lever is moved fully to the left, as shown, before
operating the engine-driven P.T.O. (The forward
position is used to engage ground drive P.T.O.).

With 6--spline shaft installed

• With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, select the
required speed by means of the range lever (1).
Lift the spring-loaded collar (2) beneath the knob
and move the lever fully to the right to engage
1000 speed, to the intermediate position for 540
Economy, and fully to the left for standard 540
speed.

IMPORTANT: The P.T.O. range lever cannot be

moved until the spring-loaded collar beneath the
knob is lifted. This feature is incorporated to prevent
inadvertent selection of the economy range which
could result in overspeeding of a P.T.O. driven
55
implement.

Operating Range Lever Engine Speed P.T.O. Speed

Position (rev/min) (rev/min)
NOTE: The 3-speed P.T.O. range lever has a neutral Fully rearward 1970 540
position, denoted by the letter ‘N’. See Figure 55. (6--spline shaft)
Intermediate 1546 540
Engine and P.T.O. shaft speeds are as follows: position
(6--spline shaft)
Fully forward 1145 540
(6
(6--spline
li shaft)
h ft)
(light operations only)

3--42
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

With 21--spline shaft installed:

• With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, select the
required speed by means of the range lever (1).
Lift the spring-loaded collar (2) beneath the knob
and move the lever fully to the right. This will
provide a P.T.O. speed of 1000 rev/min at 2120
engine rev/min.

NOTE: The P.T.O. range lever should always be in this

position when the 21--spline shaft is installed.

56

With 6-- or 21--spline shaft installed

IMPORTANT: To avoid shock loads to the P.T.O.,

reduce engine speed to approximately 1000 rev/min
when engaging the P.T.O., then increase engine
speed by means of the throttle to obtain the required
P.T.O. speed.

With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less,

press the knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and knob up
to engage the P.T.O. The knob will remain up while
the P.T.O. is engaged and the adjacent warning light
(2) will be illuminated.

To disengage the P.T.O., press the P.T.O. control

knob (1) down.

NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the P.T.O. will not

operate when the engine is restarted until the P.T.O.
knob is reset. Return the control knob manually to the
‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then
re-engage the P.T.O., as previously described. 57

IMPORTANT: Although the P.T.O. may be engaged

or disengaged with the tractor moving or stationary,
do not attempt to change from one P.T.O. speed
range to another unless the tractor is stationary and
the P.T.O. disengaged -- control knob (1), fully down.

3--43
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

NOTE: The P.T.O. shaft speed (1) may be displayed

in the central LCD if required.

58

NOTE: If overspeeding of the P.T.O. occurs (i.e.

P.T.O. speed exceeds 630 rev/min) the light (2), will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. When the
1000 rev/min shaft is in use, the light may also flash
(but may be ignored) as P.T.O. shaft speed passes
through the 630 rev/min range. The light will flash
again at 1170 P.T.O. rev/min to indicate that
overspeeding has occurred in the 1000 rev/min
P.T.O. range.

59

IMPORTANT: An automatic P.T.O. brake is installed

to stop shaft rotation quickly when the P.T.O. is
disengaged. To avoid overstressing the P.T.O.
brake, slow down the implement by reducing engine
speed before disengaging the P.T.O. This is
particularly important with implements having a high
inertia. Such implements should, ideally, be fitted
with an overrun clutch. To avoid damage to the brake
when operating high inertia implements, hold down
the switch (1), to disengage the brake and allow the
implement to come to rest naturally.

DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement, 60
disengage the P.T.O. after each use.

3--44
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

GROUND DRIVE P.T.O. (where fitted)

Three-speed ground drive P.T.O. is available on all

models in conjunction with the 3-speed
engine-driven, shiftable P.T.O. previously described.
Ground drive P.T.O. speed is directly related to
rotation of the rear wheels rather than engine speed.

Three speed ranges are provided, selected by

means of the P.T.O. range lever (1). An additional
lever (2) is provided to select ground drive.

To engage ground drive P.T.O:

61

With the tractor stationary, ensure that the engine

P.T.O. is disengaged by pressing the selector knob
down. With reference to Figure 61, move the lever
(1), to the required P.T.O. speed range and then
select ground drive with selector lever (2).
Engagement of ground drive will be confirmed by the
appearance of ’GPto’ in the central LCD display.

NOTE: To aid smooth engagement of ground drive

P.T.O., depress and hold both brake pedals whilst
moving the selector lever.

62

Fully depress the clutch pedal, select a transmission All models P.T.O. shaft revolution
gear and open the throttle to increase engine speed. per wheel
h l revolution
l ti
Allow the clutch pedal to rise. Initial movement of the Lever position
clutch pedal will cause the tractor to move and the 540 range engaged 9.93 : 1
P.T.O. shaft (and attached equipment) to rotate.
540E range engaged 12.65 : 1
The speed of rotation of the P.T.O. shaft is directly 1000 range engaged 17.08 : 1
related to rotation of the rear wheels. Shaft
revolutions for each revolution of the rear wheels are
as shown in the table on the right.

NOTE: Selecting ground drive with the engine P.T.O.

function engaged will automatically disable engine
P.T.O. drive. To re--enable engine P.T.O. drive, move
the selector lever to the engine drive position,
disengage and then re--engage the main P.T.O.
switch.

3--45
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

AUTO P.T.O. FUNCTION (where fitted)

With Electronic Draft Control

The Auto P.T.O. function provides automatic

engagement or disengagement of the rear P.T.O.
drive when using the EDC raise/lower switch (1).
Operating the switch to raise the implement will
automatically disengage P.T.O. drive. Lowering the
implement with the switch will re--engage P.T.O.
drive.

The height at which the P.T.O. is engaged or

disengaged can be set using the following method. 63

IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary and the

P.T.O. switched off before attempting this procedure.

• With the engine running and the P.T.O. switched

off, operate the lift control to capture the hitch.

• With the P.T.O. disengaged, depress and hold

the Auto P.T.O. switch for 2 seconds. The central
display will show ’u’ followed by two figures, for
example, ’u38’. The figure 38 representing the
current height of the hitch.

• Raise the hitch to point at which the P.T.O. is to

disengage. Depress the Auto P.T.O. switch once,
the central display will show ’d xx’ (where ’xx’ is
the current height of the hitch).

• Lower the hitch to the point where the P.T.O. is

to re--engage and depress the Auto P.T.O. switch
again. The central display will show ’End’ for two
seconds and then return to the option selected
prior to entering set--up mode.

Providing the tractor is stationary and the P.T.O. is

disengaged, this procedure can be carried out at any
time. The new settings will remain in the memory until
re--programmed.

3--46
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

To activate the Auto function, engage the P.T.O. as

previously described and then depress and hold the
AUTO side of the switch (1), for more than one
second. The Auto P.T.O. lamp on the instrument
panel will illuminate to confirm activation.

With the 3 point hitch in the lowered position and the

P.T.O. engaged, the Auto lamp will remain on.
Raising the implement will disconnect P.T.O. drive
and cause the Auto lamp to flash. Lowering the
implement will re--engage P.T.O. drive, the Auto lamp
will cease to flash and will remain on.

Depressing the Auto P.T.O. switch again will 64

de--activate the function and the Auto lamp will
extinguish.

NOTE: The Auto P.T.O. function will be de--activated

every time the key start is switched off.

3--47
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Auto P.T.O. De--Activation

With either Electronic Draft Control or Mechanical

Draft Control, Auto P.T.O. will be de--activated should
one or more of the following occur:
• The tractor speed is above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH)
with the 3 point hitch in the raised position for
more than 2 minutes.
• With the 3 point hitch raised, the tractor speed
falls below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH), or the tractor is
stationary for more than 10 seconds with the
3--point hitch in the raised position.
• If one of the external switches for P.T.O. or 3 point
hitch are operated.
• The P.T.O. is switched off using the internal or
external switches.
• Operating both internal and external P.T.O.
switches simultaneously.
• Ground drive P.T.O. is selected.
• The operator leaves the seat for more than 2
minutes with Auto P.T.O. activated and the 3
point hitch in the raised position.

To re--activate Auto P.T.O., clear the error and

re--engage the function as previously described.

NOTE: The Auto P.T.O. function will be de--activated

every time the key start as switched off.

CHANGING THE P.T.O. OUTPUT SHAFT

Using a suitable tool, compress and remove the

circlip (1) from the P.T.O. housing and carefully
withdraw the P.T.O. stub shaft.

With the shaft removed, check the ’O’ ring seal in the
P.T.O. housing for any damage. Replace ’O’ ring if
worn or damaged.

Thoroughly clean the replacement stub shaft before

inserting it into the housing. Replace the circlip
ensuring it engages fully with the groove in the P.T.O.
housing.
65
Protect the removed shaft by wrapping in a clean
cloth and place in the tool box.

3--48
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

EXTERNAL P.T.O. CONTROLS

(where fitted)

An optional, fender-mounted P.T.O. switch (1), may

be installed on both rear fenders to facilitate
stationary P.T.O. operations.

With the engine running, touch the switch

momentarily to cause the P.T.O. shaft to index round.
If the switch is pressed for less than 5 seconds, the
shaft will stop turning when the switch is released.

Press and hold in the switch for more than 5 seconds

and the P.T.O. will operate continuously. Press the 66
switch again to stop the P.T.O. Alternatively, the
P.T.O. may be stopped by means of the in-cab
controls, as previously described.

NOTE: The warning light, on the P.T.O. control

panel, will illuminate when the P.T.O. is engaged,
momentarily or permanently.

NOTE: The P.T.O. may be engaged or disengaged

from the fender switch, whether the in-cab control is
in the on or off position.

NOTE: Simultaneous operation, within two seconds,

of in cab and external P.T.O. controls will result in an
error code showing in the central LCD. A 10 second
delay will also occur before P.T.O. control operation
will recommence.

NOTE: The soft start function will operate

irrespective of whether the P.T.O. is engaged from
inside the cab or from a fender switch.

3--49
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

WARNING
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external
Power Take Off switches:
• Move all transmission controls to neutral.
• Disengage the P.T.O.
• Apply the parking brake.
With the engine running, move the hand throttle lever
to the low idle position (fully rearwards).

The operator must only activate the external Power

Take Off switches (1) while standing to the side of the
tractor (outboard of the rear tyres). Operation of the
in cab and external P.T.O. switches should not be
carried out simultaneously.

WARNING
Before using the external Power Take Off switches,
ensure that no person or object is in the area of the
implement, 3-point linkage or P.T.O.shaft.
Never operate the external switches while standing:
• Directly behind the tractor or tyres.
67
• Between the lower links.

• On or near the implement.

• Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or

any object into the area near the 3-point linkage,
P.T.O. shaft or implement while operating the
external switch.

• Never have an assistant working the opposite set

of controls.

• When moving to the opposite set of controls,

move around the tractor or implement. Do not
cross between the implement and tractor.

3--50
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

FRONT P.T.O. and THREE--POINT HITCH

(where fitted)

Tractors with four wheel drive may be equipped with

an engine-driven P.T.O. and front hydraulic lift.
These features are available as a factory installed
option or dealer installed accessory.

FRONT P.T.O.

The front power take--off (P.T.O.) transfers engine

power directly to front-mounted equipment via a 6
spline shaft. The P.T.O. shaft rotates anti-clockwise
(as viewed from the front).

NOTE: A 21 spline shaft is available as a dealer

installed accessory.

A plastic cap (1) is provided over the P.T.O. shaft. Pull

the cap to remove.

NOTE: With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is 68

released and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid
implement shaft alignment.

The front P.T.O. is electro--hydraulically operated

and is activated by a selector knob on the right-hand
console, similar to the rear P.T.O.

With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less,

press the knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and knob up
to engage the P.T.O. The knob will remain up while
the P.T.O. is engaged and the adjacent warning light
(2) will be illuminated. Open the throttle to increase
engine speed to 2120 rev/min and provide a P.T.O.
shaft speed of 1000 rev/min. To disengage the
P.T.O., press the P.T.O. selector knob (1), down.

NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the P.T.O. will not

operate when the engine is restarted until the P.T.O.
knob is reset. Return the selector knob manually to
the ‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then
re-engage the P.T.O., as previously described.
69

DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement,
disengage the P.T.O. after each use.

3--51
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

FRONT THREE--POINT HITCH

(where fitted)

The optional front hitch consists of an adjustable top

link (1) and a pair of folding lower links (2). The top
link and the lower links have open claw ends that
permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements.
The claws are equipped with self-locking latches to
ensure positive retention of the tractor linkage to the
implement.

70
Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the
implement, if required.

71
Operating the Front Linkage

The front hitch may be controlled through the rear

remote valves, or by a dedicated mid-mounted twin
spool remote valve.

-- with mechanical rear remote valves:

Using valves I or II at the rear of the tractor, operation
of the front hitch may be controlled via the remote
valve levers.

With the front linkage connected to valve number I,

pull the lever rearwards (R) to raise the front linkage.
Move the lever to (N) to halt linkage movement, the
linkage will maintain its height position. Select (L) to
lower the linkage. With the lever in the float position
(F), the linkage can move up and down (float)
allowing the implement to follow the ground
contours.
72

3--52
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

If the implement requires additional hydraulic

services, these may be connected to any unused
remote valve. However, for convenience, it is
recommended the second valve (II) is used for this
purpose.

As an alternative, the levers operating remote valves

I and II may be replaced by a joystick located in a
forward position on the right--hand side of the
operators seat.

IMPORTANT: With the joystick operating the rear

remote valves, a float position (F) is available by
moving the lever fully to the right. This function is not
available when operating with a mid--mounted
2--spool remote valve.

73

-- with Electro Hydraulic remote valves:

Electro Hydraulic valves may be used to operate the

front hitch using the remote valve lever or electronic
joystick (where fitted). The Electro Hydraulic levers
function in a similar way to the mechanical levers.

The standard default valve to operate the hitch will

always be valve number IIII. However, it is possible
to set the default to alternative remote valve if
required.

The default valve (IIII) is programmed to operate in

conjunction with the front hitch height limiter. If an 74
alternative valve is used, the height limiter will not
function until the new valve has been programmed.

To reset the default valve, the tractor must be

stationary with the parking brake applied, ensure all
hydraulic lines are disconnected from the remote
valve couplings.

3--53
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

• Ensure all EHR timer switches (1), are in the off

position.
• Turn the key--start on, but do not start the engine.
• Depress the timer switch for remote valve No.1
then, within five seconds, depress the timer
switch for valve No. 2.
• ’FEhr’ will appear in the Dot Matrix Display, after
two seconds this will change to show the current
default valve, for example ’Ehr4’.

• Choose the new default valve and depress the

timer switch for that valve three times, the display
will change to show the new selection, for 75
example ’Ehr1’.
• Turn the key--start off, the new default valve for
front linkage operation is now memorised.

NOTE: For programming procedures on EHR

remote valves, see page 3--66.

With twin spool mid mounted remote valve:

(where fitted)

The optional mid mount remote valve is controlled by

a joystick located on the right--hand side of the seat.
The mid mount valve provides two additional double
acting services, one of which may be utilised to
operate the front hitch.

Pull the joystick rearwards (R) to raise the

implement. When the hydraulic lift reaches the
height set by the height limit rotary control the
joystick will return automatically to neutral (N).
Alternatively, the hydraulic lift will stop raising when 76
the joystick is manually returned to the neutral
position. Moving the joystick fully rearward against
spring pressure will provide a faster rate of lift.

Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L)

will cause the implement to lower to the ground at a
controlled rate of descent.

Further forward movement of the joystick will select

‘float’ (F) which will allow the cylinder to extend or
retract freely. When in the float position, pushing the
joystick fully forward against spring pressure will
slow the movement of the cylinder.

NOTE: Always use the ’float’ position to lower a

single--acting cylinder. The ’lower’ position is for
double--acting cylinders only.

3--54
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

The joystick may also be moved laterally, (R) and (L),

to provide oil flow for equipment connected to the
optional front couplers.

NOTE: With the joystick operating the rear remote

valves, a float (F) position is available by moving the
lever fully to the right. This float facility is not
available when operating with a mid--mounted
2--spool remote valve.

The joystick has the added advantage of being able

to operate two cylinders simultaneously by moving it
diagonally.
77
IMPORTANT: When operating with a hydraulic
motor always use ‘lower’ and ’float’ positions to
control motor rotation. To stop the motor, move the
lever from the ‘lower’ (drive) position to the ‘float’
position. The motor will then slow to a gradual halt
and not stop abruptly which may cause internal
damage to the motor.

The joystick safety lock lever is used to prevent

accidental operation of the remote valve(s).

The safety lock on the joystick has three positions:

1. Fully out. All joystick movements available.

2. Mid Position. Lateral movement locked out.
3. Fully in. All joystick movements locked.

78

Setting the Height of the Front Hitch

Height limit control is provided by a rotary knob (1) on

the right-hand console. Fully clockwise is maximum
height. Turn anti-clockwise for minimum height.

NOTE: The height limit setting is affected by the oil

flow through the system. For example, if the flow
control setting is set to maximum and engine speed
is high then hitch height may be up to 100 mm (4 in.)
higher than would be achieved if engine speed and
oil flow rate were low.

79

3--55
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Transport Position

The top link and lower links should be placed in the

transport position when not in use. Raise the top link
(1) to the vertical position and secure by inserting the
lock pin (2) through the top link and anchor bracket.
Secure the pin with the spring clip as shown.

80

Each lower link pivots about the pivot bolt (2). The
pivot bolt should not be removed unless it is required
to remove the lower links. Extract the lower pin (3)
from the link assembly and raise the lower link (1) to
the vertical position, as shown. Insert the pin through
the upper hole in the inner link arm when the holes
in the inner and outer links (4) are correctly aligned.
Before operating the tractor ensure both pins are
secured with lynch--pins.

81

To convert to the working position, remove the

lynch--pin, pull out the pin (5) and manually lower the
link arm down to the operating position, as shown.
Install the removed pin in one of the holes (6) or (7),
as required.

When installed in the rear hole (6) as shown, the

lower link will be locked as a rigid unit. If the pin is
installed in the front hole (7), the lower link will be
allowed to move up and down freely (float) through
a range of approx. 75 mm (3 in). Secure the pin with
the lynch--pin.

Repeat on the other lower link, ensuring that both 82

lower links are set up the same, i.e., both are locked
as rigid units or both are allowed to float.

3--56
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

NOTE: With the lower links pinned in the float

position, the left and right-hand sides of the
implement can move up and down independently to
allow for operation on uneven surfaces. In addition,
the remote control valve float function will allow the
whole implement to move up or down as it passes
over uneven ground.

Coupling Implement to Tractor

Start the engine. Move the remote valve lever or

joystick (where fitted) from neutral (N) to lower (L)
until the link arms are just clear of the ground.
Position the tractor so that the open claw ends are
beneath the implement hitch pins.

83

Slowly move the remote valve lever or joystick

rearward to raise the lower links until the claw
couplers engage the ball-bushings. An audible click
will be heard as the self-locking latches engage the
ball-bushings on the implement. The lift control
should be returned to the neutral position before the
lower links start to lift the implement from the ground.

IMPORTANT: Before operating the tractor, ensure

the release latches (1), are fully retracted into the link
end.

84

Attach the top link to the implement, adjusting to the

correct length by rotating the threaded centre section
using the handle (3) as leverage. To prevent the
centre section from rotating while in work, place the
locking latch (1) over the pin (2) or adjuster handle
(3). The top link has a similar claw end to the lower
links. Lower the top link claw onto the upper
implement ball-bush and press down until the latch
is heard to engage.

The implement supports, where fitted, may now be

removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the front linkage.
85

3--57
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

The top link is connected to the bracket with the pin

(2) secured by the spring pin. Two holes are provided
in the top link bracket for location of the top link. Use
the top hole (1), as shown, for maximum lift capacity.
Use the lower hole (3), to provide the greatest
implement height, when raised.

86

Uncoupling Implement from Tractor

Using the remote lever or joystick, lower the

implement to the ground, ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the front hitch. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).

Pull back the lever on the top link to release the claw
from the implement upper hitch pin.

Pull the ring (1) on both lower links fully rearwards.

The lever will lock in position with the latch retracted.
This will allow the links to clear the ball-bushings on
the implement lower hitch pins when the links are 87
lowered fully.

Fully lower the lower links using the remote lever or

joystick and reverse the tractor clear of the
implement.

3--58
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

ELECTRONIC DRAFT CONTROL

NOTE: Depending on tractor specifiication, some

Electronic Draft Control features shown in this
section may not be fitted.

This system described here is known as Electronic

Draft Control. This electronically controlled hydraulic
system senses changes in the draft loading via
sensors in the lower link pins of the 3--point linkage
and changes in the position of the linkage via a
sensor on the cross shaft. The system functions in
Position Control or Draft Control.

Position Control provides accurate control of

implements, such as sprayers, rakes, graders, etc.,
that operate above the ground. Once implement
height has been set, the system will maintain the
selected position irrespective of any external forces
acting upon it.

Draft Control is designed for mounted or

semi-mounted implements operating in the ground.
Changes in soil resistance cause the draft loading on
the implement to increase or decrease.

Draft Control Operational Notes

Draft control sets the working depth in the soil by

maintaining a constant draft load. If the Position
Control lever (1), is set just below the normal Draft
Control working depth, it will prevent the implement
from ‘diving’ or working too deep if an area of soft or
light soil is encountered.

Position Control will override draft control when the

Position Control lever is moved above the working
depth set by the draft loading wheel (2). Therefore,
the Position Control lever can be used to lift the
implement out of the ground, from the normal Draft 88
Control working depth, without changing the Draft
Control setting.

This function can be useful when a gradual lift out is

required. The thumbwheel stop can be set so that the
Position Control lever can be returned quickly to a
lower limit position just below the normal Draft
Control working depth.

The raise/lower switch would normally be used to

raise or lower an implement during a work cycle.

3--59
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Control Pod

The thumbwheel (1), when rotated, will move the

adjustable stop (2).

The position control lever (3), is used to set

implement height, when operating in Position
Control. Use it to set the maximum implement depth
when operating in Draft Control.

The draft loading wheel (4), determines the draft load

and therefore implement working depth by setting a
force on the draft sensitivity pins. Selecting position
10 will provide maximum load and therefore 89
maximum implement depth.

The raise/lower switch (5) Figure 89, is a three

position, spring centered switch that enables the
operator to rapidly raise the implement to the position
set by the height limit control and to lower the
implement back down to the working depth/height
set by the Position or Draft Controls, without
disturbing the settings. The switch also provides for
faster ground engagement, if required. For detailed
information, see text on page 3--66.

EDC Panel

The draft sensitivity control (1), is used to make the

system more sensitive or less sensitive to changes
in draft loading. Maximum sensitivity is obtained by
rotating the control fully clockwise.

The drop rate control (2), adjusts the speed at which

the three--point linkage drops during the lowering
cycle. Position 1 selects the slowest drop and is
denoted by the tortoise symbol, position 7 provides
the fastest rate of drop.

The height limit control knob (3), limits the height to 90

which the linkage may be raised. Adjust this knob to
avoid the possibility of a large implement damaging
the tractor when fully raised.

The slip limit control knob (4), available only with the
optional radar sensor unit, enables the operator to
select a wheel slip threshold, above which the
implement will raise until wheel slip returns to the set
level.

3--60
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Indicator Lights

The malfunction warning light (1), serves two

purposes:
-- Flashing light means that there is a malfunction
in the system circuits. This will be accompanied by
the hitch error symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix
Display.
-- Steady light signifies ‘hitch disabled’. Again, the
‘hitch disabled’ warning is repeated in the Dot Matrix
Display with the hitch symbol.
The indicator lights (2) and (3), operate when the
position control lever is used to raise or lower the 91
implement or as lift and lower corrections occur
during normal tractor operation. The lower light (3)
will illuminate when the 3--point linkage lowers. The
upper light (2) will illuminate when the linkage raises.

A slip limit ‘on’ indicator (4), illuminates when the

wheel slip limit control is activated.

Hitch Position Display

The digital display in the instrument panel indicates

the position of the lower links over a scale of ‘0’ to
‘100’. A display of ‘0’ indicates that the links are fully
lowered. ‘100’ indicates they are fully raised. Select
the display using the CAL/SEL switch or the
Enhanced keypad (where fitted).

92

Malfunction Warning Light

In the unlikely event that a fault occurs in the EDC,

the malfunction warning light (1) Figure 91, will start
to flash. The warning light will be accompanied by the
appearance of the hitch symbol (1), and error code
(2), in the Dot Matrix Display.

93

3--61
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

The code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor in

which the fault lies and the type of fault, e.g. short
circuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc. In this event
your tractor will require the attention of your
authorised dealer.

A steady malfunction warning light signifies ‘hitch

disabled’ which is repeated in the Dot Matrix Display
by the apperance of the hitch symbol (1) and error
code ’1024’ (2).

The ‘hitch disabled’ warning light signifies that the

position control setting does not correspond to the
position of the lower links with the result that the
lower links cannot be raised or lowered using the
in-cab controls. The ‘hitch disabled’ warning will
display if:

• The Position Control lever has been moved with

the engine stopped. 94

• One of the external power lift switches has been

operated to raise or lower the three-point linkage.
See ‘External Hydraulic Power Lift Controls’ on
page 3--69.

To put the Position Control lever back into phase with

the lower links, place the raise/lower switch in the
central position and, with the engine running, move
the Position Control lever (1) slowly forward or
rearward, as required, until the position of the lever
matches the linkage height. The ‘hitch disabled’
warning light will go out and the hitch error symbol will
disappear from the Dot Matrix Display. The 3--point
linkage will now raise or lower normally.

95

3--62
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

PRE--OPERATION SETTINGS

Attach the implement to the 3--point linkage.

Turn the draft loading wheel (2) fully forward to

position 10 -- this is the Position Control setting.

Start the engine and, using the Position Control lever

(1), raise the implement in stages, ensuring that
there is at least 100 mm (4 in.) clearance between the
implement and any part of the tractor. Note the digital
display reading on the instrument panel. If the
reading is less than ‘99’ it means that the implement
is not fully raised. 96

Adjust the height limit control knob (2) to prevent the

linkage being raised further and so avoid the
possibility of the implement damaging the tractor
when fully raised.

When the raise/lower switch or the Position Control

lever is used to raise the implement, it will only raise
to the height set by the height limit control, as
determined in the previous step.

Adjust the rate of drop, to suit the size and weight of

the attached implement, by rotating the drop rate
control knob (1). Turn the knob clockwise to speed up
the drop rate or anti-clockwise to slow down the drop 97
rate.

IMPORTANT: When first setting the implement up

for work, keep the drop rate control knob in the slow
drop position (‘tortoise’ symbol).

When the raise/lower switch is used to lower the

implement, it will lower at a controlled rate as
determined in the previous step.

3--63
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

DRAFT CONTROL OPERATION

To operate in Draft Control adjustment of several

controls is necessary to suit the implement and field
conditions.

The draft loading wheel (2), determines implement

depth by setting a required force on the draft sensing
pins Set the wheel to the mid-position (position 5)
prior to commencing work.

98

The position of the draft sensitivity knob (1),

determines the sensitivity of the system. Set the
knob to the mid-position before entering the field.

99

Drive the tractor into the field and lower the

implement into work by moving the Position Control
lever (3), forward. Use the Position Control lever to
set the maximum depth and so prevent ‘diving’ when
areas of light soil are encountered. Set the required
implement working depth by rotating the draft loading
wheel (4).

Rotate the thumbwheel (1) to move the adjustable

stop (2) against the Position Control lever so that the
selected setting may be quickly found.

100

3--64
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Observe the implement as it pulls through the soil

and adjust the draft sensitivity knob (1), until the
tendency to raise or lower, due to variations in soil
resistance, is satisfactory. Once set, the tractor
hydraulic system will automatically adjust implement
depth to maintain an even pull (draft load) on the
tractor.

The optimum setting will be achieved by observing

the movement indicator lights (2) and (3). The upper
light (2) will illuminate every time the system raises
the implement as normal draft corrections occur. The
lower light (3) will illuminate as the implement lowers.
101

Turn the draft sensitivity knob (1) slowly clockwise.

The system will respond with smaller, quicker
movements as will be seen by both the indicator
lights flickering. At this point, turn the knob slightly
anti-clockwise until either of the indicator lights
flashes once every 2 or 3 seconds or, as required, to
suit the soil conditions.

Once the required working conditions have been

established there is no need to move the position
control lever again until the work in hand is
completed.

102

Upon reaching the headland, momentarily depress

the top of the raise/lower switch (3) to quickly lift the
implement to the position set by the height limit
control knob. When re-entering the working area,
momentarily depress the lower part of the switch and
the implement will descend at the rate set by the drop
rate control knob and stop when it reaches the depth
set by the draft loading wheel (2).

During the raise cycle, momentarily depressing the

top of the raise/lower switch will pause implement lift.
Depress the top of the switch again to resume the
cycle.
103
Depressing the lower part of the switch during the
lowering cycle will also pause implement drop.

3--65
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Faster implement penetration may be required, for

example, after turning at a narrow headland. Also,
some implements are reluctant to penetrate,
particularly if the ground is heavy. Press and hold the
bottom of the raise/lower switch (4) and the
implement will lower at the rate set by the drop rate
control knob, until it contacts the ground. The drop
rate and the Position Control settings will then be
overridden and the implement will quickly penetrate
the ground, rising to the preset working depth when
the switch is released.

Alternatively, the adjustable stop may be used to set

the implement depth. When the required implement
104
depth has been established, rotate the thumbwheel
(1). This will move the stop (2) so that it is against the
front edge of the position control lever (3). Whenever
the implement is raised, using the Position Control
lever, it will always return to the same working depth
when the lever is moved forward to contact the stop.

NOTE: If required, the Position Control may be

eased sideways (to the left), in order to bypass the
stop, to lower the implement further.

The slip limit control knob (1), available only with the
optional radar sensor unit, enables the operator to
select a wheel slip threshold, above which the
implement will raise until wheel slip returns to the
preset level. The system overrides the normal Draft
and Position Control sensing signals of the
hydraulics so care must be taken not to select too low
or too high a slip limit. Setting the slip limit to a very
low level, unobtainable in wet conditions, may have
a detrimental effect on the work rate/depth.

105
The slip limit ‘on’ indicator (2) will illuminate when slip
control is activated and the implement is raising to
restore the selected slip rate. The knob is detented
at the ‘off’ position (knob fully clockwise).

106

3--66
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

POSITION CONTROL OPERATION

To operate in Position Control, the draft loading

wheel (4) should, ideally, be rotated fully forward to
position 10.

Use the Position Control lever (3) to raise and lower

the 3--point linkage. The implement will raise and
stop at the height set by the height limit control knob.

NOTE: The rate of lift will be adjusted automatically.

If a large movement of the position control lever is
made then the lower links will respond by moving
rapidly. As the links approach the position set by the 107
Position Control lever, implement movement will be
slower.

When the implement is at the required working

height, use thumbwheel (1) to set the adjustable stop
(2) against the Position Control lever (3). Every time
the Position Control lever is moved, it may be quickly
returned to it’s original position, against the stop, to
maintain the required implement height.

If it is required to raise the implement at the headland,

momentarily depress the top of the raise/lower
switch (5), to lift the implement to the position set by
the height limit control knob. When re-entering the
work area, depress the lower part of the switch and
the implement will return to the height originally set
by the Position Control lever (3).

3--67
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TRANSPORT LOCK

When transporting equipment on the 3-point linkage,

turn the drop rate control knob (2), fully anti-clockwise
to the transport lock position (padlock symbol). This will
prevent the implement from accidentally lowering and
damaging the road surface.

DYNAMIC RIDE CONTROL

When transporting equipment on the 3-point linkage,

implement bounce can lead to lack of steering control
at transport speeds. With Ride Control selected,
when the front wheels hit a bump, causing the front
of the tractor to rise, the hydraulic system will
immediately react to counter the movement and
minimise implement bounce to provide a smoother
ride.

To engage Ride Control, turn the draft sensitivity

knob (1), fully anti-clockwise. Using the raise/lower
switch (4) Figure 109, raise the implement to the 108
height set by the height limit control (3).

Turn the drop rate control knob (2) fully

anti-clockwise to the transport lock position (padlock
symbol).

Ride Control will only operate at speeds above 8 kph

(5 MPH). When tractor speed exceeds 8 kph (5 MPH),
the implement will drop by 4 -- 5 points (as displayed
on the instrument panel) as the hydraulic system
makes corrections to counteract implement bounce.
When tractor speed falls below 8 kph (5 MPH) the
implement will raise again to the height set by the
height limit control and Ride Control will become
inoperative.
109

3--68
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

EXTERNAL THREE--POINT HITCH CONTROLS

(where fitted)

An external, rocker type switch (1) is provided on

each rear fender assembly. The switches are of a
three-position design, spring-loaded to return to the
central, off position.

WARNING
Do not stand on or near the implement or between
the implement and tractor when operating the
external hydraulic power lift controls.

110
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external
switches:

• Move the gearshift levers to neutral.

• Disengage the P.T.O.

• Apply the parking brake.

With the engine running, move the hand throttle lever

to the low idle position (fully rearwards).

WARNING
Before using the external hydraulic power lift
switches, ensure that no person or object is in the
area of the implement or 3-point linkage.

Never operate the external switches while standing:

• Directly behind the tractor or tyres.

• Between the lower links.

• On or near the implement.

WARNING
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any
object into the area near the 3-point linkage or
implement while operating the external switch.
111

3--69
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Never have an assistant working the opposite set of

controls. When moving to the opposite set of
controls, move around the tractor or implement. Do
not cross between the implement and tractor.

The operator must only activate the external

switches while standing to the side of the tractor
(outboard of the rear tyres).

Pressing the upper part of the rocker switch (1) will

cause the lift linkage to raise slowly. Pressing the
lower part will cause the linkage to lower. When the
lower links align with the implement, release the
switch and attach the implement to the 3-point
linkage in the normal way.

To transfer control of the hydraulic power lift back to

the lift control lever, move the lift control lever fully
rearwards and push forward again, more slowly. The
‘hitch enabled’ symbol will display in the instrument
panel, indicating that the 3-point linkage is in phase
with the lift control lever (see page 3--62).
112
IMPORTANT: When control of the 3-point linkage is
transferred back to the lift control lever, an attached
implement may raise fully and damage the rear of the
cab. Operator’s should be aware of this and take
appropriate action to stop raising before full lift height
is reached. Adjust the height limit control knob as
described under Position Control Operation.

3--70
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

HYDRAULIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

WARNING
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can
penetrate the skin causing serious injury. If any fluid
is injected into the skin, obtain medical attention
immediately or gangrene may result.

• Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a

piece of cardboard or paper.

• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before

connecting or disconnecting hydraulic lines.

• Tighten all connections before starting the

engine or pressurising lines.

Hydraulic remote control valves are available to

operate external hydraulic cylinders, motors etc. All
models have two valves as standard, installed at the
rear of the tractor adjacent to the top link.

On tractors with four valves, the first and second

valves may be controlled by levers or by a 4--way
joystick control mounted to the right of the operator’s
seat.

Each control lever is coloured to correspond to the

colour marking on the remote valve.

113

Control Levers

Each valve is controlled by a separate lever providing

four operating positions, raise (R), neutral (N), lower
(L) and float (F). The levers and their respective
valves are colour coded for identification.

Move the lever rearward from the neutral position

and the cylinder will extend to raise the implement.
Push the lever forward, past neutral, to retract or
lower the cylinder. Pushing it fully forward, beyond
the ‘retract’ position, will select ‘float’ which will
permit the cylinder to extend (raise) or retract (lower)
freely, thereby allowing equipment such as scraper 114
blades to ‘float or follow the ground contour.

3--71
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Joystick Control (where fitted)

The joystick (1), actuates valves I and II, operating

in a cross pattern.

Moving the joystick backwards and forwards in a

straight line actuates valve No. I.

Moving the joystick sideways in a straight line

actuates valve No. II.

Moving the joystick diagonally will actuate both

valves simultaneously. By applying directional bias,
one valve can be made to actuate at a faster or 115
slower rate than the other.

Move the joystick rearward from the neutral position

and the cylinder connected to valve No. I will extend
to raise the implement. Push the joystick forward,
past neutral, to retract (lower) the cylinder. Pushing
it fully forward, beyond the ‘retract’ position, will
select ‘float’ which will permit the cylinder connected
to remote control valve No. I to extend or retract
freely, thereby allowing equipment such as scraper
blades to ‘float or follow the ground contour.

Move the joystick to the left from the neutral position

and the cylinder connected to valve No. II will extend
to raise the implement. Move the joystick to the right,
past neutral, to retract the cylinder. Move the it fully
to the right, beyond the ‘retract’ position, will select
‘float’ which will permit the cylinder connected to
remote control valve No. II to extend or retract freely.

The joystick and it’s respective valves are colour

coded for identification.

3--72
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Joystick Lock

The lever lock provides selective control of the

joystick. With the lock pushed fully in, position (1), the
joystick is fixed in neutral and the remote valves
cannot be operated, either by accident or by choice.

If the lock is pulled fully out, position (3), valves I and

II may be operated independently or together by
moving the joystick control in the appropriate
direction.

In the intermeadiate position (2), lateral movement of

the joystick that operates valve II is locked. 116

Joystick or Lever Controls

The extend (raise), neutral, retract (lower) and float

positions are identified by symbols on a decal next to
the joystick and/or control levers.

A detent will hold the joystick/lever in the selected

extend or retract position until the remote cylinder
reaches the end of the stroke when the control lever
will automatically return to neutral. Alternatively, the
lever may be returned to neutral manually. The lever
will not return automatically from the float position.

NOTE: Do not hold the joystick/lever in the extend or 117

retract position once the remote cylinder has
reached the end of the stroke as this will cause the
relief valve to ‘blow’. Forcing oil through the relief
valve for extended periods will overheat the oil and
may lead to failure of hydraulic and driveline
components.

3--73
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Configurable Detent Operation

(where fitted)

Your tractor may be fitted with two remote valves

having configurable detents. The rotary control (1),
is used to select one of five detent settings.

To select a setting, rotate the control until the number

(2), on the end cap, aligns with the mark (1), on the
valve body.

NOTE: If the number on the rotary control is not

aligned correcty with the reference mark on the valve
body, the performance of the valve may be affected. 118

Before turning the selector, ensure any residual

pressure in the hydraulic system is exhausted. To do
this, stop the tractor engine, cycle the remote valve
lever through all positions and then place the lever in
neutral.

Each position offers the follwing functions:

I. Raise (R), Neutral (N), Lower (L) and Float (F) *To select position 5, place the remote valve lever in
positions available. neutral, select position I or IV then move the lever to
Detent position in Float only. the Float position. With the lever in Float select
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out). position V.

II. Raise, Neutral and Lower positions only. To de--select position V, put the remote valve lever
No Float facility. into float, turn the selector control to position I or IV
No detent positions available. and then move the remote valve lever to neutral. It
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out). is now possible to select positions I to IV.

III. Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions IMPORTANT: To prevent inadvertent movement of
available. attached equipment when starting the tractor engine,
Detents in Raise, Lower and Float. ensure the remote valve levers are in the correct
Lever auto return to neutral (kick out) in Raise position before operating the key--start switch:
and Lower positions.
With the selector in positions I to IV -- Neutral
With the selector in position V -- Float
IV. Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions
available.
Detents in Raise, Lower and Float.
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).

V. *Lower and Float positions available.

Detents in Raise and Float.
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).

3--74
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Flow Control

The flow control valve (1), meters the flow of oil to the
remote cylinder and thus controls the rate of
response of the cylinder. Rotate the flow control
anti--clockwise to increase the oil flow to the
implement, rotate clockwise to reduce the oil flow.

For flow rates, see Section 8 -- Specifications.

119

Operating with a Front Loader

If your tractor is fitted with a non New Holland front

loader, the rear remote valves may be used to
provide the hydraulic power.

For loader control it is recommended that remote

valves 1 and 2 are fitted with a joystick and converted
to non detent operation (position 1 with adjustable
detents).

See Accessories, Section 7 for details on Zero

Detent kits for non adjustable remote valves
120

Remote Valve Couplers

Each remote control valve has a pair of 1/2 in.

quick-disconnect, female couplers. These are of a
self--sealing/locking design but will allow remote
cylinder hoses to pull free if the implement should
become disconnected from the tractor. The raise (lift)
coupler (1), is on the left--hand side, the lower (drop)
coupler (2), on the right--hand side.

The flip--up covers are colour coded black, brown,

blue and green to corresponding to the control levers
in the cab.
121

3--75
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Connecting Remote Cylinders

WARNING
Before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic hoses
at the remote cylinders, stop the engine and relieve
the pressure in the circuit by moving the remote
control valve lever(s) or joystick fully forward to the
‘float’ position then back to neutral. Never work under
or allow anyone near raised equipment as it will drop
when relieving pressure in the system.

WARNING
Before disconnecting cylinders or equipment ensure
the equipment or implement is supported securely.

To connect a remote cylinder, lift the hinged cover(1),

until it locks in the raised position, insert the feed
and/or return hose through the slit in the secondary
dust cover, ensuring it is correctly seated in the
coupler. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the
hose(s) to allow the tractor/implement to turn in
either direction.

IMPORTANT: Before connecting remote cylinder

hoses, stop the engine and thoroughly clean the
connections to prevent oil contamination.

122

3--76
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

To equalise the pressure in the hose and tractor

couplers, start the engine and move the joystick or
valve control lever (1), to the ‘float’ position, then
return it to neutral. To disconnect, grip the hose a
short distance from the coupler, push the hose
forward, into the coupler, then quickly pull on the
hose to ‘pop’ the coupler free. Close the hinged cover
to protect the valve.

WARNING
Never work under equipment supported by a
hydraulic device because it may drop if the control is
actuated (even with the engine stopped) or in the
event of hose failure. Always use a secure support 123
for equipment which must be serviced while in the
raised position.

NOTE: Remote cylinders are operated by oil drawn

from the tractor hydraulic system, therefore, always
check and replenish the hydraulic system oil after
remote cylinder equipment has been connected and
cycled a few times. Operating the tractor with a low
oil level may result in damage to the rear axle and
transmission components.

When topping up the rear axle to accommodate the

requirement of remote cylinders, no more than 20
litres (5.28 U.S. Gallons) should be added to bring
the oil level up to the full mark on the dipstick.

Alternatively, remote cylinders with a total oil

capacity of up to 18 litres (4.75 U.S. Gallons) may be
connected to the tractor hydraulic system without
adding oil, provided that the tractor is being operated
on level ground.

3--77
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Operating Double-Acting Cylinders

Connect the feed hose (1) between the piston end of

a double-acting cylinder and the left--hand coupler on
the remote control valve. Connect the hose (2)
between the right--hand coupler on the same valve
and the rod end of the cylinder. To extend a
double-acting cylinder, move the control lever or
joystick to the ‘extend’ (raise) position.

To retract a double-acting cylinder, move the control

lever or joystick through neutral to the ‘retract’ (lower)
position.
124

Further movement of the lever or joystick, beyond

the ‘retract’ position, will select ‘float’ which will allow
the cylinder to extend or retract freely. This feature
is of material assistance when carrying out work with
equipment such as scraper blades and loaders.

125

Operating Single-Acting Cylinders

Connect the hose (1) from a single-acting cylinder to

the left--hand coupler (2) on the remote control valve.

To extend a single-acting cylinder, move the control

lever or joystick to the ‘extend’ (raise) position.

Manually return the lever or joystick to the neutral

position to stop the cylinder before it is fully extended
or allow the valve to return to the neutral
automatically when the cylinder reaches the end of
it’s stroke.
126
To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever or
joystick beyond the ‘retract’ (lower) position to the
‘float’ position.

3--78
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

IMPORTANT: Always use the ‘float’ position to

retract a single-acting cylinder. The ‘retract’ position
is for double-acting cylinders only.

NOTE: If a single-acting cylinder is disconnected in

the extended position, while supporting a load, the
hose may be reconnected to the remote control valve
but will not operate until the pressure is released.
Proceed as follows:

• Connect the hose, as described above.

• Start the engine and momentarily pressurise the

cylinder by moving the remote control valve 127
lever/joystick to the extend position and then
immediately to the float position to retract the
cylinder and lower the implement.

Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic

Equipment

Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g. hydraulic

motors) should be connected to a remote control
valve coupler with the feed hose (2) connected to the
right--hand coupler and the return hose (1)
connected to the left--hand coupler of the same
valve.

With the remote control valve lever or joystick in the

‘float’ position the motor will be stationary. The
hydraulic motor will operate if the lever or joystick is
moved to the ‘retract’ (lower) position.
128
IMPORTANT: To stop the motor, move the lever or
joystick to the ‘float’ position. The motor will then slow
to a halt and not stop abruptly causing internal line
pressures which could damage the motor seals.

Observe the following to further protect the tractor

and equipment:
• Do not open any by-pass valve in the equipment
or motor. Use the flow control valve to control the
rate of flow or speed of the motor.
• To assure optimum hydraulic oil cooling and
prevent overheating, operate continuous flow
equipment at the highest flow setting (by use of
the flow control valve (1), and lowest engine
speed that will give the required machine
performance and speed.

129

3--79
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

• It is recommended that a temperature gauge, Bleeding Remote Cylinders

where available, is installed in the remote circuit
when using hydraulic motors for continuous When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a
operation. If over-heating occurs, stop the new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one
hydraulic motor until the oil cools. Ensure the flow that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be
control setting is at maximum and the engine necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.
speed at a minimum, appropriate to machine
performance.
With the hoses connected to the remote control valve
If operating conditions are normal and high couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the
temperatures persist, install an oil cooler in the motor cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend
return circuit. The maximum recommended and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using the
operating temperature of the oil is 110°C (230°F). remote control valve lever or joystick.
Your authorised dealer can supply a suitable oil
cooler and the necessary fittings or make the Check the rear axle oil level before and after
installation for you. operating a remote cylinder.

Operating Several Remote Valves

Simultaneously or Remote Valves and
Hydraulic Lift Simultaneously

NOTE: The hydraulic load-sensing system on your

tractor adjusts the oil flow according to the individual
flow control settings up to the maximum output
possible, dependent upon engine speed. The oil flow
will be relatively constant in the remote control valve
circuits if the flow control valves are used to regulate
the flow, thus providing constant operating speed for
hydraulic motors, etc., even if engine speed varies.
Maintain the engine speed above the minimum
required for simultaneous operation of all the
required circuits and vary ground speed by selection
of the appropriate gear ratio.

If operating two or more remote control valves

simultaneously or remote valves and the hydraulic
lift, all the flow control valves should be adjusted to
provide a partial flow. If not so adjusted, all the
available flow may be directed to the full flow circuit
when the pressure in that circuit is less than that of
the other circuits in use.

3--80
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

ELECTRO--HYDRAULIC REMOTE
CONTROL VALVES (where fitted)

NOTE: The Electro--hydraulic remote valves are

only available in conjunction with the Enhanced
keypad.

The electro--hydraulic remote valves operate in a

similar manner to the mechanical valves previously
described. However, with these remote valves, a
number of additional automated functions are
available, supported by visual displays in the Dot
Matrix screen.

Remote Valve Isolator Switch

The remote valves cannot be operated unless the
system is energised using the isolator switch (1).
Depress the lower part of the switch to activate the
electrical circuit, depress the upper part to
de--activate. When activated, the amber warning
light (2) will be illuminated. The remote valve(s) are
now operational whenever the tractor engine is
running.

IMPORTANT:The isolator switch may be used to

immediately stop operation of the rear remote valves
by depressing the top of the switch. The isolator
switch will only control the remote valves, it has no 130
effect on three point linkage operation.

Control Levers

Each remote valve lever has four positions, extend,

neutral, retract, and float. In extend and retract
modes, the detented positions are used for timed
remote valve functions.
Pull the lever back from the neutral position, (N), to
the “extend” (Raise) position, (R). From neutral, push
forward to the “retract” (Lower) position, (L). Push
the lever fully forward to the Float position, (F). Float
will permit the cylinder to extend or retract allowing
equipment such as scraper blades to “float” or follow
the ground contour.
131
The “float” position is also used for retracting a
single-acting cylinder and is the OFF position for
hydraulic motors.

3--81
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

CAUTION
Electro Hydraulic Remote Control Valves have
detented lever positions. It is not recommended
these control valves be used for front loader
operation. Consult your authorised dealer.

IMPORTANT: In the unlikely event that the remote

valve ceases to operate or responds incorrectly to
lever movements, the system will require the
attention of your authorised dealer.

Each control lever has a ’rolling gate’ which is used

to select or lock--out individual remote valve
functions. Detents on the lever (1) will lock the ’gate’
in one of five positions.

I. Neutral and Raise locked out: Lower and Float

functional. Move the lever into float before
selecting this position.
II. Raise detent locked out: Neutral, Lower and
Float functions operative.
III. All valve functions are operative.

IV. Float locked out: Raise, Neutral and Lower 132

functional.
V. Lever locked in neutral: No valve functions are
available.

Visual Displays

Depress the remote valve key on the keypad and the

following information will be displayed in the DMD for
each valve:

1. Momentary oil flow from the valve. The shaded

area represents the percentage of oil flow, this
will change as the flow increases or decreases.

2. Maximum flow rate (%) as set by the operator.

The extend/retract directional arrows represent 4 3
the maximum flow setting.
133
3. Number of the remote valve in operation.

4. Direction of cylinder movement, extend (Raise)

or retract (Lower). The direction of cylinder travel
is identified by the arrow.

3--82
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Setting the Maximum Flow Rate

The maximum flow rate for each remote valve can be

set using the menu keys on the Enhanced keypad.

To adjust the remote valve flow rate, the key--start

must be switched ON.

Using the remote valve key (1), select the

appropriate valve (1, 2, 3, or 4).

134

With the selected valve number displayed in the

DMD, Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys (1 and 2), to 1
increase or decrease the maximum flow rate of the
selected valve. The flow rate will be stored in the
tractor control module until re--programmed, turning
the key--start off will not erase the setting.

NOTE: The remote valve flow rate setting (1),

Figure 136, will apply to both extend and retract
movements of the cylinder.

IMPORTANT: During remote valve set--up, a pause 2

of more than two seconds in key operation will exit
set--up and return to the previous setting, re--enter 135
set--up mode again to continue.

136

3--83
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Additional Displays

As each of the electro--hydraulic remote valve

functions are selected, a corresponding visual
display will appear in the Dot Matrix Screen.

NOTE: The following illustrations relate to remote

valve number 1, see page 3--82 for details on remote
valve numbering.

1. Remote valve in neutral position.

2. Remote valve operating at maximum flow set

by the operator. The illustration shows cylinder
operating in retract mode.

3. Remote valve lever in ’float’ position.

4. Remote valve locked in hydraulic motor mode.

Retract and Float positions only available.

5. Electro--Hydraulic Remote Valve system

switched OFF. All valve functions
de--activated.

3--84
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Manual and Programmable Lever Operation

The Enhanced keypad is used to select and

programme the timed functions for each of the
electro--hydraulic remote valves. As each remote
valve is selected using the remote valve key (1), a
visual display of the valve functions will appear in the
Dot Matrix screen.

Depress the key once to activate the remote valve

display in the DMD. Repeated operation of the key
will cycle through each valve display individually.

137

Manual Operation

When used in manual mode, without the timer

function, the electronic remote valves will operate in
a similar way to the mechanical valves previously
described.

IMPORTANT:Care must be taken when operating in

the manual mode that the remote valve lever is not
left in the detented extend or retract positions when
using remote cylinders. When the cylinder has
reached the end of its stroke the control lever must
be returned to the neutral position manually. Failure
to observe this procedure will overheat the oil and
may lead to failure of hydraulic or driveline
components.

IMPORTANT: Never use the neutral position from

the extend or retract position to stop a hydraulic
motor. Sudden hydraulic lock up of the system may
cause extensive damage to the motor.

In manual mode, oil flow through each valve is

adjusted using the flow rate setting as previously
described.

3--85
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Timed Programme Operation

Timed programme operation is provided primarily for

operation of hydraulic cylinders. This feature allows
the operator to programme a time delay between
when the control levers are activated and when the
oil flow to the implement is stopped.

To operate the electronic remote valves in

programmed mode, depress the appropriate side of
timer control switch (2) as shown. When the switch
is depressed, the green light (1) adjacent to the
remote valve lever will start to flash. The system is
now in standby mode ready to accept a programme
138
sequence. The light will continue to flash for ten
seconds allowing the operator sufficient time to begin
the programming sequence. If a programme is not
started within this period, the system will
automatically de--activate, depress the timer control
switch again to re--start the sequence.

Programming a Double Acting Service

To programme the remote valves, first ensure the

cylinder hydraulic hoses are properly connected to
the appropriate rear remote valve. Start the tractor
engine and set at the normal operating speed in
which the cylinder is to be operated. This is important
as the programming of the control levers is based on
a time interval corresponding to the time it takes the
cylinder rod to extend and retract. Any change in
engine rpm will have an effect on hydraulic flow and
therefore the time taken for the cylinder to extend
and retract.

The timed period for control lever operation remains

the same regardless of oil flow, therefore consistent
operation is required for the system to function
correctly. Using the corresponding timer switch (1)
depress the switch so the light begins to flash. While
the light is flashing move control lever (2) to extend
the cylinder (R). At this point the light ceases to flash
and will remain on.

Hold the lever until the cylinder is extended to the

desired position and then return the lever to the
neutral position. When the lever is returned to the
neutral position the programming light will begin to
flash again indicating the retract phase of the cycle
should now be programmed. 139

3--86
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Operate the control lever (2) to retract the cylinder

(L), and the programming light will cease to flash and
remain on. Hold the lever until the cylinder has
completed the retract cycle and then return to the
neutral position. After the second phase has been
programmed the light will remain on.

After the second phase has been completed and the

lever has been returned to neutral, the programme
will be automatically stored.

Repeat the above sequence to programme the

remaining control levers if required.

Programming of the control lever can be performed 140

in either sequence, extend/retract, retract/extend or
for one movement only, extend or retract. The
maximum allowable time span for any timed
operation is 30 seconds.

Programming a Single Acting Service

To programme a single acting service carry out the

same set--up procedure as previously described for
a double acting service.

With the programme light flashing, move the remote

valve lever from neutral to the extend position (R).
When the cylinder has extended to the desired
position, manually return the lever to the neutral
position. To store the setting, depress the timer
switch. In single acting mode the sequence will NOT
be automatically stored.
141
A single acting service can be programmed to
operate in either extend or retract modes.

NOTE: When using a timed sequence for a single

acting service i.e. programmed in extend mode only,
the retract mode will not function until the programme
sequence has been deleted.

If the control lever is moved to the float position no

timed programme is possible and the control lever
must be returned to neutral manually.

3--87
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Setting Remote Valve Priority

A remote valve with oil flow priority will always take

precedence over other remote valves for hydraulic oil
flow. Irrespective of flow demand by the other valves,
the priority valve will always maintain a constant
output.

For implements requiring multiple remote valve

services, there may be a need for one of the valves
to have oil flow priority, i.e. to provide oil flow for a
hydraulic motor.

With Electro--Hydraulic remote valves, the operator 142

can select one remote valve as the priority valve.

• With the key--start in the ON position, depress

and hold the Menu/Enter key (4) Figure 142, until
SET--UP MENU appears in the Dot Matrix
Display. Continue to depress the Menu/Enter key
until the display shows:

CAL (tractors without groundspeed radar)

OR
Clock set--up (tractors with groundspeed radar)

• Release the Menu/Enter key and momentarily

depress the EHR key (1) Figure 143. PEhr will
appear in the central display. Pause for 2
seconds and this will change to show the remote 143
valve currently prioritised.

NOTE: If the display shows EHr_, the remote valves

are not prioritised.

• Depress the EHR key repeatedly and the display

will scroll through each valve number, EHr1,
EHr2, etc.

• When the desired valve number is shown in the

display, depress the Exit/Cancel key (2)
Figure 142, to exit set--up and return to the
previous display. The valve priority setting is now
memorised.

3--88
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Replaying a Timed Programme Relieving System Pressure

The timed sequence begins as soon as the lever is

placed in the extend or retract detent position. On
WARNING
reaching the end of the timed period, oil flowing Before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic hoses
through the remote valve will be halted, the remote at the remote cylinders, relieve the pressure in the
valve lever should now be returned to the neutral circuit by first starting the engine and then move the
position ready for the next operation. Throughout the control levers fully forward to the “float” position.
replay sequence, the green warning light will remain Then stop the engine. Make sure no one will be
illuminated. injured by moving equipment when relieving
pressure in the system. Before disconnecting
Deleting Programmes cylinders or equipment, make sure the equipment or
implement is supported securely.
To delete a programme, depress the programme Never work under equipment supported by a
switch to de--activate timer operation. The light will hydraulic device because it may drop if the control is
extinguish and the memorised sequence will be actuated (even with the engine stopped) or in the
cleared from the programme in the memory. event of hose failure, etc. always use a secure
support for equipment which must be serviced while
in the raised position. Make sure that oil contained
Recalling a Stored Programme within the remote cylinders is clean and is of the
correct grade.
With the key--start on and all remote valve levers in
neutral, hold down the timer switch for the EHR Operating with Headland Turn Sequence
required. Keep the timer switch depressed until the (where fitted)
light illuminates and remains on, the previously
stored timer sequence is now re--activated.
IMPORTANT: When including electro hydraulic
remote valve operation in a Headland Turn
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), electronic Sequence, it is important to allow sufficient time for
programme settings made during tractor operation the movement of the control lever to be recorded as
are transferred from the operating memory to the it passes through each position (R,N,L,F or vice
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data versa). Pausing the lever in each position for
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay approximately 1/2 second will provide sufficient time
before turning the key on again. for the step to be recorded accurately. Moving the
lever too quickly may confuse data transfer causing
the implement to respond incorrectly on playback.

3--89
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Connecting Single-Acting Cylinders

Connect the hose from a single-acting cylinder to the

extend (left--hand) coupler on the remote control
valve, as previously described.

To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control

lever back to the extend position (R).

Manually return the lever to the neutral position to

stop the cylinder when it has reached the desired
position. (see page 3--87).

To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever

fully forward to the float (F) position. 144

NOTE: In single acting timer mode the remote lever

will lock in the extend position and will not
automatically return to the neutral position.

IMPORTANT: Always use the “float” position to

lower a single-acting cylinder. The “retract” position
is for double-acting cylinders only.

Connecting Double-Acting Cylinders

Connect the feed hose from a double-acting cylinder

to the left--hand coupler (1) on the remote control
valve and the return hose to the right--hand coupler
(2), as previously described. To extend a double-act-
ing cylinder, pull the control lever back to the extend
position.

To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control

lever forward past neutral to the retract position.
Further forward movement of the lever will select
float which will allow the cylinder to extend or retract
freely. This feature is very helpful when carrying out
work with equipment such as scraper blades and 145
loaders.

NOTE: To prevent cylinders creeping under load,

always connect the hose from the load supporting
side of the cylinder to the left--hand coupler.

3--90
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic

Equipment

Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g., hydraulic

motors) should be connected to the lower (1st)
remote control valve couplers with the pressure hose
connected to the right--hand coupler and the return
hose connected to the low pressure return circuit
(see page 3--93, ’Return Oil Line’).

The oil flow should be adjusted to regulate the motor

speed. If the flow is too high, the 3-point hitch and
other remote valves may slow down or stop.
Controlling the flow in this way will ensure that the
hydraulic system will only supply the oil required by
the motor.

With the remote control valve lever fully forward in

the float (F) position, the motor will be stationary. The
hydraulic motor will operate if the lever is pulled back
to the retract position (Lower). To stop the motor,
move the lever from the lower position to the float
position. In the float position the motor will be able to
stop slowly, which will not damage the motor.

IMPORTANT: When operating continuous flow

equipment, the remote control valve lever must not
be moved rearward to the neutral (N) or raise (R)
positions as damage to the equipment may result.
Select position 1 on the rolling gate to lock out the
neutral and extend services (see page 3--82)
146
Observe the following to further protect the tractor
and equipment.

• Do not open any bypass valve in the equipment

or motor. Adjust the oil flow through the valve to
regulate the rate of flow or speed of the motor.
• To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling, operate
continuous flow equipment at the highest flow
setting and lowest engine speed that will give the
required machine performance and speed.

3--91
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Operating Several Remote Valves

Simultaneously or Remote Valves and 1
Hydraulic Lift Simultaneously

If operating two or more remote control valves

simultaneously or remote valves and the hydraulic
lift, the flow through the valves should be adjusted
using the enhanced keypad to provide a partial flow,
as previously described. If not so adjusted, all the
available flow may be directed to the full flow circuit
when the pressure in that circuit is less than that of
the other circuits in use. 2

NOTE: The oil flow (1), Figure 148, through remote 147
valve number one (lower valve) will always take
priority over the other valves. For equipment using
more than one remote valve, the hydraulic service
with the highest priority should be connected to valve
number one.

148

Bleeding Remote Cylinders

When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a

new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one
that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be
necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.

With the hoses connected to the remote control valve

couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the
cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend
and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using the
remote control valve operating lever.

Check the rear axle oil level before and after

operating a remote cylinder.

3--92
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

HYDRAULIC POWER BEYOND PORT for

EXTERNAL SERVICES (where fitted) 2

For implements or attachments requiring continuous

or high oil flows from the tractor hydraulic system,
provision is made to connect directly into the main
hydraulic circuit at the rear of the tractor.

To operate correctly the implement must be fitted

with a variable flow hydraulic system that will,
through a sensing line, control oil flow from the main
1
tractor hydraulic pump.

149

IMPORTANT: Before attempting to remove any

blanking plugs or attach pipework, switch OFF the
engine and ensure the areas around the plugs and
pipe connections are thoroughly clean to prevent
contamination of the tractor hydraulic system.

P -- Pressure Line (1)

To connect the implement pressure line, remove the
plug (1) from the external services ’power beyond’
port below the remote valve manifold. Using a
suitable connector, M22 x 1.5/15.5 (ISO 6149),
attach the implement supply line to this port. With the
implement control valve in neutral, a low standby
pressure of 21 to 24 bar (305 to 348 lbf. in.) will be 150
maintained in the pressure line connected to this
port.

LS -- Load Sensing (LS) Line (2)

Connect the sensing line from the M12 x 1.5/11.5
(ISO 6149) port (2), to the implement control valve.
It is the sensing line which generates and controls the
oil pressure and flow from the tractor hydraulic pump.
When an implement control valve is operated, the
low standby pressure from port ’P’, is diverted down
the sensing line to ’switch on’ the tractor hydraulic
pump. In operation, the load sensing line constantly
monitors pressure and flow to ensure supply never
exceeds demand.

LS Port Location (2)

1. Figure 149, with mechanically operated remote
valves and Electronic Draft Control.
2. Figure 150, with electronically operated remote
valves and Electronic Draft Control.

3--93
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

To connect the load sensing line from the implement

a ’T’ piece will need to be inserted in to the hydraulic
line. Consult your authorised dealer.

IMPORTANT: To ensure correct operation of the

system, the implement control valve, when in
neutral, must be capable of directing the pressure
from the sensing line back to sump through the return
line (3) to the tractor. The hydraulic system will then
return to the low pressure standby mode.

R -- Return Oil Line (3)

The return oil line from the implement control valves
should be connected to the M27 x 2/19 (ISO 6149)
port (3). This will permit the oil to return directly back
into the tractor hydraulic system.

NOTE: Ensure the hoses have a suitable capacity to

accomodate the required oil flow, and that both the
sensing line and hoses are sufficiently long enough
to allow for implement movement or articulation
when in work.

3--94
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

REAR AXLE/HYDRAULICS OIL LEVEL WHEN

USING REMOTE HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT

When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good

practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark in
the sight glass with the tractor parked on level ground
and the three--point hitch in the fully raised position.
However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to
the remote control valves it should be remembered
that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and
could seriously lower the oil level. Operating the
tractor with a low oil level may result in damage to the
rear axle and transmission components.
NOTE: Before connecting remote cylinders, stop the
engine and thoroughly clean the connections to
prevent oil contamination.
With the rear axle oil level at the Normal, or Extra
marks in the sight glass, the following maximum oil
volumes may be taken from the rear axle to power
auxiliary equipment without the need to further top up
the system:

Operating Parameters
a) Operating stationary equipment on level ground.

Maximum Oil Volumes, All Transmissions

Full Max (1) 38 litres (40.0 U.S. qts.)

Intermediate Level (2) 18 litres (19.0 U.S. qts.)

151

3--95
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Addititional Oil Reserves

Conversely, the maximum amount of oil that may be
added to the rear axle above the level indicators is 7
litres (7.3 U.S. qts.). With this quantity added to the
rear axle, the quantities stated may be increased by
the same amount, 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts.), but no
more.

WARNING
Hydraulic fluid or diesel oil escaping under pressure
can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
• Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a
piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before
connecting or disconnecting lines by moving the
remote control valve lever(s) fully forward to the
‘float’ position then back to neutral.
• Tighten all connections before starting the
engine or pressurising lines.
If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical
attention immediately or gangrene may result.

WARNING
Never work under or allow anyone near raised
equipment as it will drop when relieving pressure in
the system or in the event of hose failure, etc. Before
disconnecting cylinders or equipment ensure the
equipment or implement is supported securely.
Always use a secure support for equipment which
must be serviced while in the raised position.

3--96
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

THREE-POINT HITCH IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating

equipment, ensure that the flexible link ends (where
ATTACHING 3-POINT EQUIPMENT fitted) are locked in the operating position.

NOTE: Before attaching equipment, adjust lift rods 1. With the engine stopped and parking brake
and select the correct top link hole for the implement engaged, adjust the top link until the implement
and work to be carried out. mast pin can be inserted through the mast and
top link. Ensure sufficient thread remains in the
adjuster tube to prevent the threaded ends from
Ensure that the telescopic stabilisers are installed
pulling out under load.
and correctly adjusted. Remove the swinging
drawbar if close-mounted equipment is being 2. Connect remote equipment, where applicable.
attached.
3. After attaching implement and before actual
IMPORTANT: Always select Position Control when operation check that:
attaching equipment, transporting equipment, when
no equipment is attached or at any time when not • No interference occurs with tractor components.
operating in Draft Control. With Mechanical Lower
Link Sensing hydraulics, set the Draft Control lever • The top link does not contact the PTO guard with
fully forward. With Electronic Draft Control, turn the the implement at its lowest position.
Position/Draft sensitivity knob fully anti-clockwise
IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven
Most equipment can be attached to your tractor as equipment, check to make sure that the PTO
follows: driveline will not over-extend so as to become
disengaged, bottom out or be at an excessive angle.
1. Position the tractor so that the lower link hitch Ensure that the driveline shield does not contact the
points are level with and slightly ahead of the PTO guard or drawbar. See ‘Attaching P.T.O.
implement hitch pins. Carefully inch the tractor Driven Equipment’.
rearwards to align the tractor and implement
hitch points. IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or
semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point linkage or
2. Attach the implement to the lower links, as when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or
described in ‘FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS’ on page hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance
3--103 or ‘QUICK HITCH’ on page 3--104. between the implement and the tractor.
Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere
WARNING with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust
Engage the parking brake before leaving the tractor steering stops (four wheel drive only) or stabilisers.
to make the connections. It is essential to have the
engine running to operate the external lift controls
when making lower link connections. If your tractor
does not have these switches or when making other
connections, stop the engine.

3--97
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Implement to Cab/Platform Clearance • Set the lift rods in the front hole in the lower links.
This will reduce the lift height (dependent upon
the lift rod length).
WARNING
Some mounted and semi-mounted equipment may
interfere with and damage the cab or platform. You • Lengthen the lift rods.
may be injured by broken glass or the cab ROPS may
be damaged if equipment interferes with the cab or • Connect the top link to the upper hole in the top
platform. link attachment bracket and use the lowest
possible equipment mast hole.

To prevent tractor damage, proceed as follows: • Make only the minimum adjustments required to
clear the cab. If equipment performance is
• Attach the equipment as outlined previously. unsatisfactory, it may be necessary to modify the
equipment, consult your authorised dealer.
• Check for adequate clearance by slowly raising
the equipment with the lift control lever in Removing Equipment
Position Control. If any part of the equipment
comes closer than 100 mm (4 in.) to the cab, When removing equipment, the procedure is the
adopt one of the following options: reverse of attaching. The following information will
make disconnection easier and safer.
If your tractor has Mechanical Lower Link Sensing
hydraulics, adjust the height limiter cam to prevent • Always park the equipment on a firm, level
excessive lift. If your tractor is equipped with surface.
Electronic Draft Control, adjust the height limit
control knob to limit upward movement. • Support equipment so that it will not tip or fall
when detached from the tractor.
If Draft Control is needed or if insufficient ground
clearance is obtained with adequate cab clearance, • Always relieve all hydraulic pressure in remote
you can adjust the lift linkage, open the cab rear cylinders by selecting the float position before
window, or modify the equipment to clear the cab. disconnecting.
Linkage adjustments, while increasing cab
clearance, may have an adverse effect on the
When attaching mounted equipment to the
implement operating characteristics
three-point linkage, the following adjustments may
be made to ensure satisfactory operation:

3--98
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

LIFT RODS, LOWER LINKS AND TOP LINK

Lower Links and Lift Rod Adjustment

Each lower link (3) has three holes for attachment of

the lift rods. When the tractor leaves the factory, the
lift rods (1) are connected to the rear hole in each
lower link to give maximum lift capacity. If required,
attach the lift rods to the front hole (nearest the
tractor) for maximum lift height. The centre hole
offers a compromise between the optimum lift height
and lift capacity.

152

Both left and right-hand lift rods have a slot at the

lower end which is used to provide a limited amount
of float on the lower link arms. For normal operation
the rectangular plate on the securing pin (1) is
positioned so the lift arm remains fixed in relation to
the lower link arm.

If the securing pin (1) is rotated through 90° as shown

in Figure 154, this will allow an implement limited
vertical movement independent of the tractor which
is a useful feature for the operation of wide
implements. After carrying out the adjustment
ensure the outer retaining plate and spring clip are
replaced and securely locked.
153

Before disconnecting a lift rod from the lower link,

lower attached equipment to the ground, apply the
handbrake and stop the engine. Prior to removing the
securing pin ensure that attached equipment is
correctly supported and that no residual pressure
remains in the hydraulic system.

With electronic draft control (EDC) this will require

moving the hydraulic lift control lever to the fully
lowered position before switching off the engine.

154

3--99
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

To increase or decrease lift rod length, rotate the

upper part of the lift rod by means of the handles on
the turnbuckle (1).

Before the turnbuckle can be rotated, it is necessary

to lift the turnbuckle to disengage the slot (2) from the
lug (3) on the lower section of the lift rod. Rotate the
turnbuckle to lengthen or shorten the lift rod
assembly.

When adjustment is satisfactory, allow the

turnbuckle to lower into position. Ensure that the
turnbuckle is fully down and that the slot engages
with the lug to prevent unintentional rotation. 155

IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or

semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point linkage or
when coupling trailed equipment to the drawbar or
automatic pick-up hitch, ensure that there is
adequate clearance between the implement and the
cab or rear window in any open position.

3--100
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Top Link

The top link has a threaded centre section (3) , which,

when rotated, will shorten or lengthen the top link, as
required. Lift up the spring retainer (1) to allow the
centre section (3) to rotate. To ease adjustment, lift
the handle (2) and use it as a lever. Alternatively,
rotating the link end (4) will permit limited adjustment
of top link length.

To lock the sleeve after adjustment, push the spring

retainer down so that it holds the handle flush against
the sleeve.
156

When not in use, the top link can be removed and

stored or left in an upright position. Hook the ball end
of the handle (2), into the bracket (1) on the rear axle
housing, as shown.

157

3--101
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TOP LINK AND RIGHT-HAND LIFT ROD

(hydraulic adjust)

The hydraulic adjust top link (1) is available in

conjunction with a hydraulic adjust right-hand lift rod
(2). Both the top link and the lift rod incorporate a
double--acting ram cylinder connected into No. IIII
remote control valve.

158

To lengthen the right-hand lift rod and move the lower

link downwards, pull No. IIII remote control valve
lever (2) towards you. Push the lever away from you,
past the neutral position to retract the cylinder and
shorten the right-hand lift rod.

To lengthen the top link, depress and hold in the

button (1) on No. IIII remote control valve lever (2)
and pull the lever towards you. Push the lever away
from you, past the neutral position to retract the
cylinder and shorten the top link assembly.

159

3--102
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TOP LINK BRACKET

Draft loads are sensed by the lower links, therefore

the top link is attached to a bracket rigidly fixed to the
rear axle housing.

Two holes are provided in the bracket for attachment

of the top link. Insert the pin (1) through the upper
hole, as shown, for maximum lift capacity and the
greatest implement to cab clearance. Use the lower
hole (2) for the best ground penetration and greatest
implement to ground clearance (when the implement
is raised).
160

FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS (where fitted)

Pull the levers (1) up to release the link ends. With the
link ends released, connection to the implement will
be easier. The link end (2) is shown in the extended
position. The link end (3) is shown in the closed
(operating) position.

With both link ends extended, connect the link ends

to the equipment and secure with linch pins. Start the
engine and carefully inch the tractor rearwards until
both flexible link ends lock in the operating (closed)
position (3). Stop the engine and engage the parking
brake. 161

Attach the top link.

IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating the

equipment, make sure the flexible link ends are
locked in the operating position. Remove the
drawbar if it interferes with close-mounted
equipment.

162

3--103
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

QUICK HITCH

The quick hitch consists of an alternative pair of lower

links (1) and an adjustable top link (2). The lower links
and the top link have open claw ends that permit
rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements without
leaving the cab. The claws are equipped with
self-locking latches to ensure positive retention of
the tractor linkage to the implement. Cables are
provided for attachment to the latches.

An adjustable spacer spring is available as an

accessory. The spring maintains the lower links at
the width setting required to match that of the 163
implement.

Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the

implement, if required. The ball-bushing with projecting
lips (1) should be installed on the implement upper
hitch pin. The two plain ball-bushings (3) with their
detachable guides (2) should be installed on the
implement lower hitch pins.

164

Coupling Implement to Tractor

Adjust the stabilisers to maintain the tractor lower links

at the correct distance apart so they align with the
ball-bushings installed on the implement lower hitch
pins. Alternatively, use the optional, adjustable spacer,
if available. The spacer consists of a closed spring, with
a rod screwed into one end. To adjust, remove the ‘R’
clip and disconnect the spacer rod from the bracket on
the right-hand lower link. Screw the rod into or out of
the spring to shorten or lengthen the assembly.

3--104
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Place the top link in the transport position. With the

lower links fully lowered, the self-locking latches (1)
in the open position, as shown, reverse the tractor
until the lower link claw couplers are beneath the
implement hitch pins. The combination of large claw
openings and the guides on the implement
ball-bushes make accurate alignment of tractor to
implement unnecessary.

Raise the lower links using the hydraulic lift lever until
the claw couplers engage the ball-bushes. An
audible click will be heard as the self-locking latches
engage the implement ball-bushes. Lower the top
link claw onto the upper implement ball-bush and
165
press down until the latch is heard to engage.
Increase or decrease top link length, as necessary.

The implement supports, where fitted, may now be

removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the 3-point linkage.

Uncoupling Implement from Tractor

Using the hydraulic lift control, fully lower the

implement to the ground ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the tractor. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).

Pull the release cable on the top link to release the

claw from the implement hitch.

Pull the release cable (2), on both lower links. The

lever will lock in position with the latch (1) retracted.
This will allow the links to clear the ball-bushings on
the implement lower hitch pins when the links are 166
lowered fully. Fully lower the lower links and drive the
tractor forward, clear of the implement.

NOTE: Ensure the release cables do not foul wheels,

or moving parts of the hydraulic linkage or
implement. When not in use, secure the cables to the
rubber strap on the rear right-hand side of the cab
frame.

3--105
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TELESCOPIC STABILISERS
(round section type -- where fitted)

WARNING
Never operate steerable equipment unless the
telescopic stabilisers are correctly adjusted to
prevent excessive lateral movement.

Telescopic stabilisers control the sway of the lower

links and attached equipment when in work or when
being transported.

Each stabiliser consists of a round-section tube (3),

anchored by a pin (2) to a bracket (1) bolted to the
outer ends of the rear axle housing. A smaller
diameter inner section (4), attached to a bracket on 167
the lower links, is a loose, sliding fit within the outer
tube. The overall length of the stabiliser is
determined by the position of a pin (5) that passes
through holes in the tube and inner section.

The holes in the inner section and outer tube are

drilled at different centres so a wide range of
stabiliser settings may be achieved by passing the
pin through the most suitable pair of holes.

To adjust, attach the implement to the 3-point linkage

with the locating pin removed from both stabilisers.
When the implement is satisfactorily aligned, the
locating pins should be passed through any one of
the four holes in the outer tubes that align with one
of the holes in the sliding inner section. With the pins
inserted in this manner, both stabilisers will be locked
as rigid units and the implement will be prevented
from swaying both in work or when raised to the
168
transport position.

If the pin is removed from the front hole (1)

Figure 168, the front end of the stabiliser (3) will be
allowed to telescope and a limited degree of sway will
be permitted. The unused pin should be re-inserted
in one of the spare holes (2) of the inner section for
safe storage.

IMPORTANT: Always ensure locking pin is replaced

in front stabiliser hole when no implement is
attached.

IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length,

particularly if using the sway facility, ensure that
there is no possibility of the rear tyres fouling the
stabilisers or lower links.

3--106
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TELESCOPIC STABILISERS
(round section screw type -- where fitted)

WARNING
Never operate steerable equipment unless the
telescopic stabilisers are correctly adjusted to
prevent excessive lateral movement.

Telescopic stabilisers control the sway of the lower

links and attached equipment when in work or when
being transported.

Each stabiliser consists of a tube (5), with a coupling

at each end. The front, sliding end (6) is attached to
a bracket (1) bolted to the outer end of the rear axle
housing. This coupling is a loose, sliding fit within the 169
tube. The overall length of the stabiliser is
determined by the position of a pin (3) that passes
through a hole in the tube. The rear end (4) is
attached to the 3--point linkage and is threaded to
provide fine adjustment.

To adjust, attach the implement to the 3-point linkage

with the locating pin removed from both stabilisers.
To remove the pin, pull back the securing clip. When 3 1
the implement is satisfactorily aligned, the locating
pin should then be passed through the holes and the
securing clip replaced. With the pin removed, the
tube may be rotated to provide fine adjustment and
the pin re-inserted.

With the pins inserted in the front holes, both

stabilisers will be locked as a rigid unit and the
implement will be prevented from swaying both in 2
work or or when raised to the transport position.
170
The front of each stabiliser is attached by a pin (2),
passing through holes in the mounting brackets. The
stabilisers are normally attached to the lower hole in
each bracket, to provide parallel lift.

IMPORTANT: The lower hole is the only hole to

which the stabilisers may be connected when locked
as a rigid unit, as described above, otherwise
damage to the lower links may occur when the
linkage is raised.

3--107
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

It may be desirable to allow equipment such as

ploughs etc., to sway from side to side.
3 1
If the pin is removed from the front hole, the front end
(1) of the stabiliser will be allowed to telescope and
a limited degree of sway will be permitted. The pin
should be re-inserted through the central hole, as
shown at (3) in Figure 170.

When the front of the stabiliser is attached to the

upper hole (2) in the front mounting bracket the
stabilisers will allow the implement to sway in work 2
with reduced sway when the implement is raised.
This feature provides greater implement control 171
when turning on the headlands of a field.

IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length,

particularly if using the sway facility, ensure that
there is no possibility of the rear tyres fouling the
stabilisers or lower links.

3--108
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

AUTOMATIC STABILISERS

Automatic stabilisers may be fitted in place of the

standard telescopic stabilisers, described
previously.

WARNING
Never operate steerable equipment unless the
stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to
prevent excessive lateral movement.

Each stabiliser consists of a telescopic tube

assembly internally threaded at the rear end. The
tube assembly is attached to a mounting bracket
bolted to the outer ends of the rear axle housing.

An externally threaded rod (3) is attached to the

lower links. The threaded rod engages with the
screwed thread in the tube assembly and the overall
length of the assembly is determined by screwing the
rod in or out, as required.
An adjustable chain (4) is attached, at one end, to
the rear fender and at the other end, via a spring,
to a hinged cover (1) on the telescopic part of the
stabiliser. A lug (2) on the telescopic part of the 172
stabiliser engages a notch in the cover.

When the chain is correctly adjusted it will be slack

when the lower links are raised from the operating
position, so allowing the cover to drop down over the
lug on the stabiliser. When the cover is down, as
shown, the stabiliser is locked at the preset length.
The lower links are, therefore, retained at a set
distance apart, preventing them (and attached
equipment) from swaying.
However, when the 3--point hitch is lowered into the
work position, the chain becomes taut and lifts the
cover from the stabiliser allowing it to telescope
freely. The stabilisers (and implement) will then sway
when engaged in the ground. This feature is useful
as it provides greater implement control when turning
on the headlands of a field.

3--109
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Adjusting the Stabilisers

In practice, the implement should be attached to the
three--point linkage with the cover (4) on both
stabilisers raised, so as to allow the stabilisers to
telescope freely.
Lift the locking/adjusting lever (2) up over the peg (1)
so that the lever is at right-angles to the stabiliser. Turn
the telescopic section, by means of the lever, so that
the threaded section (3) screws into or out of the
stabiliser. When the length is satisfactory, i.e., the notch
in the cover aligns with the lug on the stabiliser, lower
the lever back down over the peg and close the cover.
173
The chain should then be adjusted, by placing the
appropriate link over the attaching hook, so that the
cover on the stabiliser is lifted when the implement
is lowered into work.

IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length to

provide sway, ensure that there is no possibility of the
rear tyres fouling the stabilisers or lower links.

3--110
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

DRAWBARS AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS

IMPORTANT: Before attaching trailed equipment to

the tractor, read the following text carefully.

Maximum Permissible Towing Weights

The Product Identification Number plate provides

important information on tractor and towed
equipment weight combinations.

The figures shown are the maximum permissible

vehicle and towing weights and should not be
exceeded, to do so may affect the safe operation of
the tractor.

174

Towing Speeds For towed equipment without brakes

Your tractor may be capable of operating at speeds Do not tow equipment that does not have brakes,
that exceed the maximum allowable transport speed
for most towed equipment. • At speeds over 32 km/h (20 MPH); or
• That, when fully loaded, has a mass (weight)
Before transporting towed equipment, read the over 1.5 metric tonnes (3300 lbs.) and more than
Operator’s Manual for the equipment. Ensure that 1.5 times the mass (weight) of the tractor.
equipment is correctly installed, know how to
transport it safely, and determine the maximum • When trailer brakes are required by law.
permissible transport speed. Ensure that the
combination of tractor and towed equipment is in • That has a mass (weight) that exceeds the
compliance with local and national legislation. values declared on the tractor Product
Identification Number plate (as applicable).
Never transport at speeds that exceed the
equipment’s maximum transport speed. Exceeding For towed equipment with brakes
the equipment’s maximum transport speed may
result in reduced braking performance and/or loss of Do not tow equipment that has brakes,
control of the tractor and its towed equipment.
• At speeds over 40 km/h (25 MPH); or
Unless otherwise specified by the equipment • That when fully loaded has a mass (weight) more
manufacturer or legislation, observe the following than 2.5 times the mass (weight) of the tractor.
when towing.
• That has a mass (weight) that exceeds the
values declared on the tractor Product
Identification Number plate (as applicable).

3--111
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

ATTACHING/DETACHING TRAILED DRAWBAR SAFETY

EQUIPMENT
WARNING
IMPORTANT: Regulations in some areas require Do not pull from the lower links with the links above
brakes on towed equipment when operating on the the horizontal position. Always use the drawbar,
public highway. Before travelling on public roads, pick-up hitch or lower links in the lowered position for
make sure you comply with the legal requirements pull-type work, otherwise the tractor may overturn
for your country. rearwards.

To attach the tractor to trailed equipment and

implements: NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar
ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does not
1. Ensure that the implement is at draw bar height. exceed the maximum static downward load or the
rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower (see
2. Slowly inch rearwards to allow the drawbar and Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of
implement hitch to align. Section 3).

3. Apply the parking brake and stop the engine. IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment on the
highway it is recommended that a safety chain
4. Insert the hitch pin and ensure that the retainer having a tensile strength equal to the gross weight of
is in the latched position. the implement be installed between the tractor and
implement hitch. See Safety Chain on page 3--116.
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or
semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point linkage or
when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or
hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance
between the implement and the tractor.
Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere
with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust
steering stops (four wheel drive only) or linkage
stabilisers.

NOTE: For implements that require hitch extensions

or interfere with the tractor clevis, remove and store
the clevis and hitch pin.

Always use a safety chain installed between the

tractor and implement hitch when transporting
equipment on the highway. See page 3--116.

3--112
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

SWINGING DRAWBARS

Two types of swinging drawbar are available. The

sliding type is illustrated in Figure 175. This drawbar
may be installed as part of a tow hitch or as an
independent unit.

The roller type, shown in Figure 178, is

recommended when heavy draft, trailed equipment
is used for extended periods. This drawbar is
mounted on rollers and offers additional turning ease
when compared with the sliding type.

Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar

The drawbar pivots about a single pin at the front end

so as to allow the rear of the drawbar to swing the full
width of the hanger. By inserting the swing limiter
pins (1) in the appropriate holes, restricted
movement of the drawbar is permitted. Alternatively,
the drawbar can be pinned in any one of three
positions by insertion of the pins in the appropriate
holes. In Figure 175, the drawbar is shown pinned in
the central position to prevent swinging.

Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling

equipment which requires accurate positioning and 175
when transporting equipment.

Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground

engaging equipment which does not require
accurate positioning. This will make steering and
turning easier.

WARNING
Always secure the drawbar to prevent swinging
when transporting equipment or when operating any
but ground engaging equipment.

The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the P.T.O. shaft. To vary the
height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove
the drawbar and invert it.

3--113
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

All Countries Except North America

The front securing pin may be inserted in one of three

holes in the drawbar to vary the P.T.O. shaft to hitch
point distance. See Figure 176 and the following
table:

Hole (see P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 176) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
Drawbar clevis uppermost
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1140 kg (2513 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1330 kg (2932 lb.)
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 2040 kg (4497 lb.)
Drawbar clevis underneath
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1045 kg (2300 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 1305 kg (2875 lb.)

Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min P.T.O. 176

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min P.T.O.
operations.

When towing equipment exerting high static

downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc.,
use the close-coupled position -- hole 3.

North America only

The front securing pin may be inserted in one of four

holes in the drawbar to vary the P.T.O. shaft to hitch
point distance. See Figure 177 and the following
table:

Hole (see P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 177) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1140 kg (2513 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1330 kg (2932 lb.)
3 304 mm (12 in.) 1535 kg (3384 lb.)
4 228 mm (9 in.) 2040 kg (4497 lb.) 177

Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min P.T.O.

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min P.T.O.
operations.

When towing equipment exerting high static

downward forces, such as two--wheeled trailers,
etc., use the close-coupled positions -- holes 3 or 4.

3--114
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Roller Type Swinging Drawbar

The drawbar (2) Figure 178, pivots about a single pin

at the front end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar
to swing the full width of the hanger. By inserting the
swing limiter pin (1) in the appropriate hole and
through the drawbar, the drawbar can be pinned in
any one of seven positions. Alternatively, the
drawbar may be allowed to swing the full width of the
hanger (3).

Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling

equipment which requires accurate positioning and
when transporting equipment. Allow the drawbar to 178
swing when pulling ground engaging equipment
which does not require accurate positioning. This will
make steering and turning easier.

WARNING
Always secure the drawbar to prevent swinging
when transporting equipment or when operating any
but ground engaging equipment.

The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the P.T.O. shaft. To vary the
height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove
the drawbar and invert it.

The front securing pin may be inserted in one of two

holes in the drawbar to vary the P.T.O. shaft to hitch
point distance. See Figure 179 and the
accompanying table.

3--115
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Hole (see P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 179) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
Drawbar clevis uppermost
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1360 kg (2995 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1630 kg (3590 lb.)
Drawbar clevis underneath
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1045 kg (2303 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)

Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min P.T.O.

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min P.T.O.
operations.
179
When towing equipment exerting high static
downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc.,
use hole 2.

SAFETY CHAIN

When towing implements on public roads, use a

safety chain (2) with a tensile strength equal to or
greater than the gross weight of the implement to be
towed. This will control the implement (1) in case the
drawbar (3) and implement become disconnected.

After attaching the safety chain, make a trial run by

driving the tractor to the right and to the left for a short
distance to check the safety chain adjustment. If
necessary, re-adjust to eliminate a tight or loose
chain.

Check the implement operator’s manual for

implement weight and attaching hardware 180
specifications.

Safety chains, attaching hardware and chain guide

are available from your authorised dealer.

3--116
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

REAR TOW HITCH

Description

Various rear tow hitch options are available. All

versions consist of a fabricated steel frame bolted to
the rear axle centre housing. A tow pin is provided,
adjustable for height.

The slider type frame is shown in Figures 182

and 183. Rotating pins in the tow pin assembly
engage in notches in the frame to secure the tow pin
at the required height. With this type of frame, a
second, fixed tow pin (piton) is available as an option. 181
The piton is installed at the bottom of the assembly.

Four types of tow pin assembly are available :--

• Non-swivelling tow pin.

• Heavy duty non-swivelling tow pin.

See Figure 183.

• Swivelling tow pin -- manual operation.

See Figure 187.

• Swivelling tow pin -- auto operation.

See Figure 189.

A swinging drawbar may also be provided as part of

the assembly. See ‘Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar’
on page 3--113 for details of drawbar operation.

NOTE: The tow hitch is designed primarily for use

with four wheel trailers which do not place a heavy
downward load on the tow pin. Observe the
maximum static downward loads quoted in the text.

3--117
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Slider Frame with non-swivelling Tow Pins

(dealer installed accessory)

The tow hitches shown are equipped with a height

adjustable, non-swivelling, tow pin assembly. The
standard tow pin is shown in Figure 182. Figure 183
shows the heavy duty tow pin.

182

Remove the securing clip (1) and lift the handle (5) to
the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the
pins and disengage them from the notches in the
frame. Using both hands on the handle (5) lift or lower
the tow pin assembly (4), as required. When at the
required height, support the tow pin with one hand and
lower the handle to the horizontal position, as shown
in Figures 182 and 183. The pins will rotate and
re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower the P.T.O.
guard (6).

183

To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the

‘R’ clip (3) from the tow pin and lift out using the
handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it passes
through the eye of the trailer drawbar. Replace the ‘R’
clip.

NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must

not exceed the rear tyre load capacity or the following
values, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures and
Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).

Standard tow pin (Fig. 182) 1500 kg (3300 lb.)

Category D2 tow pin (Fig. 183) 2000 kg (4400 lb.)
184

3--118
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

NOTE: A Category D3 tow pin (with housing) is

available as a dealer installed accessory. The static
downward load on the Category D3 tow pin should
not exceed 2500 kg (5500 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).

185

Slider Frame with Swivelling Tow Pins

The tow hitches shown are equipped with a height

adjustable, swivelling tow pin assembly with manual
or auto operation.

With reference to Figure 186, adjust the height of the

tow pin assembly, as follows:

Grasp the handle (2) with the right hand. Press and
hold in the button (1) to release the locking mechanism.
Pull the handle (3) down to the horizontal position with
the left hand and release the push button to lock the
handle (3) in the horizontal position. Lowering the 186
handle will rotate the pins and disengage them from the
frame. Using both handles, lift or lower the complete
tow pin assembly. When at the required height, hold in
the push button and lift the left-hand handle up to the
vertical position, as shown in Figure 186. The pins will
rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower
the P.T.O. guard (4).

WARNING
Before attaching a trailer, ensure that the pins are
fully engaged in the notches, i.e. the handle (3)
Figure 186, is in the vertical position. The tow pin
assembly must not rest on the P.T.O. guard or on the
bolt heads at the end of the slider guides.

To attach a trailer drawbar to the upper tow pin, see

the following text:

187

3--119
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Swivelling Tow Pin -- Manual Engagement

To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the

‘R’ clip (1) Figure 187, from the tow pin and lift out
using the handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it
passes through the eye of the trailer drawbar.
Replace the ‘R’ clip.

The tow pin may be allowed to swivel after loosening

the socket-headed screw (1) Figure 188 on the side
of the tow pin assembly. This feature will permit a
trailer with a non-swivelling drawbar to articulate
relative to the towing tractor.
188
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must
not exceed 2000 kg (4400 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).

Swivelling Tow Pin -- Auto Engagement

The tow pin (2) Figure 189, is spring-loaded in the

engaged (down) position, as shown. To attach a trailer
to the tow pin, lift the release lever (1) to the vertical
position to retract the tow pin up into it’s housing.

The release lever is connected by the cable (4) to a

handle in the cab. This will permit trailer attachment
without leaving the cab. To actuate the cable release
pull up the lever (1), Figure 190.

189
The pin will stay in the raised position until the trailer
drawbar is located beneath it. The eye of the drawbar
will contact the trip lever (3) Figure 189 and cause
the pin to drop down into the engaged position.
Alternatively, the tow pin will drop down into the
engaged position if the lever (1) is pulled down.

WARNING
Do not attempt to trip the lever by hand as the fingers
may be trapped by the action of the spring-loaded
tow pin.

190

3--120
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

The tow pin may be allowed to swivel after loosening

the socket-headed screw (1) Figure 188 on the
underside of the tow pin assembly. This feature will
permit a trailer with a non-swivelling drawbar to
articulate relative to the towing tractor.

IMPORTANT: Do not allow the tractor tow pin to

swivel if the trailed equipment is equipped with a
swivelling tow pin connector.

NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must

not exceed 2000 kg (4400 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).

Fixed Tow Pin (Piton)

An optional fixed tow pin (piton) may be provided at

the bottom of the assembly.

To attach a trailer to the piton, remove the linch pin

(2) and withdraw the retaining pin (4). Lift the security
latch (1) and lower the eye of the trailer drawbar over
the piton (3). Drop the security latch down, re-insert
the retaining pin and secure with the linch pin. The
security latch will ensure that the trailer cannot
become accidentally detached from the piton

NOTE: The static downward load on the piton must 191

not exceed 3000 kg (6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).

192

3--121
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Slider Frame with K 80 Ball

The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height

adjustable, 80 mm ball assembly.

Remove the securing clip (2) and lift the handle (1) to
the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the
pins and disengage them from the notches in the
frame. Using both hands on the handle, lift or lower the
tow ball assembly as required. When at the required
height, support the tow ball with one hand and allow the
handle to lower to the horizontal position. The pins will
rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower
the P.T.O. guard. 193

IMPORTANT: When setting the height of the tow

ball, it should be adjusted to the lowest position
relative to the correct operating height of the
implement drawbar.

To attach a trailer, lift up the retaining catch (2) and

pull out the locking pin (3). This will allow the security
latch (1) to pivot forwards toward the tractor. When
the implement drawbar has been securely attached,
replace the locking pin so it passes through the
security latch and re--insert the ’R’ clip.

NOTE: The static downward load on the tow ball in

its lowest operable position must not exceed 3000 kg
(6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is
lower. (See Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads
at the end of Section 3).

194

3--122
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

AUTOMATIC PICK--UP HITCH AND DRAWBAR

The automatic pick--up hitch and drawbar on your

tractor may be the drop down type, swing back type
or the hydraulic extending type.

All pick--up hitches are raised and lowered using the

3--point lift and are fully self-supporting when locked
in the operating (raised) position.

Depending on type, the pick--up hitch will be

equipped with a reversible hook and clevis drawbar
or interchangeable hook and clevis drawbars.
195

Raising and Lowering the Hitch (All Types)

Rotate the thumb wheel (2) fully forward to position

10. Move the Position Control lever (1) fully
rearwards until the 3-point lift is supporting the weight
of the hitch.

To unlock the hitch pull up and hold the release lever

(1), Figure 195. Lower the hitch to the ground by
means of the position control lever.

196

3--123
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Position the tractor so that the hitch hook (2) is

beneath the eye of the implement drawbar and, using
the position control lever, raise the hitch slowly until
an audible click indicates the locking latches (1) have
engaged the cross tubes (3).

IMPORTANT: Ensure that the height limit control is

at the maximum height position. Failure to observe
this may result in the hitch failing to latch correctly.

Push the position control lever forward so that the

weight of the pick--up hitch (and attached implement)
is supported by the locking latches.
197
CAUTION
Before operating the tractor, visually check to ensure
the locking latches fully support the pick--up hitch by
slightly lowering the 3--point lift.

IMPORTANT: If difficulty is experienced in latching

or unlatching the hitch, refer to page 4--59 for
adjustments to the latching mechanism.

NOTE: The maximum static downward load on the

hitch hook (all types) must not exceed 3000 kg (6610
lb.)

When towing equipment exerting high static

downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc.,
always use the close-coupled drawbar position.
Alternatively, change to the hitch hook mode.

IMPORTANT: When supporting equipment on the 198

drawbar or pick-up hitch ensure that the total weight
on the rear axle does not exceed the maximum static
downward load or the rear tyre load capacity,
whichever is the lower (See Rear Tyre Pressures and
Loads at the end of Section 3).

3--124
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Drop Down Pick--Up Hitch (where fitted)

The hook on the drop down hitch is interchangeable

with the clevis drawbar.

To change from the hook to drawbar, lower the

pick--up hitch, extract the two securing pins (2)
Figure 199 and withdraw the hook assembly.

Install the clevis drawbar assembly and secure with

the two pins.

IMPORTANT: Never raise or lower the pick--up hitch

when in the drawbar mode with a trailer attached. 199

There are three holes in the drawbar support. When

using holes (1), (2), and (3) in conjunction with the
holes in the clevis drawbar, a choice of
implement/drawbar hitch points, relative to the end
of the P.T.O. shaft may be achieved. See Figure 200
and the table below for hitch point position and
maximum permitted static downward load on the
drawbar:

The two additional holes (4), are provided in the

hanger for the rear securing pin so the drawbar may
be offset to the left or right of the centre line.

The drawbar, Figure 201, may be inverted to vary the 200

height of the drawbar/implement hitch point.

Hole (see P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 200 ) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
Drawbar clevis uppermost
1 356 mm (14 in.) 1650 kg (3630 lb.)
2 406 mm (16 in.) 1500 kg (3300 lb.)
Drawbar clevis underneath
1 356 mm (14 in.) 1650 kg (3630 lb.)
2 406 mm (16 in.) 1500 kg (3300 lb.)

201

3--125
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Storing the Drawbar

When not in use, the hook or clevis drawbar may be

stored in a bracket which is located at the rear of the
tractor or on the right--hand step support. Ensure the
clamp screw is fully tightened to retain the drawbar
in the bracket.

Extendible Pick--Up Hitch (where fitted)

The extendible pick--up hitch can be hydraulically

extended to aid visibility when attaching towed
equipment.

Operated through one of the rear remote valves, the

hitch is extended or retracted using the remote valve
lever. The hoses should be connected in such a way
that moving the remote valve lever to E (Extend) will
extend the hitch, moving the lever to R (Retract) will
retract the hitch.

NOTE: The illustration shows hitch operation

through remote valve number I, however, it may be
operated using an alternative valve where required.

Lower the hitch until it is clear of the locking latches

and then extend the hook or clevis rearwards by
moving the remote valve lever to (E). With the 202
drawbar extended continue to lower the hitch until it
is just above the ground.

Position the tractor so that the hitch hook (2) is

beneath the eye of the implement drawbar and, using
the position control lever, raise the hitch until the
implement drawbar is just clear of the ground.

Fully retract the pick--up hitch by moving the remote

valve lever to (R). To assist in retracting the hitch
release the tractor brakes to allow movement of the
tractor towards the implement. Re--apply the
handbrake before leaving the tractor seat.

With the hitch in the fully retracted position raise it

slowly until an audible click indicates the locking
latches (1) have engaged the cross tubes (3). 203

3--126
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

NOTE: The maximum static downward load on the

hitch hook must not exceed 3000 kg (6610 lb.)

IMPORTANT: The hitch must be fully retracted

before it will lock correctly. Always ensure the hitch
is locked before operating the tractor.

To change from the hook to drawbar, lower the

pick--up hitch, extract the securing pin (1) and
withdraw the hook assembly.

NOTE: Do not remove the pin in the forward hole as

this retains the hydraulic cylinder in the slider frame.

Install the clevis drawbar assembly and secure with

the pin.

Maximum Permissible Clevis Load

P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load 204
400 mm (15.7 in.) 1500 kg (3300 lb.)

IMPORTANT: When supporting equipment on the

drawbar or pick-up hitch ensure that the total weight
on the rear axle does not exceed the maximum static
downward load or the rear tyre load capacity,
whichever is the lower (See Rear Tyre Pressures and
Loads at the end of Section 3).

Storing the Drawbar

When not in use, the hook or clevis drawbar may be

stored in a bracket which is located at the rear of the
tractor or on the right--hand step support. Ensure the
clamp screw is fully tightened to retain the drawbar
in the bracket.

If the hydraulic hitch pressure lines are disconnected

from the remote valve, ensure the male couplings
are protected from contamination and the pressure
lines secured to the tractor to avoid possible
damage.

3--127
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEMS

(where fitted)

Hydraulic Trailer Brakes

(except Italy)

Hydraulic trailer brakes may be connected into the

hydraulic system via a quick--release coupling (1) at
the rear of the tractor.

NOTE: The position of the trailer brake coupling may

vary slightly from that shown, dependent upon the
type of remote control valves installed.
205
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling
the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when
the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor.

IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are

locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer
brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and
four wheel braking (four wheel drive tractors only).

WARNING
With the tractor engine off, hydraulic pressure cannot
be applied to the trailer braking system. When
parking the tractor/trailer combination apply the
tractor and trailer parking brakes while the engine is
still running. With the footbrakes locked together
apply the parking brake, stop the engine and
immediately block the wheels. Always lock the brake
pedals together when a hydraulically braked trailer is
attached to the tractor.

NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap in place when the

trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may
only be connected to the tractor coupling by means
of a compatible female coupling.

3--128
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Hydraulic Trailer Brakes

(Italy only)

The hydraulic trailer braking system on tractors for

the Italian market function in a slightly different way
to the universal system previously described.

If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling

the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when
the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor or when
the tractor handbrake is applied when the engine is
running. When the engine is switched off, the trailer
brakes will remain applied.
206
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are
locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer
brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and
four wheel braking (four wheel drive tractors only).

To release hydraulic pressure and free the trailer

brakes, start the engine, depress both brake pedals
and release the tractor handbrake.

NOTE: The light (1), on the instrument panel will

flash, accompanied by critical alarm, to indicate that
hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit is low.
Stop the engine and investigate the cause.

ATTENTION: Should the trailer brake warning light

commence to flash, the trailer brakes will apply
automatically.

NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap in place when the

trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may
only be connected to the tractor coupling by means
of a compatible female coupling.
207

3--129
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Air--Operated Trailer Brakes

(except Italy)

WARNING The couplers installed at the back of the tractor may

Single line trailer braking systems are designed for be connected to single or dual line trailer braking
use up to a maximum speed of 25 km/h (15 MPH). systems. Either or both types may be installed. The
Tractor/trailer combinations with dual line braking air lines connected to the couplers are colour-coded
systems may be used at a higher speed but must at black, red and yellow. The black line is used for a
all times comply with local legal requirements. Gross single line system, the red and yellow lines are used
train weight, i.e., tractor plus trailer(s) and/or for dual line systems.
individual trailer weight must not exceed that laid
down in local regulations governing the use of NOTE: Single line systems (black coupler) are only
trailers. available as a dealer installed accessory.

IMPORTANT: The trailer brakes will only operate

The following text covers operation of the air- when both tractor brake pedals are applied.
operated trailer braking systems that may be Therefore, always lock the brake pedals together
installed as an alternative to hydraulically-actuated when a trailer is attached to the tractor.
trailer brakes.
NOTE: The tractor handbrake is connected to the
The system consists of an engine-driven air main control valve. Whenever the handbrake is
compressor, one or two air reservoirs, dependent applied, the trailer brakes are activated.
upon type of system installed, a pressure gauge,
control valves, two or three couplers and related
pipework.

A filter/dryer unit in the braking system extracts

moisture from the pressurised air helping to avoid
componenets in the implement braking system from
freezing in low temperatures. Any moisture collected
is automatically exhausted through the system
unload valve.

IMPORTANT: In extremely humid conditions, or

where the filter/drier unit has not been serviced
correctly, the air brake reservoirs should be manually
drained on a daily basis. To drain the reservoirs,
grasp the ring on the drain valve below the tank and
move laterally. This will allow any accumulated water
to be exhausted from the reservoir.

3--130
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Operation

When starting the engine with a trailer connected into

the tractor air brake system, chock the wheels and
release the parking brake and footbrakes. The
warning light (1) Figure 208, will illuminate until air
pressure builds up to 4.5 -- 5.5 bar.

The pressure will continue to rise, as indicated by the

air pressure bargraph in the Dot Matrix Display,
Figure 209. To select the air pressure bargraph, use
the CAL/SEL switch or, where fitted, the enhanced
keypad.
208

The air tank(s) should reach operating pressure

within 3 minutes of start--up but may take longer,
dependent upon the size of the trailer brake
reservoir(s).

Once required pressure has been reached a loud

‘pop’ will be heard, signifying that the unload valve
has opened to allow excess pressure to escape to
atmosphere.

IMPORTANT: Apply the footbrakes several times,

ensuring that the pressure, as indicated by the
gauge, drops as the brakes are applied and rises
again when they are released. Never drive the tractor 209
with the trailer brake warning light on.

IMPORTANT: When the footbrakes are applied ,with

the handbrake off, ensure that the front wheel drive
indicator light (1) Figure 210 illuminates and that all
stop lights are functional.

IMPORTANT: Various types of trailer braking

systems are available. Check the trailer
manufacturers’ instruction manual before making
connections to the tractor air brake system.

Clean the trailer and tractor connectors before

coupling up the hose(s). Ensure that connections are
secure. Check the trailer brakes regularly to ensure
that they are functioning correctly. 210

CAUTION
Do not over use the brakes on steep down hill
gradients. Use the same gear going down hill as you
would use for going up the same hill.

3--131
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Dual Line System

For a trailer with a dual line braking system, connect

the supply line hose to the red coupler (1) and the
control line hose to the yellow coupler (2).

IMPORTANT: The dual line system will only operate

if both the red and yellow lines are connected.

Red line (brake supply line) -- (1): Air is supplied to

the red coupler at full system pressure. This is the
brake supply line and charges the reservoir(s) on the
trailer. If the trailer braking system is disconnected
from the tractor for any reason, the air pressure will 211
fall to zero and the trailer brakes will be applied.

Yellow line (control line) -- (2): As the tractor

brakes are applied, increasing air pressure is
supplied, via the yellow coupler, to the control valve
on the trailer until full system pressure is generated.
Application of the trailer brakes is proportional to the
pressure applied to the tractor brake pedals.

Single Line System

If the trailer has a single line system an additional

coupler is supplied. Connect the hose to the black
coupler (1) Figure 212.

A pressure of 5.5 bar is available at the coupler at all

times when the tractor brake pedals and parking
brake are released. Application of the tractor brakes
causes the pressure to drop to zero allowing the
trailer brakes to be applied.

212

3--132
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Air--Operated Trailer Brakes

(Italy only)

This system operates in a similar manner to the dual

line system, previously described, except that a
combined dual coupler is utilised. Please read all the
previous text relating to pneumatic trailer brakes plus
the following:

The coupler is protected by a metal cover (1). To

remove the cover, press the handle (2) down. The
handle is held in position by a stiff spring and some
pressure is required to move it down to release the
cover. 213

Connections

The lines to the couplers are colour-coded for ease

of use. The supply line to the left-hand coupler (1) is
red and the control line to the right-hand coupler (2)
is yellow. The trailer hoses will have a male dual
coupler. Press down the handle (3) and insert the
trailer coupler. When the handle is released, it will
lock the trailer and tractor couplers together.

214

3--133
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Tractor/Trailer Brake Bias Control

When the tractor leaves the factory, this control is set

to allow maximum available braking effort to the
trailer. Under most conditions, the control will remain
in this position and will give well balanced braking.

Occasionally, with some trailers this setting may

provide a greater braking bias to the trailer than is
ideal. In this case the braking force to the trailer may
be reduced slightly by turning the adjuster (1) in an
anti--clockwise direction.

To turn the valve, it is first necessary to pull the knob 215

out. After adjustment, push the knob in to lock the
setting. The adjuster must be reset to the fully
clockwise position when a different trailer is used.

WARNING
The brake balance adjustment is extremely sensitive
and should not be rotated more than one half turn
before testing with the attached trailer fully loaded. If
further adjustments are required, they should be
carried out following the same procedure. Failure to
do this may result in an imbalance between tractor
and trailer braking forces if the valve is rotated too far
in the anti--clockwise direction.

AUXILIARY AIR SUPPLY CONNECTOR

(where fitted)

An auxiliary air supply is available for the purpose of

inflating tyres, etc. The air supply operates at full
system pressure -- 7 or 8 bar (100 or 115 lbf. in2) --
dependent upon system installed. When not in use,
ensure protective dust cap is fitted.

Always use a proprietary inflating gun, with gauge,

when inflating tyres. Connect the air hose to the air
outlet (1), located on the right-hand side of the
engine, to the rear of the fuel filters.
216

3--134
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

FRONT WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

With Variable Track Wheels

A
The sectioned drawings illustrate the wheel rim and
disc positions relative to the hub at various track
settings. The track widths available are as follows:

Track settings with 24” and 28” front wheels

Position B
Track Width
(Figure 217)
A 1566 mm (61.6 in.)
B 1662 mm (65.4 in.)
C 1766 mm (69.5 in.)
D 1862 mm (73.3 in.)
E 1966 mm (77.4 in.) C
F 2062 mm (81.1 in.)
G 2166 mm (85.2 in.)
H 2262 mm (89.0 in.)

The track widths in the above table are based on a D

tractor fitted with a Standard 4WD front axle.
With front axle Suspension, add 18mm (0.7 in.).
With SuperSteer front axle, add 18mm (0.7 in.).
NOTE: The track widths in the table above are
nominal and may vary by up to 25 mm (1 in.) E
dependent upon tyre size.

IMPORTANT: With optional Dynamic fenders fitted,

narrower track settings may not be attainable due to
insufficient clearance between the tyre or rim and
any part of the fender or attaching hardware.
F
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with front
fenders, ensure there is adequate clearance
between fender and wheel under all operating
conditions. With the smaller track settings a foul
condition may occur between the tyre or fender and
the tractor when the wheels are turned to the full lock
position particularly when the axle is fully articulated. G
To avoid this condition, adjust the fenders and/or
steering stops.

217

3--135
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

4WD with Non Adjustable Front Wheels

Tractors equipped with non adjustable front wheels

offer a choice of two track settings. To alter the track
width, interchange both front wheels to provide a A
narrow (A) or wide (B) track setting as required.

NOTE: Tractors with a 50 K/mh (31 MPH)

transmission will be fitted with non adjustable front
wheels).

NOTE: When interchanging left and right--hand

wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the tread at the B
top of the tyre remains pointing in the direction of
forward travel.

218
Track settings with 24” and 28” Wheels

4WD Front axle type Position Track Settings

Standard -- min. setting A 1854 mm (73.0 in.)
Standard -- max. setting B 2080 mm (81.9 in)
Suspended -- min. setting A 1821 mm (71.7 in.)
Suspended -- max. setting B 1978 mm (77.9 in.)
Supersteer -- min. setting A 1821 mm (71.7 in.)
Supersteer -- max. setting B 1978 mm (77.9 in.)

NOTE: The track widths in the table above are

nominal and may vary by up to 28 mm (1.1 in.)
dependent upon wheel rim offset.

4WD Front Axle Width -- Flange to Flange

Width: 1890 mm (74.4 in.)

3--136
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

REFITTING THE FRONT WHEELS

When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts

to the following torques then re-check after 50 hours
of operation and, thereafter as required.
Disc to hub nuts 211 Nm (155 lbf.ft.)
Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
(where applicable)

WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
at the recommended intervals. Owners should
ensure that all steering components are maintained
in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure safe
operation and comply with legal requirements.

FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT

1
After resetting the track width, the front wheel
alignment may require adjustment. For correct
operation, the front wheels should be parallel.
Measure the distance between the wheel rims at hub
height at the front of the wheels. Rotate both front
wheels 180° and check the measurements again,
this time at the rear of the wheels. This will eliminate
wheel rim run-out errors. The correct setting is 0 +/ --
3 mm (0 -- 0.12 in.)
3 2
Should it be necessary to adjust the front wheel TA43
alignment, proceed as follows:
219
Remove and discard the self-locking nut (2), on the
left-hand end of the track control rod (1) and extract
the track rod end. Loosen the lock nut (3) and screw
the track rod end into or out of the track rod to shorten
or lengthen the assembly, as required. Re-insert the
track rod end and, when the setting is correct, secure
with a new self-locking nut. Tighten the self-locking
nut to 100 Nm (74 lbf. ft.) and the lock nut to 180 Nm
(133 lbf. ft.).

3--137
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

STEERING STOPS
Two steering stops are incorporated in the axle, one 1
at each end. The stops are adjustable and should be
set to provide a minimum clearance of 20 mm (0.75
in.) between the tyres and any part of the tractor on
full left and right lock with the axle fully articulated.
To adjust, slacken the locknut and turn the stop bolt
anti-clockwise to reduce the steering angle of the
wheels or clockwise to increase the steering angle.
Tighten the locknut to 150 Nm (110 lbf. ft.).
2
TA41
220

FRONT AXLE OSCILLATION STOPS

(where fitted)
Where fitted, the axle oscillation stops are installed
one each side of the axle. Each stop consists of a
plate (1), secured to the underside of the front axle
support by two flush fitting, socket head screws.
Oscillation of the axle causes the stop plate to
contact the projection (2) on the axle casing, so
preventing further movement. With the stop plates in
position, as shown, axle oscillation is 8°.
Extract the screws and remove the stop plates to
increase axle oscillation to 12°.
221
NOTE: If the oscillation stops are removed, ensure
that there is adequate clearance between the front
tyres and any part of the tractor with the axle fully
articulated.

3--138
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

DYNAMIC FRONT FENDERS

(where fitted)

Two types of optional front fender are available, both

offering a full range of adjustment to suit varying tyre
sizes and track widths. The method of adjustment is
very similar for both, but the following text describes
the setting of the Dynamic steerable fender. Ensure
all fixing bolts are re--tightened after adjustment.

Dynamic fenders turn with the front wheels as the

tractor is steered. As the steering angle increases, a
spring centered pivot in the fender mount restricts
the turn angle of the fenders. This prevents
interference with the tractor hood or loader frame
while allowing the wheels to continue turning
beneath the fender. As a result, tighter turns can be
achieved that would not be possible with a
conventional fender, particularly at narrower track
settings.

FENDER ADJUSTMENT

A fender may be moved laterally, towards or away

from the tractor, vertically up or down, and may be
tilted forwards or rearwards.

Lateral Adjustment, Fender Support

To move the complete fender assembly laterally,

loosen the two clamp bolts securing the fender
support, (1) to the mounting bracket, (3). Move the
support to the desired position and re--tighten the
bolts.

Vertical Adjustment

The fender may be moved vertically by relocating the

bolts, (2) in the appropriate holes in the fender
support. A number of the holes are elongated
allowing the fender to be tilted forward or rearward.

Fender Turn Stop

An adjustable stop bolt, (4) is fitted to both fender

mounting brackets. When turning, the bolt contacts
a fixed stop on the axle housing restricting the angle
at which the fender will turn while allowing the wheels
to continue turning beneath the fender. The stop 222
bolts may require adjusting if the track width or tire
size is changed.

3--139
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Lateral Adjustment, Fender

The fender support bolt, (1) and bracket attachment
points, (2) beneath the fender, provide further lateral
adjustment allowing the fender to be centered over
the tire.

NOTE: A second fender support bolt (not shown) is

located on the opposite end of the support bracket.

223
Narrow Track Settings
With certain options and/or tyre sizes, the smaller
track settings may not be attainable due to minimal
clearance between tyre or rim and any part of the
fender or attaching hardware.

3--140
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

REAR WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

1

CAUTION
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting
regulations when operating or travelling on the public
highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond
the initial factory position then you may be required
to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to
comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before
travelling on the highway, ensure that the overall
tractor width does not exceed the maximum
permitted in your country.

224
Rear wheel track adjustment is effected by changing
the wheel rim relative to the centre disc, the rim 2
and/or the disc relative to the axle hub or by
inter--changing the rear wheels.

CAUTION
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and
ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and
cause injury.

NOTE: There are three different designs of centre

disc dependent upon tyre size and tractor model.
The centre discs shown are as follows: 225
3
Square centre disc -- variable track (Type 1)

Round centre disc -- variable track (Type 2)

Round centre disc -- fixed track (Type 3)

The type of centre disc installed will affect the track

setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your
tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and
Figure 227 to see the wheel rim and disc positions
necessary to achieve the required track setting.

WARNING 226
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
at the recommended intervals.

3--141
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

The sectioned drawings shown, illustrate the wheel

rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various
track settings.

IMPORTANT: When interchanging left and A

right--hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the
tread at the top of the tyre remains pointing in the
direction of forward travel.
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts
to the following torques then re-check after 50 hours
of operation and thereafter as required. B
Rear disc to hub nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Rear disc to rim nuts
M16 nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)

Track Settings
C
Adjustable Rim (Types 1 and 2)

Track All Models

setting 34” and 38” Wheels
Figure 227 Figures 224, 225
A 1412 mm (55.5 in.) D
B 1510 mm (59.4 in.)
C 1614 mm (63.5 in.)
D 1710 mm (67.3 in.)
E 1812 mm (71.3 in.)
F 1910 mm (75.1 in.)
E
G 2014 mm (79.2 in.)
H 2110 mm (83.0 in.)

NOTE: With the larger tyre sizes, the narrower track

settings may not be attainable due to minimal
clearance between tyres and fenders or equipment.
The dimensions shown in the above chart relating F
to Figure 227 are nominal and should be used as
a guide only. Track settings may vary dependent
upon wheel type and tyre size.

227

3--142
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Fixed Rim (Type 3)

A track adjustment of approximately 50 mm (2.0in.)

each side, may be achieved by interchanging wheel
assemblies. A

Track Disc type 3

setting (18.4 x 38 tyre)
Figure 228 Figure 226
A 1730 mm (68.1 in.)
B 1834 mm (72.2 in.)

NOTE: Depending on rim type, the above settings B

may vary by approximately 10.0mm (0.4 in.).

228

3--143
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

BAR AXLE (where fitted)

CAUTION
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting
regulations when operating or travelling on the public
highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond
the initial factory position then you may be required
to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to
comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before
travelling on the highway, ensure that the overall
tractor width does not exceed the maximum
permitted in your country.

INTRODUCTION

Tractors equipped with a bar axle may have fixed or

manual adjust wheels. The wheels are attached to a
cast iron hub (3) which is clamped to the bar axle (1).

After unclamping the hub, the wheel may be moved

along the bar to provide a range of track widths. A
range of 190 mm (7.5 in.) of movement per wheel, or
380 mm (15 in.) overall, is available with the 98 inch
axle.

Track width adjustment is effected by moving the

complete wheel/hub assemblies in or out on the axle 229
shaft. Reduce the track width by moving the wheel
towards the tractor, increase the width by moving the
wheel outwards.

Additionally, repositioning the wheel rim on the

centre disc or reversing the centre disc on the axle
hub will provide a wider range of adjustment.

Tractor wheels are very heavy so it is recommended

that you do not remove them to reposition the rims
on the disc unless the track setting required is
outside the slide range of the bar axle.

3--144
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

MOVING A WHEEL ON THE AXLE SHAFT

Block the front wheels and jack up and support the
rear axle.
Adjustment of the track setting is achieved by sliding
the complete wheel/hub assembly on the axle shaft.
Loosen the two centre wedge bolts (1)Figure 230,
approximately 0.5 in. (12 mm). Remove the four
outer wedge bolts (2).

Clean the bolts and threaded holes in the wedges

before lubricating and installing the outer wedge
bolts at (1) Figure 231. These bolts are used as jack
bolts to push against the wedges. Tighten the jack
bolts evenly until the wedges loosen on the axle
shaft. The wheel assembly will now be free to slide
in or out on the axle shaft.

IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 300

ft.lbs. (407 N⋅m) on the jack bolts. The use of
penetrating oil between the wedge and axle shaft will
be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced, place a shaft
protector over the end of the axle shaft and strike with
a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
230
WARNING
Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety
glasses, against the possibility of flying metal
particles.

Set the wheel to the desired position on the shaft.

Remove the jack bolts and replace them in the outer
holes (2) Figure 231.

Tighten all six wedge retaining bolts in increments

of 50 ft.-lbs. (68 Nm) until a final torque of 221 ft.-lbs.
(300 Nm) is achieved.

IMPORTANT: The wedge bolts must be tightened 231

evenly.
Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making
sure that both rear wheels are the same distance
from the ends of the axle shafts.

NOTE: Check the torque of all six wedge retaining

bolts on each wheel after driving the tractor for 200
yards (200 m), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation
and thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.

WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
at the recommended intervals.

3--145
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

The sectioned drawings shown in Figures 232 and 233 illustrate the wheel rim and disc positions at various track
settings. In each table, two track width settings are quoted for each axle type. These are the minimum and
maximum achievable with both wheel assemblies moved fully in (toward the tractor) and fully out (away from
the tractor).

Track Adjustment Rim and Disc Position

1524 -- 1830 mm (60 -- 72 in.)

1727 -- 2030 mm (68 -- 80 in.)

1930 -- 2235 mm (76 -- 88 in.)

2133 -- 2438 mm (84 -- 96 in.)

232
Wheels with steel centre disc bolted to flange on the rim

NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be NOTE: The track widths shown in Figure 232 are
possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings nominal and may vary from that shown dependent on
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender. wheel and tyre size.

3--146
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Track Adjustment Rim and Disc Position

1524 -- 2133 mm (72 -- 84 in.)

1625 -- 2235 mm (64 -- 88 in.)

233
Wheels with steel centre disc welded to flange on the rim

NOTE: The track widths in Figure 233 are nominal When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts
and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel to the following torques then re-check after 50 hours
and tyre size. of operation and thereafter as required.

NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be IMPORTANT: When interchanging left and
possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings right--hand wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender. tread at the top of the tyre remains pointing in the
direction of forward travel.
CAUTION
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and Disc to hub nuts
ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and 8 Stud, steel disc wheels 260 Nm (190 lbf. ft.)
cause injury.
Disc to rim nuts
Steel disc wheels
WARNING M16 nuts 240 Nm (177 lbf. ft.)
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
at the recommended intervals.

3--147
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

BALLASTING AND TYRES Selecting Ballast

GENERAL When tractor horsepower loads vary, the optimum

weight of the tractor will change. This means that
Maximum tractor performance is dependent upon ballast may have to be added or removed to maintain
proper ballasting and tyre selection. Maximum the best tractor performance. Proper ballast will
efficiency will be achieved when tractor weight is greatly improve tractor operation and ride.
correct for the application.
The amount of ballast required is affected by:
The tyres selected for your tractor must be able to
support the weight of the tractor and equipment and • Weight of tractor
must also be able to provide adequate traction to
utilize the tractor horsepower and turn it into useful • Soil and traction conditions
drawbar horsepower.
• Type of implement: fully-mounted, semi-
mounted or trailed
Always maintain the correct air pressure in the tyre
to carry the load. Do not over inflate tyres. • Working speed

NOTE: Radial tyres will work with lower air pressures • Tractor horsepower load
and will show up to 20% sidewall deflection or bulge
when correctly inflated. • Type and size of tyres

Factors Affecting Tyre Performance • Tyre pressures

• Correct air pressure for the load Do not use more ballast than needed. Excess ballast
should be removed when it is not required.
• Correct sidewall deflection
IMPORTANT: Only sufficient weight should be
• Correct wheel slip added to provide traction and stability. Adding more
weight than necessary results in unnecessary loads
being imposed on the tractor and a higher fuel
• Correct tyre size for expected load consumption. When adding weight, adhere to the
maximum tyre capacity loading stated in the tables
• Correct fill of liquid ballast commencing on page 3--156. If further information or
assistance is required on tractor weighting consult
• Maintaining equal tyre pressure in both tyres on your authorised dealer.
a given axle

3--148
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Too little ballast: For optimum performance and efficiency, two wheel
drive tractors should be ballasted so that
• Rough ride approximately one third of the total tractor weight
(less implement) is on the front wheels. Four wheel
drive tractors should be ballasted so the weight on
• Excessive wheel slip
the front wheels is approximately 40 -- 45% of the
total tractor weight.
• Power loss
Add additional front end ballast, as required, for
• Tyre wear stability during operation and transport. Ballasting of
the front end may not always provide adequate
• Excessive fuel consumption stability if the tractor is operated at high speed on
rough terrain. Reduce tractor speed and exercise
• Lower productivity caution under these conditions.

Too much ballast: When using front mounted implements it may be

necessary to add weight to the rear wheels to
• Higher maintenance costs maintain traction and stability.

• Increased driveline wear BALLASTING WITH FRONT AXLE

SUSPENSION
• Power loss
IMPORTANT: On tractors fitted with front axle
suspension, correct ballasting is essential to
• Increased soil compaction optimise suspension operation, particularly when
using heavy rear mounted equipment. For this
• Excessive fuel consumption application, sufficient front ballast must be added by
the use of wafer weights in preference to liquid
• Lower productivity ballast in the tyres
In certain conditions, with insufficient front weight
For maximum performance in heavy draft conditions added, suspension operation may become disabled
weight should be added to the tractor in the form of and error code 10007 displayed. Stop the tractor,
liquid ballast, cast iron weights or a combination of switch off the engine and restart again to clear the
both. error code and re--enable the suspension. If the error
code re--occurs, then further front weight should be
added ensuring maximum axle and vehicle weights
Front end ballast may be required for stability and
are not exceeded.
steering control when weight is transferred from the
front to the rear wheels as rear mounted implement
is raised by the tractor 3-point linkage. Ballast Limitations

When a rear mounted implement is raised to the Ballast should be limited by the tyre capacity or
transport position, the weight on the front wheels tractor capacity. Each tyre has a recommended
should be at least 20% of total tractor weight. carrying capacity which should not be exceeded,
(see pages 3--156 and 3--157 ).
CAUTION
If a greater amount of weight is needed for traction,
Additional front ballast may be needed when
larger tyres should be used.
transporting large 3-point mounted equipment.
Always drive slowly over rough terrain, no matter
how much front ballast is used. Ballast can be added by bolting on cast iron weights
or by adding liquid calcium chloride in the tyres.
Bolt-on cast iron weights are recommended because
they can easily be removed when not needed.

3--149
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TRACTOR WEIGHT INFORMATION

IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor gross

vehicle weights shown. This can cause an overload
condition that may invalidate the warranty and may
exceed the load rating of the tyres. The maximum
recommended gross vehicle weight is the weight of
the tractor plus ballast plus any mounted equipment
such as sprayers, tanks etc. in the raised position.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

Maximum Axle Load G.V.W.
All Models Total
Front (kg)# Rear (kg)
(kg)
All Models 3600 7300 9000

IMPORTANT: # Includes front mounted equipment

or loader in the raised position but with no load in the
bucket.

RESTRICTED OPERATION

IMPORTANT: For intermittent operation, the front

axle loading (including loaded loader bucket) may be
increased provided that the ground speed does not
exceed 8 km/h (5 MPH) and the front track width
settings are maintained within the limits shown:

Maximum Front Axle Loading

(Restricted Operation)
All Track Setting
Models
kg lb mm in
6200 13668 1727 -- 2032 68 -- 80

NOTE: Total axle weight is measured with only the

front or rear wheels on the scales inclusive of liquid
and cast iron ballast and with mounted equipment in
the raised position.

IMPORTANT: Braking regulations in some countries

may impose lower gross vehicle weight limits for road
transport than the figures quoted in the above tables.

3--150
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

CAST IRON WEIGHTS

(where fitted)

Rear wheel weights

Up to three cast iron weights (1), may be added to

each rear wheel.

With flanged axle: 6 x 45 kg (6 x 99 lb.) permitting a

maximum weight of 270 kg (594 lb.) to be carried.
With bar axle: 6 x 65 kg (6 x 143 lb.) permitting a
maximum weight of 390 kg (860 lb.) to be carried.
234
IMPORTANT: It is not recommended to fit rear
wheel weights on tractors operating at speeds in
excess of 40 k/mh (25 MPH).

Front end wafer weights

Front end wafer weights are available in sets as

described in the following text.

45 kg (99 lb.) wafer weights are available in sets of

6, 10 and 18 which, together with the support
carrier and tow hook, weigh:

6 weights, including carrier 360 kg. (793 lb.)

and tow hook.
10 weights, including carrier 540 kg. (1190 lb.)
and tow hook.
235
18 weights, including carrier 900 kg. (1984 lb.)
and tow hook.

3--151
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

The weights are clamped together by means of the

long through bolts (1) and (3) and secured to the
carrier by the clamp bolts (2).

The weights may be removed as a complete set with

the aid of suitable lifting gear. Loosen the clamp bolts
(2) and slide the clamp assembly sideways out of the
weight pack. With a lifting bar passed through the
central hole, the complete weight set may now be
lifted off the carrier.

Alternatively, the weights can be removed

individually after loosening the clamp bolts and
removing all four through bolts (1) and (3). 236

WARNING
The tractor must not be operated unless all four
through bolts and the clamp bolts are in position with
the bolts tightened to 169 Nm (125 lbf.ft.). Recheck
the bolt torques after 50 hours of operation.

A towing facility is built into the weight carrier.

However, if the weights are installed a tow pin (1), is
available that clamps onto the front of the weight
pack.

237

If the front weights and weight carrier are not

installed, a tow pin is available for bolting directly to
the front axle support.

238

3--152
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

LIQUID BALLAST

IMPORTANT: It is not recommended to use liquid The figures in the table will give a 75% fill of the tyre.
ballast on tractors operating at speeds in excess of This calcium chloride/water solution will give
40 Km/h (25 MPH) as ride quality may be adversely protection from freezing down to an ambient
affected. temperature of --50°C (--58°F).

Filling the front and rear tyres with liquid ballast is a WARNING
convenient method of adding weight. A solution of When mixing the ballast solution it is imperative the
calcium chloride and water is recommended. This calcium chloride flakes are added to the water and
gives a low freezing point and provides a higher the solution stirred until the calcium chloride is
dissolved.
density than plain water.
Never add water to calcium chloride as considerable
IMPORTANT: In some countries it is illegal to use heat is generated. If the flakes should contact the
calcium chloride as a ballast solution for tyres. eyes, wash the eyes immediately with clean, cold
water for at least 5 minutes. Consult a doctor as soon
Ensure that you comply with the legal requirements
as possible.
of your country. Use cast iron weights as an
alternative to liquid ballast.
The following tables show the quantity of calcium
chloride and water required for each tyre size option
and is based on 0.6 kg of calcium chloride per litre of
water.

Front Tyre Ballast

Tyre Size Water Calcium Total Weight Water Calcium Total Weight
Chloride of solution Chloride of solution
per tyre US per tyre
Litres kg. kg. gallons lb. lb.
11.2 -- 24 77 46 123 21 102 273
12.4R -- 24 94 56 150 25 124 331
13.6R -- 24 123 73 196 33 162 433
14.9R -- 24 151 90 241 40 176 471
13.6R -- 28 119 71 190 31 157 417
14.9R -- 28 170 102 272 45 224 599
16.9R -- 28 219 131 350 58 290 774
14.9R -- 30 174 104 278 46.0 231 616
380/70R -- 24 117 70 187 31 155 414
420/70R -- 24 149 89 238 39 197 526
380/70R -- 28 144 86 230 38 190 508
420/70R -- 28 166 99 265 44 219 585
440/65R -- 28 167 100 267 44 220 588
480/65R -- 28 200 120 320 53 264 705
520/60R -- 28 210 126 336 56 278 742
540/65R -- 28 251 150 401 66 332 886

NOTE: Liquid ballasting of front tyres on a two wheel drive installation is not recommended.

3--153
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Rear Tyre Ballast

Tyre Size Water Calcium Total Weight Water Calcium Total Weight
Chloride of solution Chloride of solution
per tyre US per tyre
Litres kg. kg. gallons lb. lb.
18.4R -- 30 286 171 457 76 377 1007
12.4 -- 32 123 73 196 33 163 436
16.9R -- 34 270 162 432 71 357 952
18.4R -- 34 292 175 467 77 386 1031
13.6R -- 38 176 105 281 47 233 622
16.9R -- 38 275 165 440 73 364 972
18.4R -- 38 312 187 499 83 413 1102
20.8R -- 38 429 257 686 113 567 1513
18.4R -- 42 352 211 563 93 465 1241
14.9R -- 46 245 147 392 65 324 865
480/70R -- 34 248 148 396 66 328 875
520/70R -- 34 307 184 491 81 406 1083
480/70R -- 38 270 162 432 72 357 954
520/70R -- 38 318 190 508 84 420 1121
540/65R -- 38 316 189 505 84 418 1115
600/65R -- 38 419 257 670 111 554 1479
650/60R -- 38 436 261 697 115 576 1538
650/65R -- 38 510 306 816 135 674 1800

IMPORTANT: Only sufficient weight should be WARNING

added to provide traction and stability. Adding more Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and
weight than necessary results in unnecessary loads ensure, when stored, that they cannot fall and cause
being imposed on the tractor and a higher fuel injury.
consumption. When adding weight, adhere to the Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
maximum tyre capacity loading stated in the tables disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
commencing on page 3--156. If further information or at the recommended intervals.
assistance is required on tractor weighting consult
your authorised dealer.

3--154
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TYRE CARE

Upon receiving your tractor, check the air pressure • After seating the beads, adjust inflation pressure
in the tyres and recheck as required. to the recommended operating pressure.

When checking tyre pressures, inspect the tyres for • Do not re-inflate a tyre that has been run flat or
damaged tread and side walls. seriously under-inflated until it has been
inspected for damage by a qualified person.
Inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that
a tyre may carry. • Torque wheel to axle nuts to specification after
re-installing the wheel. Check nut tightness daily
See the Tyre Pressure and Load tables, pages 3--156 until torque stabilises.
and 3--157. Do not exceed the load for the pressures
listed. Do not over or under inflate the tyres. If the tyre • Refer to tractor weighting section before adding
fitted to your tractor is not listed, consult your ballast to the tyres.
authorised dealer for pressure and load information.
• Ensure the jack is placed on a firm, level surface.
WARNING
Inflating or servicing tyres can be dangerous. • Ensure the jack has adequate capacity to lift your
Whenever possible, trained personnel should be tractor.
called in to service or install tyres. In any event, to
avoid the possibility of serious or fatal injury, follow • Use jack stands or other suitable blocking to
the safety precautions below: support the tractor while repairing tyres.

• Do not put any part of your body under the tractor

• Never attempt tyre repairs on a public road or or start the engine while the tractor is on the jack.
highway.
• Never hit a tyre or rim with a hammer.
• Do not inflate a steering tyre (front tyre on a two
wheel drive tractor) above the manufacturer’s
• Ensure the rim is clean and free of rust or
maximum pressure shown on the tyre or beyond
damage. Do not weld, braze, otherwise repair or
the maximum recommended by your authorised
use a damaged rim.
dealer or tyre supplier.

• Do not inflate a tyre unless the rim is mounted on

• Never inflate a traction tyre (front tyre on a four
the tractor or is secured so that it will not move
wheel drive tractor or any rear tyre) over 2.8 bar
if the tyre or rim should suddenly fail.
(40 lbf/in 2). If the bead does not seat on the rim
by the time this pressure is reached, deflate the
tyre, relubricate the bead with a soap/water • When fitting a new or repaired tyre, use a clip-on
solution and re-inflate. Do not use oil or grease. valve adaptor with a remote gauge that allows
Inflation beyond 2.8 bar with unseated beads the operator to stand clear of the tyre while
may break the bead or rim with explosive force inflating it. Use a safety cage, if available.
sufficient to cause a serious injury.

3--155
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

1

Radial tyre performance is denoted by a Load Index

and Speed Symbol replacing the Ply Rating 141 A8 138
commonly found on cross ply tyres. Figure 239 B
shows typical markings to be found on the side wall
2 3
of radial ply tyres.

NOTE: Radial tyres will have a speed symbol of ‘A8’ MAX LOAD AT 40 KM/H
4 2575 KGS AT 1.6 BAR
and/or ’B’which identifies the maximum speed rating
for that tyre. Tyres marked with the A8 symbol are REPLACES 10 P.R. 5
suitable for speeds up to 40km/h (25 MPH), those
marked with a ’B’ symbol may be operated at speeds
up to 50k/mh (31 MPH). 239

The maximum load that may be carried by the tyre is 1. Load Index
dependent upon the Load Index shown on the side 2. Speed Symbol for 40 km/h (25 MPH)
wall. In the following charts the loads given are for 3. Speed Symbol for 50 km/h (31 MPH)
individual tyres operated at speeds up to 40 or 50 km/h 4. Maximum load/inflation pressure at
40 km/h (25MPH)
(25 or 31 MPH). The two right--hand columns indicate 5. Old ply rating mark
the maximum permissible load per tyre at speeds of
40 or 50 km/h (25 or 31 MPH).

WARNING
When operating at high road speeds, tyre pressures
and maximum load capacities advised by the tyre
manufacturer should be strictly adhered to. Consult
your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for the correct
pressures and loads for the tyres fitted to your
tractor.

Tyre Load
Inflation Pressure -- bar
Capacity @
Tyre Load 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
Size Index 40 50
Load Capacity per TYRE (kg) @ 30k/mh k/mh k/mh
125A8 1295 1415 1530 1650 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1650 --
380/70 R24
122B 1295 1415 1530 1650 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1650
123A8 1170 1275 1320 1400 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1400 --
13 6R -28
13.6R- 28
120B 1285 1400 1450 1550 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1550
142A8 1930 2095 2275 2430 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2430 --
18 4R -30
18.4R- 30
139B 2120 2300 2500 2650 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2650
145A8 2300 2500 2700 2900 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2900 --
480/70 R38
145B 2300 2500 2700 2900 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2900
153A8 -- -- -- -- 2210 2410 2460 2865 3140 3350 3350 --
20 8R -38
20.8R- 38
150B -- -- -- -- 2430 2650 2900 3150 3450 3650 3650
148A8 -- -- -- -- -- -- 2300 2725 2900 3150 3150 --
18 4R -42
18.4R- 42
148B -- -- -- -- 1800 2120 2300 2725 2900 3150 3150

IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre
pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and
should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular
tyres, consult your authorised dealer.

3--156
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

Tyre Load
Inflation Pressure -- lbf/in2
Capacity @
Tyre Load 15 17 20 23 26 29 31 35 37 40
Size Index 25 31
Load Capacity per TYRE (lbs.) @ 18.6 MPH MPH MPH
125A8 2854 3119 3373 3637 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3637 --
380/70 R24
122B 2854 3119 3373 3637 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3637
123A8 2579 2810 2910 3086 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3086 --
13 6R -28
13.6R- 28
120B 2832 3086 3196 3417 -- -- -- -- -- -- 3417
142A8 4255 4618 5015 5357 -- -- -- -- -- -- 5357 --
18 4R -30
18.4R- 30
139B 4673 5070 5511 5842 -- -- -- -- -- -- 5842
145A8 5070 5511 5952 6393 -- -- -- -- -- -- 6393 --
480/70 R38
145B 5070 5511 5952 6393 -- -- -- -- -- -- 6393
153A8 -- -- -- -- 4872 5313 5423 6316 6922 7385 7385 --
20 8R -38
20.8R- 38
150B -- -- -- -- 5357 5842 6393 6944 7605 8046 8046
148A8 -- -- -- -- -- -- 5070 6007 6393 6944 6944 --
18 4R -42
18.4R- 42
148B -- -- -- -- 3968 4673 5070 6007 6393 6944 6944

IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre
pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and
should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular
tyres, consult your authorised dealer.

SYMBOL MARKED RADIAL TYRES

(North America Only)

Conventional sized radial agricultural tractor drive

tyres are marked with *, **,or *** symbols. The
maximum load rating for tyres marked with a * is
calculated at 18 psi inflation pressure. Tyres marked
with ** or *** have maximum load carrying capacities
at pressures of 24 psi and 30 psi respectively.

For information regarding specific inflation pressures

and load carrying capacities for the tyres fitted to
your tractor, consult your authorised dealer. 240

1. Load symbol
2. Maximum recommended load at marked pressure
3. Maximum load at 20 MPH
4. Previous ply ratings

3--157
 SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATION

3--158
 SECTION 4

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL INFORMATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INTRODUCTION Read and observe all safety precautions listed in

‘Servicing the Tractor’ in the Introduction section at
Section 4 provides the step by step requirements the front of this Manual.
necessary to maintain your new tractor in peak
condition. A lubrication and maintenance chart on NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly.
page 4--7 provides a ready reference to these
requirements. If in doubt about any aspect of CAUTION
lubrication and maintenance, consult your dealer.
Do not check, lubricate, service or make adjustments
to the tractor with the engine running.
CONTENTS
The subjects covered in this section are as listed
below. A full index is provided at the back of the book.
Subject Page DURING THE FIRST 50 HOURS OPERATION
General Information 4--1
In addition to the regular maintenance operations
First 50--hour service 4--2
listed, check the following items every 10 hours or
Fuelling 4--3 daily during the first 50 hours of operation of your
Guard Removal 4--7 new tractor:
Lubricants and Coolants 4--10
Lubrication and Maintenance Chart 4--12 • Check transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level
Servicing when warning lights illuminate 4--14
• Wheel nuts for tightness
10--hour/daily service 4--19
50--hour service 4--20 • Front axle hub oil levels (four wheel drive)
100--hour service 4--30
300--hour service 4--31 CHECKING OIL LEVELS
600--hour service 4--35
1200--hour/12 month service 4--42 IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and,
where applicable, extend all cylinders before
1200--hour/24 month service 4--49
checking oil levels. With some front/rear wheel
Every 3 years 4--55 combinations, it may be necessary to raise the front
General Maintenance -- as required 4--56 or rear of the tractor to ensure it is level before
Protecting the electrical system 4--72 checking the oil.
Storing the tractor 4--73

4--1
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

THE FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE

At the first 50-hour service, ensure that the following

additional service operations are carried out. The
items are listed in the ‘First 50-Hour Service’
checklist in Section 8.

• Check engine oil level

• Change hydraulic oil filters (all models)*

• Check transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level
• Check FWD differential oil level

• Check FWD axle hub oil level

• Check and adjust parking brake
• Check all engine air intake connections
• Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts
• Inspect Poly V-belt

• Check and adjust compressor drive belt tension

(air operated trailer brakes--where fitted)
• Tighten all cooling system hose connections

• Check torque of safety cab or frame mounting

bolts

• Check torque of front end weight clamp bolts

(where fitted)

NOTE: Items listed in the first 50-hour check are

important. If not performed, early component failure
and reduced tractor life may result.

*Tractors with Variable Displacement Hydraulic

Pump only
IMPORTANT: At the First 50 Hour service the
hydraulic filter (1) MUST be changed for the larger
capacity service repacement filter. Do NOT replace
with one of the same size as this may reduce
hydraulic system performance.

Filter Dimensions Length Diameter

Original (factory fit) 204mm 94.3mm
Service replacement filter 254mm 116.8mm

4--2
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATION FUELLING THE TRACTOR

To prevent contamination when changing oils, filters, CAUTION

etc., always clean the area around filler caps, level When handling diesel fuel, observe the following:
and drain plugs, dipsticks and filters prior to removal.
Before connecting remote cylinders, ensure that oil Do not smoke around diesel fuel. Under no
contained within them is clean, has not degenerated circumstances should gasoline, alcohol, gasohol or
due to long storage and is of the correct grade. dieselhol (a mixture of diesel fuel and alcohol) be
added to diesel fuel because of increased fire or
To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt from explosion risks. In a closed container such as a fuel
the grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excess tank they are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do
grease from the fitting after greasing. not use these blends. Additionally, dieselhol is not
approved due to possible inadequate lubrication of
FLEXIBILITY OF MAINTENANCE INTERVALS the fuel injection system.

The intervals listed in the lubrication and • Clean the filler cap area and keep it free of debris.
maintenance chart are guidelines to be used when
• Fill the tank at the end of each day to reduce
operating in normal working conditions.
overnight condensation.
Adjust the intervals for environment and working • Never take the cap off or refuel with the engine
conditions. Intervals should be shortened under running.
adverse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty)
working conditions. • Keep control of the fuel nozzle while filling the
fuel tank.
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART • Don’t fill the tank to capacity. Allow room for
expansion. If the original fuel tank cap is lost,
The chart on page 4--7 lists the intervals when routine replace it with a genuine original equipment
checks, lubrication, service and/or adjustments cap and tighten securely.
should be performed. Use the chart as a quick
reference guide when servicing the tractor. The • Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.
operations follow the chart.

FUEL INJECTOR MAINTENANCE

The fuel injectors on your tractor are electronically

controlled and therefore do not require periodic
servicing or adjustment.

4--3
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

DIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.5%
requires more frequent oil changes as noted in the
The engine in your tractor is of an advanced design maintenance schedule.
capable of providing dependable performance and
good fuel economy. In order to maintain this The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above
performance, it is important that tractor maintenance 1.3% is not recommended.
schedules are carried out at the correct intervals.
For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-D fuel
IMPORTANT: Diesel approved for your engine must whenever temperatures allow.
comply with the Specification Standard EN590 (or
equivalent). Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below
--7° C (20° F). The cold temperatures will cause the
Be aware that the use of Diesel not complying with fuel to thicken, which may prevent the engine from
the above mentioned Specification Standard could running. (If this happens, contact your dealer.)
lead to severe damage to the engine and to the fuel
system. Be aware that the use of none approved fuel To be sure that a fuel meets the required properties,
may void the Warranty cover. enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil supplier. The
responsibility for clean fuel lies with the fuel supplier
The quality of fuel used is an important factor for as well as the fuel user.
dependable performance and satisfactory engine
life. Fuels must be clean, well-refined, and STORING DIESEL FUEL
non-corrosive to fuel system parts. Be sure to use
fuel of a known quality from a reputable supplier. Take the following precautions to ensure that stored
fuel is kept free of dirt, water and other contaminants.
Use Number 2-D in temperatures above --7° C (20° F).
Use Number 1-D in temperatures below --7° C (20° F). • Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized
tanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fuel
To obtain optimum combustion and minimum engine and form compounds that will contaminate the
wear, the fuel selected for use should conform to the injection pump and injectors.
application and property requirements outlined in the
following ‘Diesel Fuel Selection Chart’. • Install bulk storage tanks away from direct
sunlight and angle them slightly so sediment in
DIESEL FUEL SELECTION CHART the tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.

General Final Cetane Sulphur • To facilitate moisture and sediment removal,

Fuel Boiling Rating Content provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the end
Classification Point (max) (min) (max) opposite the outlet pipe.
288° C
No. 1-D 40* 0.3%
(550° F) • If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a
357° C funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank
No. 2-D 40 0.5% filler neck when refuelling.
(675° F)
NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weather • Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels
conditions below 0°C (32°F) are encountered or are not held over and used in winter.
when continuously operating at an altitude above
5,000 ft. (1500 m) use Number 1-D fuel.

*When continually operating at low temperatures or

high altitude, a minimum cetane rating of 45 is
required.

4--4
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

BIODIESEL FUELS

IMPORTANT: :The Biodiesel stock must meet the Biodiesel has a higher cloud point than conventional
following fuel Specification. diesel fuels and is not recommended for use in winter
months. Waxy deposits may form in the tank and fuel
The use of Biodiesel blends meeting Specification pipes which, like paraffin deposits in Diesel, will be
Standards ASTM 6751 or EN14214 is approved for collected by the fuel filter causing it to become
the engine in your tractor*. It is highly recommended blocked. Please consult your authorised Dealer for
that you use Biodiesel fuel from a BQ--9000 more information on the use of any Biodiesel blend
accredited supplier to maintain the quality and in cold conditions.
consistency of the fuel. Make sure the fuel is
pre--blended from the supplier. On site blending is It may be necessary to change engine oil, engine oil
not recommended. filter and fuel filter elements more frequently than
with convetional Diesel.
Engine performance is affected by the use of
Biodiesel: up to 12% reduction in power and torque Biodiesel can remove rust and particles from the
may apply according to the blend used. inside of on--site fuel storage tanks that would
normally adhere to the sides of the tank. These
IMPORTANT: It is forbidden to modify the engine / particles will then be trapped by the vehicle fuel filters
injection pump settings to recover the reduced and cause shortened filter life and filter blockages.
performance.
Please consult your authorised Dealer for more
Biodiesel and Diesel blends are approved for your information on maintenance intervals when using
engine only if the Biodiesel and Diesel fuels comply any Biodiesel blend.
with the above Specification Standards.
Biodiesel fuel attracts moisture and may have a
IMPORTANT: It is imperative that you check which higher water content than conventional diesel fuel.
blend is approved for your engine with your Fuel tanks should be kept as full as possible to limit
authorised Dealer. the amount of air and water condensation. It may be
necessary to drain the fuel water trap more
frequently. The use of a biocide is recommended.
Be aware that the use of Biodiesel which does not
comply with the Specification Standards could lead
to severe damage to the engine and to the fuel Biodiesel is an excellent solvent. It may be
system. Be aware that the use of fuels which are not necessary to change fuel filters more frequently
approved may void the Warranty cover. during the early stages of biodiesel use.

Biodiesel fuel does not have long term stability and Any spillages of Biodiesel must be cleaned up
should not be left in engines or stored for more than immediately before they can cause damage to the
three months. Prior to storing your tractor for more paintwork of the machine.
than three months, the engine should be flushed by
running for a minimum of of 20 minutes with
conventional diesel fuel.

4--5
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

On site storage tanks should be clean and free of

sediment. The use of a fuel filter and water separator
is recommended. It is also recommended that the
tank, hose(s) and seal materials used are compatible
with Biodiesel.

For any query on Biodiesel or if you wish to use any

Biodiesel blend, please first consult your authorised
Dealer to receive full information about the approved
Biodiesel blends for your engine and detailed
conditions of Biodiesel usage.

IMPORTANT: Be aware that not fulfilling the

requirements and following the conditions of
Biodiesel usage may void the Warranty cover.

IMPORTANT: The use of COLD PRESSED

Biodiesel fuels are NOT recommended for use in the
engine of your tractor.

*Limitations to the use of Biodiesel Fuels

Biodiesel Fuel B5
• No limitation.

Biodiesel Fuel B20

• Engine oil and filter change service interval may
be shortened.
• Not recommended for use in temperatures below
-- 9° C (16° F).
• Check your engine oil daily, if the oil level
increases, contact your authorised dealer.

Biodiesel Fuel B100

• The use of B100 biodiesel fuel is NOT
recommended for your tractor.

4--6
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

FILLING THE FUEL TANK

1. Clean the area around the fuel filler cap (1) to

prevent dirt from entering tank and
contaminating the fuel .

2. Remove the cap and place in a clean area during

refuelling. The cap is attached to the fuel tank by
a chain to prevent loss.

3. After filling the tank, replace and tighten the fuel

cap.

Fuel filler cap

The fuel filler cap on your tractor is of the vented type,
should it become lost or damaged always replace it
with one of the same type. Consult your authorised
dealer.
Fuel Capacities

Standard 4WD 176 litres (46.4 U.S. galls)

SuperSteer 4WD 152 litres (40.1 U.S. galls)

GUARDS

ENGINE HOOD

For safety the hood must be closed and correctly

latched before operating the tractor.

Additional guards are provided to prevent the fingers

being trapped by the fan/air conditioner drive belt
when the hood is lowered to the operating position.

The hood is hinged at the rear to provide easy access

to the engine area for routine maintenance. Two gas
struts (located under the hood) assist in raising the 3
hood to either of two positions. A safety stay holds
the hood in the selected position.

To open the hood, lift the release handle (1), Figure

3. The gas struts will take over and raise the hood
to the first position secured by the nylon retaining
strap located at the front of the hood. All routine
maintenance operations may be performed with the
hood raised to this position.

4--7
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Should it become necessary to raise the hood to its

full extent, unclip the retaining strap (1) from its
anchor bracket and, holding firmly onto the strap,
allow the hood to raise fully on the gas struts.

NOTE: Raising the hood to full height is only

necessary for service requirements that are best left
to your dealer.

To close the hood, pull it fully down ensuring the

retaining strap has been re--fitted to the anchor
bracket. An audible click will signal engagement of
the locking catch. Check that the hood is properly
closed. 4

RIGHT--HAND FOOTSTEPS (Where fitted)

Hinged footsteps may be installed on your tractor.

For improved access to the right-hand brake

adjuster, hydraulic oil filter(s), battery, etc., the
footsteps may be lifted and secured in the raised
position.

To raise the steps, remove the securing pin (1).

5
Raise the step (1) and replace the securing pin in the
hole provided to retain the step in the horizontal
position.

4--8
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

RELAY AND FUSE PANEL COVER

The moulded panel on the right hand side of the cab

may be easily removed for service. Remove the four
screws (1) and remove the panel to gain access to
the relays and connectors.

7
Fuse Box Cover

To gain access to the fuses , undo the two retaining

screws (1) from the panel on the righ--hand side of
the cab.

4--9
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

LUBRICANTS AND COOLANTS --30 °C --25 °C --15 °C +20 °C +40 °C

Lubricants
SAE 5W--30
The correct engine oil viscosity grade is dependent
upon ambient temperature. Refer to the chart on the
right when selecting oil for your tractor engine.
SAE 10W--30

NOTE: In areas where prolonged periods of extreme

temperatures are encountered, local lubricant
SAE 15W--40
practices are acceptable; such as the use of SAE
5W30 in extreme low temperatures or SAE 50 in
extreme high temperatures.
--22 °F --13 °F +5 °F +68 °F +104 °F

Biodegradable Transmission and Hydraulic Oil Sulphur in Fuel

A biodegradable oil has been approved for use in the The engine oil and filter change period are shown in
transmission, 4WD front axle and hubs, and the section 4. However, locally available fuel may have
hydraulic system of your tractor. Although the oil is a high sulphur content, in which case the engine oil
90% biodegradable, it is important to follow safe and filter change period should be adjusted as
handling and disposal practices. follows:--
Sulphur Content % Oil Change Period
Ambra Multi Bio oil is available from your authorised Below 0.5 Normal
dealer. From 0.5 -- 1.0 Half the normal
Above 1.0 One quarter normal.
Biodegradable oil should not be used in conjunction
NOTE:Theuseof fuelwithasulphurcontent above
with other oils. Use the following procedure to
1.3% is not recommended.
replace standard oil with biodegradable lubricant.

Coolants
1. Operate the tractor until the oil that is being
changed reaches a temperature greater than
60°C (140°F). To reduce the amount of deposits and corrosion, the
water used in the cooling system must comply with
2. Stop the engine and immeadiately drain the oil as the following values.
outlined later in this section.
Total Hardness: Chloride: Sulphate:
3. Replace all transmission and hydraulic filters. 300 ppm 100 ppm 100 ppm
4. Add the biodegradable oil to the correct level and
IMPORTANT: See Operation 29, page 4--49,
run the tractor to circulate the oil.
regarding use of coolant inhibitor where the above
mentioned antifreeze is not available. In those hot
5. Check for oil leaks and re--check the oil level.
countries where antifreeze is not available, use clean
water only.

NOTE: See Operation 29, page 4--49, for further

details before topping up or changing the engine
coolant.

4--10
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

LUBRICANT AND COOLANT SPECIFICATION

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND Approximate New Holland International

APPLICATIONS Quantities Specification Specification

Engine Oil 4 cyl. engines:

Ambra Mastergold HSP (15W40) 10 Litres (10.6 U.S. qts.) NH 330 H API CH--4, ACEA E5,
Ambra Mastergold HSP (10W30) 6 cyl. engines: NH 324 H
15Litres(15.9 U.S.qts.)

Transmission, Rear Axle and Hy-

draulic System Oil API GL4, ISO VG 32/46
NH 410 B
Ambra Multi G (10W30) M2C 134D
-- Electro Command 62 Litres (16.3 U.S. gal)

Front Wheel Drive Oil

Axle -- Ambra Multi G (10W30)
-- All Axles 9.0 Litres (9.5 U.S. qts.)
Hubs -- Ambra Multi G (10W30)
Standard axle API GL4, ISO VG 32/46
NH 410 B
--All Models w/out brakes-- Per Hub 1.25 Litres (1.3 U.S. qts.) M2C 134D
--All Models with brakes -- Per Hub 3.0 Litres (3.2 U.S. qts.)
Heavy Duty axle
--6 cyl Models w/out brakes -- Per Hub 3.6 Litres (3.8 U.S. qts.)
--6 cyl Models with brakes -- Per Hub--All 4.0 Litres (4.2 U.S. qts.)

Front P.T.O. Gearbox Oil API GL4, ISO VG 32/46

Ambra Multi G (10W30) 400 ml. (13.5 U.S. oz.) NH 410B M2C 134D

Engine Radiator Coolant

System Capacity
-- T6020, T6040, T6060 23 Litres (6.0 U.S. gal.)
-- T6030, T6050, T6070 25 Litres (6.6 U.S. gal.)
Water 50%
Ambra Agriflu 50% NH 900 A Ethylene Glycol

Air Conditioning Compressor Oil

Low Viscosity Oil SP10 As Required n/a PAG--E13, ISO100 Viscosity

Brake Oil
Ambra LHM Brake As Required NH 610 A ISO 7308
Grease Fittings and Bearings
Ambra GR9 As Required NH 710 A NLGI2, Li--Ca

4--11
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART

Page No.
Change
Service Operation

Adjust
Check

Clean

Wash
Drain
Lube
Interval No. Maintenance Requirement
1 Engine air cleaner outer element X X 4--14
When warning
2 Brake fluid level X X 4--16
lamp lights
3 Fuel system water separator X X 4--17
4 Engine coolant level X X 4--18
Every 10 hours
5 Engine oil level X X 4--19
or daily
6 Windscreen washer reservoir (where fitted) X X 4--19
Radiator,oil cooler and air conditioner con-
7 X X 4--20
denser
Every 50 hours 8 Cab air filters X X 4--22
9 All grease fittings X 4--25
Every 100 A/C & Brake Compressor drive belts
10 X X 4--30
hours (where fitted)
11 Poly V--belt X X 4--31
*12 Battery electrolyte level (tropical climates) X X X 4--31
Every 300 13 4WD suspension cylinder upper bearing X 4--32
hours 14 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level X X 4--33
15 Parking brake X X 4--34
16 Front P.T.O. gearbox oil level (where fitted) X 4--34
#17 Engine oil and filter X 4--35
18 Transmission and hydraulic oil filters X 4--37
Every 600 19 Air cleaner outer element X 4--38
hours 20 Engine air intake connections X 4--38
21 Fuel Pre--filter and fuel filter elements X X 4--39
Four wheel drive front axle and hubs oil
22 X X 4--41
level
23 Cab air filters X 4--42
Transmission, rear axle and hydraulic oil
24 X 4--44
and filter change
Every 1200 25 Four wheel drive axle differential oil X 4--45
hours or
26 Four wheel drive axle hub oil X 4--46
annually
27 Front P.T.O gearbox oil X 4--47
Battery electrolyte level (temperate cli-
28 X X X 4--48
mates)
29 Engine coolant X 4--49
Every 1200
E 30 Engine air cleaner inner element X 4--53
ho s or
hours o two
t o
31 Check and adjust tappet clearance X X 4--54
years
32 Air brake drier reservoir X 4--54

* Batteries on tractors operating in temperate climates need only be checked every 1200 hours. See Operation 28.
# Oil and filter change interval will be reduced if the diesel fuel has a high sulphur content or if the tractor is operated in
extremely cold temperatures.

4--12
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART (continued)

Page No.
Change
Service Operation

Adjust
Check

Clean

Wash
Drain
Lube
Interval No. Maintenance Requirement
Every Three
33 Air Conditioner System X X X 4--55
Years
34 Fuel pre--filter X X 4--56
35 Footbrakes X X 4--57
36 Front and rear wheel nut torque X X 4--58
37 Tyre pressures and condition X X 4--58
General 38 Automatic pick--up hitch X X 4--59
Maintenance 39 Remote control valve drain bottle(s) X 4--60
40 Headlight and worklamp adjustment X X 4--61
41 Bulb replacement X X 4--62
42 Fuse replacement X X 4--65
43 Cleaning the tractor X X 4--70

4--13
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

WHEN THE WARNING SYMBOL

APPEARS

OPERATION 1
SERVICE THE ENGINE AIR
CLEANER OUTER ELEMENT

Service the outer element when the restriction

indicator symbol flashes in the Dot Matrix Display or
every 600 hours, whichever comes first. If the
indicator lights up, perform the service within one
hour of operation.
9
IMPORTANT: Service the outer element only when
the restriction indicator symbol appears or at the
recommended service intervals. Cleaning the filter
too frequently will decrease the service life of the
filter.

The dry air cleaner, which is located under the rear,

right-hand side of the hood, consists of an inner and
outer paper element within a metal casing. See
Figure 9.

1. Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) Fig. 9, and lift

off the air cleaner assembly cover.

2. Remove the outer element (1) Fig. 10 from the

air cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end
of the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then
pull the filter straight out of the housing ,not at an
angle, ensuring the inner element remains in
place.
10
IMPORTANT: Do not disturb or remove the inner
element.
3. Examine the inside of the outer element. If dust
is present, the outer element is defective and
must be replaced.The inner element should also
be replaced at this time.

4. Clean the outer element using either method A

or B, depending on the element’s condition.

11

4--14
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Method A

NOTE: An outer element may be dry cleaned

(methods A or B) up to 5 times prior to replacement.

Lightly tap the ends of the element against the palm

of the hand. See Figure 12.

IMPORTANT: Do not tap the element against a hard

surface as this will damage the element.

12
Method B

Use compressed air, not exceeding 2 bar (30 lbf/in2).

Insert the air line nozzle inside the element. Hold the
nozzle 150 mm (6 in.) from the element and blow the
dust from the inside through the element to the
outside. See Figure 13.

WARNING
Wear eye protection and a face mask when carrying
out this operation.

13
Before installing a cleaned or replacement filter
check that there is no damage such as cuts ,dents or
punctures. A dent can make a good seal impossible
and a filter with bunched pleats can drain engine
power and increase fuel costs.

Clean the inside and outside of the sealing surface

of the outlet tube before installing the filter.

Apply a thin film of engine or silicone oil to the sealing

surfaces on the inside of the outer element and on
the outside of the inner element.

Locate the outer element into the housing and press 14

firmly on the outer rim (not the flexible centre) of the
element .

4--15
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 2
CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

If the low fluid symbol appears in the Dot Matrix

Display, check the level in the reservoir.

The reservoir is located under the rear of the hood on

the right-hand side and supplies fluid to the rear
brakes and front brakes (where fitted).Visually check
the level of fluid in the reservoir. It should never be
allowed to fall below the ’MIN’ line (3) moulded into
the bottle. If necessary, remove the filler cap (1) and
top up with the correct brake/clutch mineral oil to the
’MAX’ line (2). Do not overfill. Tractors with 12 x 12 15
transmission have a combined brake/clutch
reservoir. The reservoir on all other models is for the
brakes only.

IMPORTANT: Take care not to spill brake fluid on the

tractor as it may damage the paintwork.

WARNING
Use only the correct type of brake/clutch mineral oil.
Mixing different types of fluid may cause damage to
internal hydraulic braking components and result in
brake failure. Adhere to the instrutions on the brake
fluid container. See page 4--11 for correct brake fluid
specification.

4--16
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 3
DRAIN FUEL SYSTEM WATER
SEPARATOR

IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean
the area to be worked on to prevent contamination.

If the fuel symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display,

it signals the presence of water in the fuel
sedimenter, drain the fuel filter and sedimenter
assembly, as follows:

1. Open the drain tap on the sedimenter/filter 16

assembly by rotating the collar (1) approximately
180° on the water sensor switch. Contaminated
fuel will drain from the tube below the collar.

NOTE: To loosen the drain tap (1) it may be

necessary to remove the sensor wire from the
terminal to allow the knob to rotate.

2. Allow contaminated fuel to drain until only clean

fuel runs out. Catch the fuel in a suitable
container and dispose of properly. Close the
drain tap.
The fuel system is self bleeding and should not
require priming after draining the sedimenter. If
priming is required, turn to page 4--40 for details on
priming the fuel system.

NOTE: See also page 4--56, Fuel System Pre--Filter

and Water Trap.

4--17
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 10 HOURS OR DAILY

(whichever comes first)

OPERATION 4
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the recovery tank when the

engine is cold. The coolant level should be above the
bottom line on the recovery tank. If coolant is
required, remove the pressure cap and add a 50/50
water and antifreeze mixture as specified on page
4--11 of this manual.

17
WARNING
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the radiator pressure cap (1) Figure
17. The radiator pressure cap should not be used for
top up purposes. It is dangerous to remove the radia-
tor pressure or filler caps while the system is hot.
When cool, use a thick cloth and turn the radiator
pressure cap slowly to the first stop and allow any
pressure to escape. Coolant should be kept off the
skin. Adhere to the precautions outlined on the anti-
freeze and inhibitor containers.

CAUTION
Coolant should be kept off the skin . Adhere to the
precautions outlined on the coolant filter and
antifreeze container.

NOTE: If no coolant is visible in the recovery tank,

the coolant level must be checked in the radiator.
Check the system for leaks and repair as required.

Remove the radiator filler cap when the system is

cold. Add coolant as required to bring the level to just
below the top of the filler neck. Install the cap and add
coolant to the recovery tank as descibed above.

18

4--18
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 5
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on a

level surface and after the engine has been stopped
for a minimum of five minutes.

1. Remove the dipstick, wipe clean and re-insert

fully.

2. Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level.
The oil level should fall between the ‘MIN‘ and
‘MAX‘ indicators on the dipstick.
19
3. If more oil is required remove the dipstick and
add fresh oil until the level is between the ‘MIN‘
and ‘MAX‘ indicators on the dipstick. The
quantity of oil represented between the two
indicators is 3.5 litres (3.7 U.S.qts).

NOTE: Do not fill above the ‘MAX indicator on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and
give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not
operate the engine with the oil level below the MIN
indicator.

4. Re--install the dipstick cap.

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification and

viscosity.

OPERATION 6
CHECK WINDSCREEN
WASHER RESERVOIR

The reservoir for the windscreen washers is located

beneath the rear of the cab on the left-hand side. The
same reservoir is utilised for both front and rear
windscreen washers.

Lift off the cap (1) and fill with washer solvent solution
up to the bend (2) in the filler neck. In cold weather,
use a solvent with anti-freeze properties.

20

4--19
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 50 HOURS carry out the

preceding checks plus the following:

OPERATION 7
CLEAN THE RADIATOR, OIL COOLER AND
AIR CONDITIONER CONDENSER CORES

With Mid Mounted Condenser

Check the cores for chaff accumulation or blockage.

If any is noted , clean as follows:

CAUTION 21
Wear eye protection and protective clothing during
the cleaning process. Clear the area of bystanders
so they are not struck by flying particles.

1. For cleaning, use compressed air or a pressure

washer not exceeding 7 bar (100 lbf/in2).

2. The air conditioner condensor (1) Figure 21 and

the driveline oil cooler figure 22, located in front
of the engine radiator, have a slide out facility for
ease of service. Turn the two quick-release
fasteners (3) anti-clockwise to release.
3. Slide the oil cooler and the air conditioner
condensor (where fitted) out (to the right) to gain
access to the engine coolant radiator (1) Figure
22

4. Direct the air or water through each core from the

back to the front. Clean the radiator first, then the
air conditioner condenser and, finally, the
driveline oil cooler. Carefully straighten any bent
fins.

NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily

substances, apply a detergent solution and remove
it with a pressure washer.
22

4--20
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

With Front Mounted Condenser

CAUTION
Wear eye protection and protective clothing during
the cleaning process. Clear the area of bystanders
so they are not struck by flying particles.

1. For cleaning, use compressed air or a pressure 1

washer not exceeding 7 bar (100 psi).

SC06B289
23

2. The air conditioning system condenser is

mounted in front of the intercooler and is carried
on a hinge to make access easier when 2
servicing.

3. Open the quick release fastener (1) for the oil

cooler by turning anti--clockwise. Pull the oil cooler
out to gain access to the engine radiator.
2

4. To gain access to the rear of the condenser unit,

flip the the two retaining catches (2) on the left
side of the condenser to the vertical position.

SC06B290

24

5. To clean the intercooler and condenser, raise the

condenser with both hands and swivel to the
right, Figure 25.
6. Direct the air or water through each core from the
back to the front. Clean the radiator first, then the
driveline oil cooler, engine intercooler and, finally,
the air conditioning condenser. Carefully
straighten any bent fins.
Before operating the tractor, ensure all cooler
retaining catches are made secure.

NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily SC06B291

substances, apply a detergent solution and remove
25
it with a pressure washer.

4--21
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 8
CLEAN THE CAB AIR FILTERS

Air drawn into the cab by the blower fan passes

through three filters, two externally mounted, and
one recirculation filter located inside the cab.

Before servicing the filters, switch off the blower and

close the roof hatch, all windows and one door.
Forcibly close the other door. The resulting back
pressure will dislodge most of the loose dirt from the
underside of the external filters.

NOTE: In humid conditions, do not switch on the

blower prior to servicing the filter. Damp particles
drawn into the filter may be difficult to remove.
26

External Filter Removal -- Deluxe Cab

To remove the external filter, loosen the thumbscrew

(1) Figure 26, at the front end of the filter housing.
Allow the housing to drop downwards and lift out the
filter element (2).

NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper
surface. Take care not to damage the element during
removal.

Clean all filter chambers with a damp, lint-free cloth.

Re--install the filter elements with the clean side 27
uppermost and re-install the covers.

The filter consists of two elements, a foam pre--filter

and electrostatic main element that traps fine dust
particles.

The pre--filter may be cleaned using low pressure

compressed air, or by washing. If the filter is washed,
ensure it is completely dry before re--fitting to the
tractor.

NOTE: By cleaning the pre--filter on a regular basis,

the life of the main element will be extended.

28

4--22
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Clean the main element by blowing with compressed

air not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust
from the upper surface through the element to the
underside. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm)
from the element to prevent damage to the filter
media.

NOTE: The main element should not be cleaned by

washing as this will cause damage to the filter
material.

External Filter Removal -- Low Profile Cab

The two filters are located at the rear of the cab.

Unscrew the securing clip (2), and lower the filter
cover. Carefully remove the filter from the housing
taking care not to damage the element.

Clean the elements as previously described.

Clean all filter chambers with a damp, lint-free cloth.

Re--install the filter elements with the clean side
uppermost and re-install the covers.

29

4--23
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Internal Filter

To remove an internal filter, loosen the retaining

screws (1) anti clockwise and remove the filter cover.

30

Remove the cover (1) and extract the filter from the
housing.

NOTE: The filter (2) is made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper
surface. Take care not to damage the element during
removal.

Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air

not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from
the clean surface through the element to the dirty
side. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm) from
the element to prevent damage to the filter media.
31

4--24
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 9
ALL GREASE FITTINGS

Oil all pivots and apply a grease gun to the lubrication

fittings as shown in figures 32 to 48 inclusive.

See page 4--11 for correct grease specification.

Right and Left hand Lift Rod (with turnbuckle

adjustment).

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

32

External Lift Cylinder (Where Fitted)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

33

Front Trunnion Pin (Standard 4WD axle)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

34

4--25
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Rear Trunnion Pin (Standard 4WD axle)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

35
Front Trunnion Pin (Supersteer 4WD axle)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

36
Rear Trunnion Pin (Supersteer 4WD axle)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

37
Panhard Rod Pivot (Suspended 4WD axle)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

38

4--26
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Suspension Arm (Suspended 4WD axle)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

39
Driveshaft Universal Joint (Suspended and
Supersteer axles)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

40
Steering Cylinders (all 4WD axles)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

41
Streering Cylinders and Track Rods (Supersteer
4WD axle)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

42

4--27
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Upper Swivel Bearings, Axle Housing and

Steering Cylinder end (all 4WD axles)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting as shown.

NOTE: The left hand swivel bearing is shown. There

is a similar grease fitting on the right--hand swivel
bearing.

43
Lower Swivel Bearings (all 4WD axles)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting as shown.

NOTE: The left hand swivel bearing is shown. There

is a similar grease fitting on the right--hand swivel
bearing.

TA57
44
Rear Tow Hitch (auto engagement type)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown.

45
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as
shown.

46

4--28
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame)

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting as shown.

47
Heavy Duty Roller Drawbar

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting as shown.

48
Integrated Front Hitch

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings as

shown. To gain access to the fittings on top of the lift
cylinder, the engine hood must be raised and the two
rubber covers removed.

To avoid a build up of dust or debris around the

lubrication points, the rubber covers must be
replaced after greasing.

49
Non--Integrated Front Hitch

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as

shown.

50

4--29
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 100 HOURS carry out the

following checks :

OPERATION 10
AIRCONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
DRIVE BELT

Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for

chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt,
install a new belt.

51

COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT TENSION

(where fitted)

Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for

chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt,
install a new belt.

52

4--30
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 300 HOURS carry out the

preceding checks plus the following:

OPERATION 11
INSPECT POLY V--BELT

Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for

chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt,
install a new belt.

Ensure that the belt is correctly located on the pulleys

and check that the belt tensioner is operating
correctly.
53

OPERATION 12
BATTERY

IMPORTANT: This operation applies to the battery

on tractors operating in tropical climates. Tractors
operating in temperate climates should have the
battery electrolyte level checked every 1200 hours or
12 months.

To gain access to the battery, raise the right hand

step as shown earlier in this section, using the
securing pin (1) Figure 54 to retain the step in an
upright position.
54
Remove the battery cover by rotating the cover
retaining screw (2), 90 degrees anti--clockwise.

4--31
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Remove the securing bolt (1), and swing the battery

tray towards the front of the tractor.

Unscrew and remove the six vent plugs from the top
of the battery (tractors with heavy duty battery only).

Check that the electrolyte level is above the top of the

separator plates in each cell.

If necessary, on tractors with heavy duty batteries,

top up with distilled or de-mineralised water until the
level is correct. Do not overfill. Never use tap water
or water from a rain barrel or other source.
55

IMPORTANT: In the event of the battery being

severely discharged, such that the terminal voltage
is below 7 volts, recovery will require a special
charging procedure. See your authorised dealer.

When replacing the battery cover ensure the rear of

the cover is securely attached to the two lugs on the
battery carrier.

56
OPERATION 13
4WD SUSPENSION CYLINDER
UPPER BEARING

Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting as shown.

57

4--32
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 14
CHECK TRANSMISSION, REAR AXLE
and HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL

Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a lelvel

surface, with all cylinders extended and the engine
shut off for at least five minutes.

Check the oil level in the sight glass on the left hand
side of the rear axle housing. Ensure that the the oil
level is between the high and low marks, in the sight
glass.

If necessary , remove the filler cap and add oil , as 58

required.

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and,

where applicable, extend all cylinders before
checking oil levels. With some front/rear wheel
combinations, it may be necessary to raise the front
or rear of the tractor to ensure it is level before
checking the oil.

59

4--33
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 15
ADJUST PARKING BRAKE

Block the front wheels, jack up the rear of the tractor

and support the rear wheels just clear of the ground.
Unlatch the brake pedals.

Apply the handbrake so that the 4th. notch of the

ratchet is engaged. Remove or ease back the rubber
boot, loosen the locknuts and turn the adjuster nuts
on the operating cables until both wheels start to
lock. Release the handbrake and ensure that both
wheels are free to rotate. Apply the handbrake to
ensure that the system operates freely. Tighten the 60
locknuts.

Road test, using the handbrake to stop the tractor.

The tractor should stop in a straight line if the cables
have been correctly adjusted.

OPERATION 16
CHECK FRONT P.T.O. GEARBOX OIL LEVEL

Integrated Front Hitch

Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and ensure

that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If
necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil
and replace the plug.

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

61
Non--Integrated Front Hitch

Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and ensure

that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If
necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil
and replace the plug.

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

62

4--34
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 600 HOURS carry out the

precedeing checks plus the following:

OPERATION 17
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

IMPORTANT: Operation 17 depicts the normal 600

hour engine oil and filter change period. However,
the oil change period may be affected by other
factors:

Cold Temperature Operation

Engines operating in temperatures below -- 12 ° C
(10 ° F) or in arduous conditions should have the oil
changed every 300 hours of operation. (The oil filter
need only be changed at the normal 600 hour service
interval).

Tractor Usage
In the event your tractor accumulates less than 600
working hours annually, it is recommended the
engine oil and filter be changed every 12 months.

Diesel Fuel Sulphur Content

In some countries, locally available diesel may have
a high sulphur content, in which case the oil and filter
change period should be adjusted, as follows:

• Sulphur content between 0.5 and 1.0%

-- change engine oil every 300 hours.

• Sulphur content between 1.0 and 1.3%

-- change engine oil every 150 hours.

If in doubt, follow the engine oil and filter change

recomendations on the decal affixed to the underside
of the hood.

WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot engine oil.
If the engine oil is extremely hot, alllow it to cool to a
moerately warm temperature before proceeding.

Oil Capacity (including filter):

4 Cylinder Models 10 litres (10.6 U.S qts.)

6 Cylinder Models 15 litres (15.9 U.S qts.)

4--35
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

To change the oil and filter:

1. Warm the engine to operating temperature. Stop

the engine, remove the engine oil drain plugs (1)
which are located at the rear of the sump on
either side of the engine. Catch the oil in a
suitable container and dispose properly.

2. Replace the drain plugs after the oil has drained.

63
3. Clean the oil filter area. Unscrew the oil filter (1)
and discard. Catch any residual oil and dispose
of properly.

4. Clean the new filter mounting surface and apply

a thin coat of oil on the new filter sealing ring and
install the filter. Turn until the sealing ring
contacts the mounting surface, then tighten an
additional 3/4 to 1 full turn. Do not overtighten..

5. Remove Dipstick/Filler cap, Figure 65, and fill

with the correct amount of fresh oil as indicated
below. Ensure the oil is of the correct grade and
viscosity.
64

6. Start the engine and run for 3 minutes at idle

speed then stop the engine.

7. Check the drain plugs and oil filter areas for

leaks.

8. Wait 5 minutes to allow the oil to drain into the

crankcase, then check the oil level on the
dipstick. The oil level should fall between the
‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ on the dipstick. Add more oil as
required.

NOTE: Do not fill above the ‘MAX’indicator on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and
give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not 65
operate the engine with the oil level below the lower
notch.

9. Re--install the dipstick/filler cap.

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

4--36
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 18
CHANGE TRANSMISSION and
HYDRAULIC OIL FILTERS

The filters are located on the right--hand side of the

transmission below the floor.

NOTE: Before changing the filters, remove the dust

cover and loosen the bleed nipple (1) Figure 66 on
the hydraulic manifold using an 8mm spanner. This
will permit oil trapped in the manifold to drain back
into the reservoir. Wait 30 seconds, re--tighten the
bleed nipple and replace the dust cover.

Clean the area around the filters, then remove and

discard. The charge filter (1) Figure 67 is a screw--on
type, the main intake filter (3) has a removable
element in a housing. 66

Before changing a disposable filter, clean the area

around the hydraulic manifold and filter, then
unscrew the filter and discard safely.

Clean the inlet channel and the face of the filter

mounting. Smear clean oil around the rubber seal of
the new filter and install on the tractor.

Screw up until the faces just meet, then tighten a

further 3/4 of a turn. Do not overtighten.

Thoroughly clean the intake filter housing before 3

fitting the new element. Fit the new seal between the
top of the filter and the hydraulic manifold. Check the
’O’ ring in the filter locking ring and replace if
damaged.

Tighten the nuts on the intake filter locking ring to 50 67

Nm (36.8 lbs.ft.)

Run the engine and operate the hydraulic system.

Fully raise the three--point linkage. Stop the engine
and wait five minutes while checking the system for
leaks.

Check the oil level by means of the sight glass (1)

Figure 67. Add oil as required until the oil level is
between the ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ marks.

NOTE: Do not fill above the ’MAX’ mark

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

68

4--37
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 19
CHANGE THE ENGINE AIR
CLEANER OUTER ELEMENT

Remove the outer element as described in Operation

1 and discard it.

Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a

damp lint--free cloth on a probe, taking care not to
damage the inner element. Install a new outer
element.

69
OPERATION 20
CHECK ENGINE AIR
INTAKE CONNECTIONS

Working from both sides of the engine, check all

intake system connection clamps for tightness.

From the left--hand side of the engine, check the air

cleaner intake connections at points (1) and (2) and
the turbocharger to intercooler connections at points
(2) and (4). Do not overtighten.

70
From the right--hand side of the engine, check the
intercooler to inlet manifold connections at points (1)
and (2). Do not overtighten.

It is essential that the clean air side of the filtration

system is sealing correctly at the connections (1) and
(3).

71
From the right--hand side of the engine, check the
exhaust aspirator connections at points (1) and (2)
for proper sealing and the clamps for tightness.

72

4--38
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 21
CHANGE FUEL PRE--FILTER AND
FUEL FILTER ELEMENTS

FUEL PRE--FILTER

NOTE: See also page 4--56, Fuel System Pre--Filter

and Water Trap.

IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean
the area to be worked on to prevent contamination.

1. Remove the filter drain tap (1) at the base of the 73

filter. To allow full rotation of the drain tap it will be
necessary to remove the sensor wire.

2. Open the drain tap on the sedimenter/filter by

loosening the knob. Allow the fuel to drain out.
Catch the fuel in a suitable container and dispose
of properly.

3. Unscrew and remove the filter from the filter head

and dispose of properly.

4. Install a new filter to the head assembly.

5. Before installing the new filter lightly coat the filter

gasket with oil.

6. Rotate the filter until the filter gasket is touching

the filter head. Then give the filter a further 3/4
turn to tighten to correct torque (15Nm). Do not
overtighten.

7. Remove and replace the fuel filter in the same

manner.

Bleed the fuel system as shown on the following

page.

4--39
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

To Bleed the Fuel System

1. Unclip harness from sensor and then unscrew

and remove sensor.

74

2. Unscrew the primer pump knob and procede to

pump fuel until no air bubbles are present.

3. Screw in the primer pump knob.

4. Re--install the sensor and harness.

75

4--40
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 22
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LUBRICATION 1

Front Axle

Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and ensure

that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If
necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil
and replace the plug.

TI/54
76

Front hub
1
Position a front wheel with the oil level plug at the
3 o’clock position, as shown.

Remove the combined level/filler plug and ensure

that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If
necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil
and replace the plug

Repeat on the other front wheel.

See page 4--11 for correct oil specification.

77

4--41
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS

(whichever occurs first) carry out the
preceding checks plus the following:

OPERATION 23
CHANGE CAB AIR FILTERS

External Filter Removal -- Deluxe Cab

To remove the external filter, loosen the thumbscrew

at the front end of the filter housing. Allow the housing
to drop downwards and lift out the filter element (2).

Dispose of the filter element properly.

Clean both filter chambers with a damp, lint--free

cloth.

Install new filter elements. A flow direction arrow is

moulded into the side of the filter. Install the filters
with the arrow pointing upwards. Re--install the 78
covers.

External Filter Removal -- Low Profile Cab

The two filters are located at the rear of the cab.

Unscrew the securing clip (2), and lower the filter
cover.

Dispose of the filter element properly.

Clean the filter chambers and install new elements

as previously described.

NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded around the
sides. Take carenot to damage the element during 79
installation.

4--42
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Internal Filter

To remove the internal filter turn captive screws (1)

until the cover is loose.

Remove the filter cover and the filter element.

Dispose of the filter element properly.

Clean the filter chamber with a damp lint--free cloth.

80
Install the new filter element making sure that the
arrow on the filter points to the rear of the tractor.

Re--install the filter cover.

81

4--43
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 24
CHANGE TRANSMISSION, REAR AXLE and
HYDRAULIC OIL AND FILTERS

Prior to changing the oil , run the engine and operate

the hydraulic system until the oil is warm. Park the
tractor on level ground, lower the three--point linkage
and stop the engine. Engage the parking brake and
chock the wheels on both sides.

WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot engine oil.
If the engine oil is extremely hot, alllow it to cool to a
moderately warm temperature before proceeding. 82

To change the oil:

1. Remove the drain plug (1) Figure 82 and

completely drain all oil into a suitable container.
Dispose of oil properly.

2. Re--install the drain plug after the oil has drained.

IMPORTANT: Perform Operation 18 (change

transmission and hydraulic filters) before refilling
with oil.

3. Remove the filler plug cap (1) Figure 83 and refill

with new oil. 83
4. Run the engine and operate the hydraulic
system. Fully raise the three--point linkage.

5. Stop the engine and wait five minutes while

checking the system for leaks.

6. Check the oil level by means of the sight glass

(1) Figure 84. Add oil as required until the oil
level is between the ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ marks.

NOTE: Do not fill above the ’MAX’ mark

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

84
Oil Capacity:

All Models 62.0 litres

(16.4 U.S. gals)

4--44
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 25
CHANGE 4WD DIFFERENTIAL OIL

Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park

brake.

To change the oil:

1. Remove the drain plug (1) and completely drain

oil into a suitable container. Dispose of the oil
properly.

2. Re--install the drain plug. Remove the level/filler

plug 85

3. Fill with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the

level/filler plug hole. Re--install level/filler plug. 1

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

Oil Capacity:

All Models 9.0 litres

Standard, Suspended and (9.5 U.S. qts)
Supersteer Axles

TI/54
86

4--45
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 26
CHANGE 4WD PLANETARY HUB OIL 1

Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park

brake.

To change the oil:

1. Positon the wheel so the filler/drain/level plug (1)

is at the lowest point . Remove the plug and
completely drain all oil into a suitable container.
Dispose of oil properly.

2. Rotate the wheel so that the combined level/filler 87

plug (1) is at the 3 o’clock position, as shown.

3. Refill the hub with new oil until it reaches the

bottom of the level/filler plug hole . Install the
plug.

4. Repeat the process on the other hub.

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

Oil Capacity (each hub):

Standard Axles
w/out brakes 1.25 litres
(1.3 U.S. qts)
with brakes 3.0 litres
(3.2 U.S. qts)

Heavy Duty Axles

w/out brakes 3.6 litres
(3.8 U.S. qts)
with Brakes 4.0 litres
4.2 U.S. qts)

4--46
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 27
CHANGE FRONT P.T.O. GEARBOX OIL

Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park

brake.

With Integrated Front Hitch

1. Place a suitable container below the gearbox and

remove the level plug (1) and drain plugs (2).
Allow the oil to completely drain into the container
then replace the drain plugs. Dispose of oil
properly.

2. Refill the gearbox through the combined

level/filler plug until the oil reaches the bottom of
the opening. 88
See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

With Non--Integrated Front Hitch

See above for oil change procedure.

See page 4--11 for the correct oil specification.

89

4--47
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 28
BATTERY

IMPORTANT: This operation applies only to

batteries on tractors operating in temperate climates.
Tractors operating in tropical climates should have
the battery electrolyte level checked every 300
hours. See operation 12.

To gain access to the battery, raise the right hand

step as shown earlier in this section, using the
securing pin (1) Figure 90 to retain the step in an
upright position.
90
Remove the battery cover by turning the retaining
screw (2) 90 degrees anti--clockwise.

Remove the securing bolt (1), and swing the battery

tray towards the front of the tractor.

Unscrew and remove the six vent plugs from the top
of the battery (tractors with heavy duty battery only).

Check that the electrolyte level is above the top of the

separator plates in each cell.

If necessary top up with distilled or de-mineralised

water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never
use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other
source.
91
To prevent the formation of verdigris (corrosion) the
terminals should be cleaned and lightly coated with
petroleum jelly (Vaseline or similar).

IMPORTANT: In the event of the battery being

severly discharged, such that the terminal voltage is
below 7 volts, recovery will require a special charging
procedure. See your authorised dealer.

When replacing the battery cover ensure the rear of

the cover is securely attached to the two lugs on the
battery carrier.

92

4--48
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 2 YEARS

(whichever occurs first) carry out the
preceding checks plus the following:

OPERATION 29
COOLING SYSTEM

During manufacture, the engine cooling system is

filled with a high quality antifreeze and water solution.
The antifreeze contains a chemical inhibitor. This
inhibitor increases and extends the protection
offered by conventional antifreezes.

The inhibitor will:

• Increase rust prevention.

• Reduce scale formation.

• Minimise cylinder wall erosion (pitting).

• Reduce foaming of the coolant.

The chemical inhibitor must be replenished, at

intervals, to maintain the optimum protection level.
This protection is provided by draining and flushing
the system and refilling with a 50% solution of
ethylene glycol antifreeze or, where a suitable type
of antifreeze is not available, with a measured
dosage of chemical inhibitor. See the following text.

Draining and Refilling the Cooling System

WARNING
Allow the engine to cool before draining the coolant.
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the radiator pressure cap (1). It is
dangerous to remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot. When cool, use a thick cloth and turn
the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure
to escape before fully removing the cap. Coolant
should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the precautions
outlined on the antifreeze and inhibitor containers,
where used.
93
IMPORTANT: It is essential that an approved
pressure cap is used. If the cap is mislaid or
damaged, obtain a replacement from your dealer.

4--49
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

1. Turn the heater control knob (2) to the maximum

heat position (fully clockwise).

94

2. Disconnect the radiator lower hose and drain all

the coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of
the coolant properly.

NOTE: A special hose clamp (1) is used on the

engine coolant hoses, to loosen the clamp it will be
necessary to remove the alloy cap from the head of
the screw tensioner. Using a pair of pliers, carefully
pull off the alloy cover, this will expose a conventional
screw head. Turn anti--clockwise to loosen.

95

3. Remove the coolant drain plug (1) from the left

hand rear of the engine block. Drain all the
coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of the
coolant properly.

4. To increase the drainage rate, remove the

radiator cap and recovery tank cap.

5. Flush the system with a commercial cooling

system cleaner. Follow the instructions supplied
with the cleaner. Drain the cleaner and let the
engine cool.

IMPORTANT: Never put cold coolant in a hot

engine. The difference in temperature could cause 96
the the block or head to crack.

4--50
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

6. Re--install the radiator lower hose. Using Plain water

7. Fill the system with clean water and run the If you reside in a country where antifreeze is not
engine for 10 minutes, then drain all the water. available, use clean water pre--mixed with 5%
Allow the engine to cool. chemical inhibitor. Contact your authorised dealer.
8. Fill the system with a blend of antifreeze and
Following the instructions on the container mix the
clean soft water. Add coolant slowly through the
recommended quantity of inhibitor with 28.5 litres
radiator filler neck until the coolant reaches the
(7.5 U.S. gal.) of clean water. This will provide more
bottom of the filler neck.
coolant mixture than is actually required. The excess
coolant should be kept in a specially marked
9. Replace the radiator cap and top up the system container and used for top up purposes.
through the coolant recovery bottle, replace the
cap on the recovery bottle.
WARNING
Inhibitor solution is irritating to eyes and skin . It
NOTE: To avoid trapping air in the system, fill the
contains buffered potassium hydroxide.
radiator as slowly as possible thereby allowing any
air pockets to disperse. • Avoid contact with eyes or prolonged or
repeated skin contact.
The coolant to be used is dependent upon local
availability. See the folling text: • Wear protective eyewear when using .
• In case of contact with eyes, flush with water for
Using Antifreeze 15 minutes and obtain medical attention.

Use a solution of 50% clean water and 50% • Wash skin with soap and water after use.
antifreeze. The inhibitor already in this antifreeze is
• Keep out of reach of children.
sufficient to protect your engine for a further 1200
hours or two years, whichever occurs first.

See page 4--11 for Antifreeze specification.

4--51
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

After Refilling the System -- All Coolant

Solutions

1. Inspect cooling system hoses and connections

for leaks.

2. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold fill mark

(1).

3. Start the engine and run it until normal operating

temperature is reached.

NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant is

pumped around the system.
97
4. Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool.

5. Remove the radiatior cap and add coolant to the

radiator to bring the level to the bottom of the filler
neck. Install the radiator cap. Add coolant to the
recovery tank as required to bring the level up to
the cold mark.

NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operated

immediately following this coolant change, run the
engine for one hour to ensure that the antifreeze
and/or chemical inhibitor is dispersed throughout the
cooling system. Allow the engine to cool and make
a final check to ensure that the coolant level is
satisfactory.

Coolant Capacities Chemical Inhibitor

4 Cylinder Models 23.0 litres There are three part numbers for the inhibitor. The
(6.07 U.S. gals) content of each bottle is identical, only the
instructions on the label differ,by language:
6 Cylinder Models 25.0 litres
(6.6 U.S. gals) Part No. Languages on Label
83958743 English, French, Spanish,
Clean Water Specification: Portuguese and Greek
Total Hardness 300 parts per million 83958744 English, French, German,
Chlorides 100 parts per million Italian and Dutch
Sulphates 100 parts per million 83958745 English, Danish, Norwegian,
Finnish and Swedish
Antifreeze Specification:
See page 4--11 for Antifreeze specification.

4--52
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 30
CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER
INNER ELEMENT

The air cleaner is accessible from the right--hand

side of the engine

1. Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) Fig. 98, and

lift off the air cleaner assembly cover.

98

2. Remove the outer element (1) Fig. 99 from the

air cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end
of the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then
pull the filter straight out of the housing ,not at an
angle, ensuring the inner element remains in
place.

NOTE: Examine the inside of the outer element. If

dust is present, the outer element is defective and
must be replaced.

99

3. Pull the inner element straight out of the housing

and dispose of properly.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using

a damp lint--free cloth.

5. Install a new inner element and a new outer

element (if required). Ensure both elements are
correctly seated before replacing the housing
cover.

IMPORTANT: Failure to install the inner filter

element properly could result in engine damage.
Therefore it is recommended that the element be
installed by an authorised dealer. 100

4--53
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 31
CHECK VALVE TAPPET CLEARANCE

It is recommended the valve tappet clearance be

checked and adjusted by your authorised dealer as
it entails the use of special tools to rotate the engine
crankshaft to the correct position before the valve
lash can be checked.

OPERATION 32
CHANGE AIR BRAKE DRIER RESERVOIR

Removing the Drier Reservoir

Before attempting to change the drier reservoir (1),

thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir to
prevent debris from entering the air braking system.

1. Exhaust all air pressure in the system by opening

the drain tap on the main air tank/s.

2. Using a filter release tool, unscrew and remove

the drier reservoir. Dispose of properly according 101
to local regulations.

Installing a New Drier Reservoir

1. Clean the seal flange on the drier body and the

threaded pin, check for damage to the pin and
the seal contact surface of the flange.

2. Lightly grease the sealing ring on the reservoir

and the threaded pin on the drier body.

3. Screw the reservoir onto the drier body until the

seal touches the contact surface of the flange.
Tighten a further half--turn by hand. Tighten to a
maximum of 15 Nm (11 lbf. ft.) DO NOT
overtighten.

4. Pressurise the reservoir and check for leaks. If

further tightening is necessary, depressurise the
system before tightening.

5. Re--pressurise the air braking system and check

again for leaks.

4--54
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

EVERY 3 YEARS carry out the following:

OPERATION 33
SERVICE THE AIR CONDITIONER
SYSTEM

After 3 seasons work, the performance of the air

conditioner may be reduced. At this time it is
recommended to have the receiver/drier (1) changed
and the complete system checked by your
authorised dealer using specialised equipment.

WARNING
102
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system
has a boiling point of --12 ° C (10 ° F).
• Never expose any part of the air conditioner
system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.
• Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the
air conditioner system. escaping refrigerant will
cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape
into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.
• If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the
same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38 ° C
(90 --100 ° F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
• If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the
eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5
minutes. consult a doctor immediately.

4--55
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL MAINTENANCE (to be

performed as and when required).

OPERATION 34
FUEL PRE--FILTER (where fitted)
The fuel system on your tractor is protected by a
water trap and pre--filter. If water appears in the
glass bowl of the pre--filter, (1) stop the engine and
clean out the filter bowl. To remove the bowl, loosen
the knurled clamp screw, (2) and swing the retaining
clip out of the way.

With the retaining clip out of the way, the glass bowl
and filter can be removed by pulling downwards.
Empty the contents of the bowl into a suitable
container and dispose of properly.

Clean the glass bowl and wash the filter gauze in

clean fuel to remove the contaminants. Check the
sealing ring in the filter head for damage and replace 103
if necessary. Refit the filter into the glass bowl and
re--attach the assembly to the filter head ensuring the
raised boss on the filter is correctly located in the
housing.

Re--tighten the knurled clamp screw.

4--56
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 35
CHECK BRAKE PEDAL
LATCHING/UNLATCHING

The hydraulically actuated brakes require no

adjustment. However, if any part of the brake pedal
linkage or the master cylinder assembly is replaced
or if the pedal latch will not readily engage the hole
in the right--hand pedal shank, adjust the pedal as
follows:

104
Adjust the clevis by loosening the locknut . The
distance from the bulkhead to the centre of the clevis
hole should be 147mm (574 in.). Adjust both pedals
and ensure pedal latch engages properly.

147

105

4--57
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 36
CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEEL NUTS

Check the front and rear wheel nuts for tightness

using a torque wrench (with a torque multiplier,
where necessary).

The specified torque figures are shown in the

following table:

Wheel Nut Torque Settings

Two wheel drive --

106
Front disc to hub nuts 133 Nm (98 lbf.ft)
Four wheel drive -- Adjustable front wheels
Front disc to hub nuts 211 Nm (155 lbf.ft)
Front disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft)
Adjustable rear wheels -- Flanged axle
Disc to hub nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft)
Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft)
Bar Axle
Disc to hub nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft)
Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft)
Split wedge bolts 300 Nm (221 lbf.ft)

OPERATION 37
CHECK TYRE PRESSURES AND TYRE
CONDITION

Check and adjust the front and rear tyre pressures.

Inspect the tread and sidewalls for damage.

Adjust the tyre pressures to suit the load being

carried. See ‘Tyre Pressures and Permissable
Loads’ in Section 3.

NOTE: If the tyres are ballasted with a calcium

chloride/water solution, a special tyre gauge should
be used as the solution will corrode a proprietary type 107
gauge. Check pressure with the valve stem at the
bottom.

4--58
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 38
AUTOMATIC PICK--UP HITCH

Place a load on the pick-up hitch hook. A trailer or

implement is suggested. Ensure that the hitch will
latch and unlatch satisfactorily. If adjustment is
necessary, remove the load from the hitch before
adjusting the latch.

Drop Down Hitch

Loosen the locknut (3) and remove the clevis bolt (4).
Slide the lift rod from the hitch and rotate to adjust the
length. Refit the lift rod to the hitch and temporarily
replace the clevis bolt. Repeat the procedure on the
the opposite lift rod ensuring an equal amount of
adjustment is applied.

Test hitch operation to ensure that both lift rods

support the hitch equally at the start of raise. Check
the hitch will latch and unlatch correctly, then tighten
the lift rod locknuts and clevis bolts.

When fully raised ensure that the hydraulic system 108

relief valve does not blow or that the hitch lift rods are
not under tension. Both these symptoms indicate
that the hitch lift rods are too short.

If the tension on the hitch release cable requires

adjustment, loosen the locknut (2). Adjust the
tension by re--positioning the nut (1) on the cable
adjuster. After re--setting, check for satisfactory
operation and re--tighten the locknut.

4--59
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Hydraulic Extending Hitch

Loosen the locknut (4) and turn the adjuster (3) on
each lift rod equally. Ensure that both hitch lift arms
are supporting the hitch equally at the start of raise.
Check that the hitch will latch and unlatch correctly
and re--tighten the locknut.

When fully raised ensure that the hydraulic system

relief valve does not blow or that the hitch lift rods are
not under tension. Both these symptoms indicate
that the hitch lift rods are too short.

If the tension on the hitch release cable requires

adjustment, loosen the locknut (2). Adjust the 109
tension by re--positioning the nut (1) on the cable
adjuster. After adjustment, check for satisfactory
operation and re--tighten the locknut.

OPERATION 39
CHECK REMOTE CONTROL VALVE
DRAIN BOTTLES

Every time a hydraulic hose is connected and

disconnected, a small amount of oil is discharged
from the remote control valve coupler. Drain bottles
(1) are located below each remote valve to catch the
discharged oil.

Visually check the oil level in the bottles. If necessary,

unclip the the bottle, remove the cap and empty the
oil into a suitable container. Re--install the bottle,
ensuring it is correctly seated below the valve. 110

4--60
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 40
HEADLIGHT AND WORKLAMP
ADJUSTMENT

Headlights

To avoid blinding on coming drivers, adjust the angle

of the headlight beams.

Each headlight is adjusted by rotating the two

adjusters (1) clockwise or anti--clockwise according
to the amount of correction required.

111

Worklamps

Dependant upon model and specification, adjustable

worklamps may be installed on the front and rear of
of the cab roof, low down at the front of the cab or on
the rear fenders. Non--adjustable worklamps are
mounted on the front of the hood , adjacent to the
headlights.

Roof Mounted with Standard Cab

Cab roof mounted worklamps are adjusted by

moving the protruding lever (1), backwards or
forwards. 112

Grab Rail Mounted with Low Profile Cab

To adjust the position of the light, grasp the lamp

assembly and rotate upwards or downwards .

113

4--61
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 41
BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlights and Hood--mounted Worklamps

IMPORTANT: All headlights and worklamps have

halogen bulbs. Never touch a halogen bulb with the
fingers. Natural moisture in the skin mayu cause the
bulb to fail prematurely when switched on. Always
use a clean cloth or tissue when handling halogen
bulbs.

The headlights and two non--adjustable worklamps

are mounted in a moulded unit attached to the front 114
hood assembly. All bulbs are accessible from the
rear of the lamp unit inside the hood area.

To remove bulb from front headlight assembly, raise

hood as previously described in this section. Press
the retaining clip (1) to unhinge the rear part of the
headlight. Detach the retaining spring and remove
the bulb.

To remove the bulb from the integral worklamp

simply rotate the bulb holder assembly (1)
anti--clockwise approximately 20 degrees. The bulb
can then be removed by pressing in the bulb and then
releasing it.

115

Adjustable Worklamps

Grabrail mounted worklamps

To replace the bulbs on the grabrail mounted

worklamps, remove the two retaining screws. Pull
out the lens housing from the main lamp housing.
Squeeze together the ends of the wire retaining clip
(1) and pull the bulb holder from the
assembly.Remove the bulb making sure to use a
clean cloth or tissue.

116

4--62
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Cab roof mounted worklamps

Remove the two retaining screws (1) and lower the

lamp assembly from the roof. Rotate the bulb holder
counter--clockwise and pull from the lamp
housing.Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and
remove from the bulb holder making sure to use a
clean cloth or a tissue.

117
Turn/Position Lights

To gain access to the rear turn and position/brake

lamp bulbs remove the four retaining screws and
take off the lens. To remove the bulbs (1) rotate
counter--clockwise and extract from the holder.

NOTE: To gain access to the bulbs, slide out the

dividing reflector between the upper and lower
lamps.

118
The front turn/position lamps are located on the
grabrails. Remove the two retaining screws and take
off the lens. To remove the turn indicator bulb (2) or
the position bulb (3) rotate counter--clockwise. When
re--fitting the lens ensure the sealing rubber (1) is
seated correctly in the lamp housing.

119
Turn/Position Lights with Standard Cab
(North America Only)

The turn position lamps (Front and Rear) are located

in the cab roof. Remove the two retaining bolts (1)
and pull the lamp assembly from the housing. Rotate
the harness connector counter--clockwise to remove
the bulb holder from the lamp housing.

120

4--63
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

To remove the bulb rotate the bulb

counter--clockwise and pull from the bulb holder.

121

Turn/Position Lights with Low Profile Cab

(North America Only)

To gain access to the bulb remove the two screws

retaining the lens and withdraw the lens from the light
unit.

To remove the bulb rotate the bulb anti--clockwise

and pull from the bulb holder. Re--assemble in the
reverse order.

122

Courtesy Lights

Remove the two retaining screws.Remove the lens

housing assembly (1) from the cab roof. Disconnect
the harness connector and remove the light
assembly. To remove the bulb housing (3) rotate the
harness connector counter clockwise. To remove the
bulb (2) rotate counter clockwise.

123

Rocker Switch Illumination

A number of rocker switches are internally

illuminated by bulb or LED. Failure of a bulb or LED
will require the replacement of the complete switch
assembly.

4--64
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 42
FUSES AND RELAYS

The fuse box is located behind a panel on the right

--hand side of the instrument console.

To check or change fuses, remove the right--hand

panel from the instrument console. Pull off the lid of
the fuse box to gain access to the fuses and relays.
The fuses and relays are shown diagrammatically in
Figures 127 and 128. In additon to the main fuses
there are additional ‘maxi’ fuses which are provided
to protect the main fuses and electrical circuitry.
124
There is provision for 60 fuses although they may not
all be fitted to your tractor. In addition, certain items
of equipment may not be installed on your tractor.
However, the fuses for these features are still fitted
and may be used as spares.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace a blown fuse with

another of a different rating.

The fuses are numbered and colour--coded. Their

position and rating are shown in the chart on the next
page.
More relays are located at the front of the right--hand
instrument console.

125

In addition to the fuses in the internal fuse box , there

are also extra fuses located on the battery tray. A
250 amp ‘MEGA‘ fuse which protects the main
electrical system and two 30 amp fuses which
protect the front lift electrical system and the
electronics supply.

126

4--65
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Fuse and Relay Locations

Fusebox, Relays and Maxi--Fuses

127

Relays

128

4--66
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Relay Descriptions

With Cab and 16 x 16 Transmission

Relay Function 13 Engine Cold Start Advance

(Mechanical Engines Only)
1 Front Windscreen Wiper Module
2 Rear Window Wiper Module 14 Reverse Alarm

3 Ignition Relay 15 A/C Clutch Relay Feed

4 Side/Tail Lights and Illumination 16 Electronic Remote Valve Power

(16 x 16 Transmissions Only)
5 Starter
17 Blank
6 Blower Motor
18 Blank
7 Dipped Beam Headlamps
19 Front Lower Worklamps (Hood)
8 Stoplamps
20 Rear Lower Worklamps
9 Main Beam Headlamps
21 Electrical Supply
10 Pneumatic Trailer Brake Supply
22 Blank
11 Hydraulic Trailer Brake Supply
23 Blank
12 Stoplamps Switch Feed and Pneumatic
Brakes 24 Blank

Maxi Fuses

With Cab and 16 x 16 Transmision

No. Amps Protected Components

MF1 80 Engine, Ignition Relay
MF2 30 Lighting, Ignition Switch, Main
Lighting Switch, Radio, Worklamp
ECU
MF3 40 B + KAM ADIC, Engine ECU,
Transmission ECU
MF4 40 Implement Socket Rear
MF5 100 Lighting
MF6 80 Accessories Cab

Refer to Figures 127/ 128 on previous page.

4--67
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Mini Fuses -- With Cab and 16 x 16 Transmission

No. Amps Circuit 24 10 Illumination
1 10 Interior and Courtesy Lights + 25 15 Dip Beam Headlamps
Handbrake Lamp
26 15 Main Beam Headlamps
2 25 Cigar Lighter + Power Studs
27 15 Front Worklamps (Hood)
3 10 A/C Clutch
28 15 ECU Worklamp
4 10 Accessory Sockets
29 30 ECU Worklamp
5 30 Blower Motor
30 15 Rear Lower Worklamps
6 10 Radio KAM + Worklamp ECU
31 15 ECU Worklamp
7 20 Main Lights + Hazard Switch
32 30 Flasher Unit
8 20 Starter Switch
33 25 Diagnostic Connector + Engine
9 25 Loader ECU
10 -- Blank 34 10 Instrument Cluster B+
11 10 Front and Rear Windscreen Wiper 35 10 DC Mem + SCM + ACM
12 -- Wiper Switch and Rear Wiper Park 36 10 Instrument Cluster Ignition
13 10 Stoplamps 37 15 Transmission Ignition
14 15 Main Light Switch + Flasher Unit 38 10 Rear PTO Switch + Rear PTO
15 20 Stoplamp Switch + Pedal Latch Lamp + HPL + SCM + Ground
Speed PTO + Display Of Gears
16 15 Trailer Brake Connector
17 25 Accessory Sockets 39 10 HPL + Seat + Armrest + EDC +
18 15 Blower Motor + Seat EHR Levers (16 x 16 Only)
19 -- Blank 40 10 Radio
20 10 Radar Socket + Transmission 41 15 Front Suspension and PTO + EHR
Diagnostic Socket + Auxiliary Levers (16 x !6 Only)
Diagnostic Socket + ADIC KeyPad 42 10 Front Suspension
+ Radar + BackUp Alarm
43 10 Starter Switch (Run position)
21 10 Grid Heater + Water In Fuel
Sensor + Brake Fluid Level Switch 44 25 Front Implement Power Socket
22 15 Sidelamps RH 45 25 Front Ignition + 8 Amp Socket
23 15 Sidelamps LH

129

4--68
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Power Fuses

All Models

Fuse Amps Protected Supply

No.
PF1 30 Power E Electronic Supply
PF2 250 Power B + Main Supply
PF3 30 Power B + Front Implement
Socket
130

Power Adjust Mirror Fuse and Timer Relay

(where fitted)

The timer relay for the heating elements in the

optional Power Adjust Mirrors is located below the
transmission shift lever panel on the right--hand
console. Remove the four screws in the lower front
panel to gain access to the relay.

131
The fuse panel is located below a cover on the
right--hand control console. Loosen the two
reataining screws and lift off the cover to gain access
to the 7.5 amp fuse (1).

Remove the fuse form the panel and replace with one
of the same rating. Do not use a fuse of a different
rating.

132

4--69
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 43
CLEANING THE TRACTOR

Cab Interior

When the soft trim material inside the cab becomes

dirty, it should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warm
water/detergent solution and squeeze out as much
of the water as possible.

The rubber floor covering is designed to allow water

to flow out through the open doors. Wash the
covering carefully and allow to dry naturally. Avoid
getting water under the mat. 133

NOTE: When operating with chemical sprayers,

clean the interior of the cab on a more frequent basis
to prevent a build up of chemical residue.

Cleaning the Seat and Seat Belt

The belt may be sponged with clean, soapy water. Do

not use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as these
chemicals will weaken the webbing.

Replace the belt when it shows signs of fraying,

damage or general wear.

Do not use solvents to clean the seat. Use only warm

water with a little detergent added or a proprietry
brand of automotive upholstery cleaner. Avoid
wetting the seat more than is absolutely necessary.

4--70
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

Cleaning the Exterior of the Tractor

Maintenance of the paintwork is normally carried out

by washing, at intervals that depend on the
conditions of use and the environment. In areas
prone to atmospheric pollution and coastal zones,
washing should be carried out more frequently,
whereas if organic or chemical substances are
present, wash immediately after the tractor is used.
Use a low pressure water spray, sponge down with
a solution of automotive shampoo and water, rinsing
the sponge frequently. Rinse the tractor thoroughly
and dry off.

In the event of abrasions or deep scratches that

expose the metal under the paintwork, the area
concerned will need to be retouched and treated
immediately with specified original products as
follows:

-- Rub down the immediate area surrounding the

damage with fine abrasive paper.
-- Apply a coat of primer.
-- Leave to dry and then rub down with fine abrasive
paper to ’key’ the surface.
-- Apply the paint. For best results apply several
light applications of paint rather than one heavy
coat. Paint and primer are available from your
authorised dealer.
-- When fully dry, apply a good quality polish and
buff to a shine.

Avoid washing the tractor if it is hot or has been

standing in the sun. This will help to protect the shine
on the paintwork.

Protect the paintwork by means of periodical

polishing with special products (silicone waxes)
which are available from your authorised dealer. Use
wax polish should the paintwork start to dull as this
has a slightly abrasive action.

NOTE: When carrying out operations involving

materials or crops which may become airborne,
frequently check the tractor for build up of debris
around the radiator, engine and exhaust system to
prevent overheating or the possibility of catching fire.

4--71
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

PROTECTING THE ELECTRONIC AND

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DURING BATTERY
CHARGING OR WELDING

Precautions 7. If welding is to be carried out in close proximity to

a computer module, then the module should be
To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical removed from the tractor. It is recommended that
systems, always observe the following: this procedure be carried out by an authorised
dealer.
1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit
8. Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or
connections, including the battery connections,
across any electrical wiring or electronic
when the engine is running.
component while welding is in progress.
2. Never short any of the charging components to
9. Always disconnect the negative cable from the
earth.
batteries when charging the batteries in the
3. Do not use a slave battery of higher than 12 volts tractor with a battery charger.
nominal voltage.
WARNING
4. Always observe correct polarity when installing Batteries contain sulphuric acid. In case of contact
the batteries or using a slave battery to jump start with skin, flush the affected area with water for five
the engine. Follow the instructions in the minutes. Seek medical attention immediately. Avoid
operator’s manual when jump starting the contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear eye
tractor. Connect positive to positive and negative protection when working near batteries.
to negative.

5. Always disconnect the earth cable from the IMPORTANT: Failure to disconnect the two earth
batteries before carrying out arc welding on the cable connections at the battery prior to charging the
tractor or on any implement attached to the batteries or welding on the tractor or attached
tractor. implement will result in damage to the electronic and
electrical systems.
6. Position the welder earth cable clamp as close to
the welding area as possible.

4--72
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

VEHICLE STORAGE PREPARATION FOR USE AFTER STORAGE

The following text is given for your information and After extended storage, prepare the tractor for
guidance. For further information concerning long further use, as follows:
term storage of your tractor, please consult your
authorised dealer. • Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure and lower
the tractor to the ground.
TRACTOR STORAGE
• Refill the fuel tank(s).
Before storing the tractor for an extended period, the
following precautions should be taken: • Check the radiator coolant level.

• Clean the tractor. • Check all oil levels.

• Drain the engine and transmission/rear axle and • Install fully charged batteries.
refill with clean oil.

• Drain the fuel tank(s) and pour approximately • Remove the exhaust pipe covering.
two gallons of special calibrating fuel into the
tank. Run the engine for at least 10 minutes to • Start the engine and check that all instruments
ensure complete distribution of the calibrating and controls are functioning correctly. Using the
fuel throughout the injection system. See the tractor hydraulic system in Position Control, fully
next item before running the engine. raise the lift linkage and remove the supports.

• Check the radiator coolant level. If the coolant is • Check operation of heating and air conditioning
within 200 hours of the next change, drain, flush systems (where fitted).
and refill the system. See Operation 32 in
Section 4. Run the engine for one hour to • Drive the tractor without a load to ensure that it
disperse the coolant throughout the system. is operating satisfactorily.
• Lubricate all grease fittings.

• Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position

Control, raise the lift linkage and support the lift
arms in the raised position.

• Lightly coat all exposed hydraulic piston rods

with petroleum jelly, e.g., power steering cylinder
rams, lift assist rams, spool valves, etc.

• Remove the batteries and store in a warm, dry

atmosphere. Recharge periodically.

• Raise the tractor and place supports under the

axles to take the weight off the tyres.

• Cover the exhaust pipe opening.

4--73
 SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

4--74
 SECTION 5
FAULT FINDING

INTRODUCTION

The following information is intended as a guide to

assist in identifying and correcting possible tractor
malfunctions and fault conditions.

The information provided is as follows:

• ERROR CODES

• SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

ERROR CODES

Your tractor makes extensive use of electronics to

control and monitor major components within the
driveline and hydraulic system. In the unlikely event
of a fault occurring in one of these areas, the
malfunction will be identified with a symbol (1) and a
four-digit error code in the Dot Matrix Display on the
instrument panel. The first digit(s) of each number
provide the general location of the fault and the
susequent numbers confirm the exact nature of the
fault.

First Digit Area of Fault 1

0------ General fault SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING
1------ Electronic draft control
2------ Transmission The following information lists possible problems,
3------ Engine their cause and corrective action. The systems are
4------ Electronic Remote Valves listed as follows:
5------ Rear PTO
6------ Four wheel drive Subject Page
7------ Differential lock
8------ Front Power Take Off Engine 5--2
9------ Front 3--Point Hitch Transmission
10------ 4WD Front Axle Suspension -- Electro Command -- 16 x 16 and 17 x 16 5--5
14------ Instrument cluster
15------ Fast Steer Hydraulics 5--6
3-point linkage 5--7
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the
Brakes 5--8
type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. Each
error code will be supported by the relevant symbol Cab 5--8
displayed above the number. In this event, the tractor Electrical 5--9
will require the attention of your New Holland dealer.
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become
disabled, an error code will be displayed in the
instrument panel. If this should happen and you are
unable to rectify the fault yourself, contact your
authorised dealer and report the error code
displayed.

5--1
 SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING

ENGINE

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Engine will not start Incorrect starting procedure. Review starting procedure.
or is difficult to start
Low or no fuel. Check fuel level.

Air in fuel lines. Bleed fuel system.

Low ambient temperature. Use cold starting aid.

Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.

Fuel pump inoperative. Check fuse. If satisfactory, replace pump.

Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).

Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.

Malfunctioning fuel solenoid or See your authorised dealer.

solenoid relay.

Incorrect engine oil viscosity. Use correct viscosity oil.

Incorrect fuel for operating Use correct type fuel for temperature
temperature. conditions.

Slow starter speed. See slow starter speed in Electrical.

Engine runs roughly Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
and/or stalls
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.

Fuel solenoid incorrectly adjusted. See your authorised dealer.

Fuel cap vent blocked. Wash cap in clean fuel oil.

Engine knocks Fuel injection pump timing. See your authorised dealer.

Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.

Low engine oil pressure. See your authorised dealer.

Low engine operating Check thermostats.

temperature.

Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.

5--2
 SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING

ENGINE (continued)

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Engine lacks power Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or
ballast carried.

Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.

Low engine operating Check thermostats.

temperature.

Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.

Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).

Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.

Incorrect engine valve clearance. Check and adjust.

Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.

Malfunctioning fuel injection See your authorised dealer.

pump.

Maximum ‘no--load’ speed set See your authorised dealer.

too low.

Leaking air intake or exhaust Check and rectify or see your authorised
manifold. dealer.

Turbocharger malfunctioning. See your authorised dealer.

Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.

Engine overheats Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.

Low engine coolant level. Fill coolant recovery tank. Check cooling
system for leaks.
Defective thermostat(s). Check thermostat(s).
Dirty/blocked radiator core. Clean.
Excessive engine overload. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or
ballast carried.
Faulty radiator pressure cap. Replace cap.
Cooling system blocked. Flush cooling system.
Loose or worn fan belt. Check automatic tensioner, replace belt
if worn.
Leaking hose or connection. Tighten connection and/or replace hose.
Malfunctioning temperature See your authorised dealer.
gauge or sender.
Malfunctioning vistronic fan. See your authorised dealer.

5--3
 SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING

ENGINE (continued)

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Low engine operat- Malfunctioning thermostat(s). Replace thermostat(s).
ing temperature
Vistronic fan locked up. See your Authorised dealer.

Low engine oil pres- Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
sure
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.

Excessive engine oil Engine oil level too high. Reduce oil level, as required.
consumption
Wrong oil grade or vicosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.

Blocked rocker box ventilation Replace ventilation filter.

tube filter.

Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.

External oil leaks. Repair leaks.

Worn valve guides/seals. See your authorised dealer.

Excessive fuel con- Low engine operating See Low engine operating temperature.
sumption temperature.

Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.

Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or

ballast carried.

Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.

Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.

Incorrect engine valve clearance. Check and adjust.

Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.

Malfunctioning fuel injection pump. See your authorised dealer.

Leaking air intake or exhaust Check and rectify or see your authorised
manifold. dealer.

Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.

5--4
 SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING

TRANSMISSION -- ELECTRO COMMAND

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Tractor does not Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
drive in any gear malfunction.

Poor inching control Transmission clutch fill time out See your authorised
when using inching of adjustment. dealer.
pedal (clutch pedal)

Jerky gear shifting Transmission clutches require Perform transmission clutch calibration
calibration. procedure or see your authorised dealer.

Jumping out of gear Worn synchronisers/couplers. See your authorised dealer.

or holding in gear Gear linkage out of adjustment.

High transmission Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

operating tempera-
ture Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.

Dirty or blocked transmission Clean.

oil cooler.

Low transmission oil Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

pressure
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.

Blocked transmission oil filter. Replace filter.

Noisy transmission Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.

Worn bearings or failed parts. See your authorised dealer.

Gear engagement Incorrect linkage adjustment or Adjust linkage, replace worn parts or
difficult worn linkage. see your authorised dealer.

Worn shift forks/selectors. See your authorised dealer.

Worn bearings. See your authorised dealer.

Clutch squeal/whine Clutch leaking or drive plates worn. See your authorised dealer.
when inching

Jerky powershifting Transmission requres calibrating. See your authorised dealer.

or tractor stops

5--5
 SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING

HYDRAULICS

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Hydraulic system Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
does not operate malfunction.

Hydraulics oil level very low. Add oil, as required.

Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).

Hydraulic oil over- Hydraulics oil level too low or Adjust oil level, as required.
heats too high.

Hydraulics oil cooler blocked. Clean.

Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).

Flow control incorrectly adjusted. Allow to cool, adjust flow control before
operating again.

Hydraulic load not matched to See your authorised dealer.

tractor.

Remote control valve Detent release pressure set too low. Adjust detent pressure or see your
detent disengages authorised dealer.
prematurely

Remote equipment Flow control incorrectly set. Adjust flow control.

cylinder operates too
fast or too slowly

Remote equipment Hoses not correctly connected. Attach hoses correctly.

does not operate
Load exceeds system capacity. Reduce load or use correct size cylinder
(see your authorised dealer).

Remote control valve lever Adjust cables or see your authorised

movement restricted. dealer.

5--6
 SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING

THREE--POINT LINKAGE

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

3--point linkage does Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
not move when con- malfunction.
trol lever is moved
Hitch not in phase with the control Put lift control lever back in phase with
lever. lower links.

Fast raise switch in external control Put switch in correct position.

position.

Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.

positioned.

External power lift Fast raise switch not in external Centralise switch (external control
control does not op- control position. position).
erate

3--point linkage does Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.
not raise fully positioned.

3--point linkage Drop rate control incorrectly Adjust drop rate control.
drops slowly positioned.

3--point linkage slow Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.

to respond to draft adjusted.
loads
Drop rate too slow. Adjust drop rate control.

Implement not functioning properly. See implement operator’s manual.

3--point linkage too Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.

responsive to draft adjusted.
loads
3--point linkage sta- Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
tus light flashes con- adjusted.
tinually

5--7
 SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING

BRAKES

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Pedal(s) feel spongy Air in system. System requires bleeding. See

your authorised dealer.

Excessive brake Brake piston seal leaking. See your authorised dealer.
pedal travel
Brake bleed valve leaking. See your authorised dealer.

Leakage in brake valve(s) See your authorised dealer.

Worn brake discs. See your authorised dealer.

CAB

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Dust enters the cab Improper seal around filter Check seal condition.
element(s).

Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.

Defective filter. Replace filter.

Damaged seals around Replace seal(s).

doors/windows or roof hatch.

Low pressuriser air Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.

flow
Heater or evaparotor core blocked. See your authorised dealer.

Air conditioner does Heater control turned on. Turn temperature control knob fully anti-
not produce cool air clockwise.

Condenser blocked. Clean radiator, condenser and oil cooler.

Drive belt slipping, worn or Check automatic belt tensioner and belt
damaged. condition.

Low refrigerant level. See your authorised dealer.

5--8
 SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Electrical system Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.

completely inopera- connections.
tive
Sulphated batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for
minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte
level and specific gravity.

Starter speed slow -- Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.
engine cranks slowly connections.

Low battery output. Check battery open circuit voltage for

minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte
level and specific gravity.

Incorrect viscosity engine oil. Use correct viscosity oil for ambient
temperature.

Starter inoperative Loose or corroded battery or Clean and tighten connections.

starter motor connections.

Dead batteries. Charge or replace batteries.

Starter safety switch(es) operative. Place all gear shift levers in neutral and
fully depress clutch pedal.

Alternator light stays Low engine idle speed. Increase engine idle speed.
on with engine run-
ning Broken/loose drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt tensioner.

Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for

minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte
level and specific gravity.

Malfunctioning alternator Have alternator checked by your

authorised dealer.

Batteries will not Malfunctioning alternator Have alternator checked by your

charge authorised dealer.

Loose or corroded terminals. Clean and tighten connections.

Loose or worn drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt tensioner.
Replace belt, if required.

Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for

minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte
level and specific gravity.

5--9
 SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING

NOTES

5--10
 SECTION 6
ACCESSORIES

This section of the Manual describes the function Subject Page

and operation of features that are available for your
tractor as dealer installed accessories. Unless Auxiliary Headlights 6--2
otherwise stated, these features may also be
available as factory fitted options. Battery Isolator Switch 6--2

Maintenance requirements for these features will be Loader Subframe and 6--3
found in Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance. Control Valve (Joystick)

Remote Valve Zero Detent Kits 6--6

This subjects covered in this section are shown on
the right. A comprehensive index is provided at the
end of this book.

6--1
 SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES

AUXILIARY HEADLIGHTS

A set of additional dipping headlights are available for

use with front mounted equipment. Located on the
upper right and left--hand grab rails, the headlight
beams pass over front mounted equipment to
illuminate the road ahead.

To turn on the auxiliary headlights, depress the

switch on the lower left side of the instrument panel.
Wnen switched on the auxiliary headlight beams
may be dipped using the multi--function switch on the
left of the steering column.
2

BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH

Before disconnecting battery power with the isolator,

ensure the key--start and any other electrical
switches are turned OFF.

IMPORTANT: After turning the tractor key--start off,

wait for 60 seconds before isolating the battery
power. This will permit any unsaved information in
the tractor electronic processors to be memorised.

An inbuilt power reserve will maintain a small amount

of power to supply the electronic processors and
radio memories when the tractor battery is isolated.

Electronic Operation

The solenoid operated battery isolator is controlled

by a switch (1) located on the left--hand cab ’C’ pillar.

Depress the top of the switch to disconnect battery

power, an audible warning will sound for
approximately 5 seconds. Depress the bottom of the
switch to re--connect battery power.

IMPORTANT: When in the ’ON’ position, the isolator

switch solenoid consumes a small amount of
electrical power. If the tractor is left for an extended
period of time with the isolator on, battery power may 3
be reduced. Always turn the battery isolator switch
’OFF’ when the tractor is not in use.

NOTE: The key--start switch must be in the ’OFF’ or

’ACCESSORIES’ position to operate the battery
isolator, it will not function with the key--start in the
’ON’ (run) position.

6--2
 SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES

LOADER SUBFRAME and CONTROL VALVE

(JOYSTICK)

Operating

If your tractor is equipped with the optional front

loader, a mid mounted remote control valve with
two spools will have been fitted. The valves are
controlled by a joystick mounted on the right--hand
side of the seat. The joystick is able to operate two
services simultaneously by moving it diagonally.

The lever lock provides selective control of the

joystick. With the lock pushed fully in, position (1), the
joystick is fixed in neutral and the remote valves
cannot be operated, either by accident or by choice.

If the lock is pulled fully out, position (3), valves I and

II may be operated independently or together by
moving the joystick control in the appropriate
direction.

In the intermeadiate position (2), lateral movement of

the joystick that operates valve II is locked.

Joystick Operation

Pull the joystick rearwards (R) to raise the loader. If

required, pulling the joystick fully rearward against
spring pressure will provide a faster rate of lift.

Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L)

will cause the loader to lower to the ground at a
controlled rate of descent.

Further forward movement of the joystick will select

‘float’ (F) which will allow the loader arms to move up
and down freely. When using the float position to
lower the loader, pushing the joystick fully forward 5
against spring pressure will cause the rate of drop to
slow.

Moving the joystick to the left (R) will cause the

bucket to roll upwards (crowd), moving the joystick
to the right (L) will roll the bucket out (dump).

IMPORTANT: Do not hold the lever in the raise or

lower positions once the loader or bucket cylinder
has reached the extent of its travel. This will cause
the relief valve to ‘blow’ which, if occuring over an
extended period, may overheat the oil.

6--3
 SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES

Additional Services (where fitted)

Your loader may be equipped with additional

functions activated using the buttons (1) on the
joystick knob.

Depending on loader specification, up to three

buttons may be fitted to the joystick. Consult the
loader Operator’s Manual for further information.

Attaching the Loader to the Subframe

CAUTION
Before attempting to connect or disconnect the
loader hydraulic services, switch OFF the tractor
engine and relieve any pressure in the hydraulic
hoses by individually selecting both FLOAT
positions. Place the joystick control in Neutral.

Dependent on country, different procedures are used

for removing and attaching the front loader arms.
Consult the installation instructions in your loader
manual.

IMPORTANT: Before connecting the loader

hydraulic hoses, stop the engine and thoroughly
clean the connections to prevent oil contamination.
Loader cylinders are operated by oil drawn from the
tractor hydraulic system, therefore, always check
and replenish the hydraulic system oil after the
loader cylinders have been connected and cycled a
few times. Operating the tractor with a low oil level
may result in damage to the rear axle and
transmission components.

6--4
 SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES

Connecting the Loader Hydraulics

IMPORTANT: To ensure good contact between the

tractor and loader hydraulic manifolds, ensure the
mating surfaces of both manifolds are clean and free
of debris before clamping together.

With the loader securely mounted on the tractor

sub--frame, lift the protective cover (2) on the tractor
hydraulic connector manifold until it locks in the
vertical position.

Pull out the lock button (1), and lift the handle (4) of
the clamp arm upwards until sufficient clearance is 7
obtained to manoeuvre the loader manifold into
position. Ensure the two guide pins on the loader
manifold align with the holes (3) in the tractor
manifold.

Pull down the clamp handle until the lock button

engages in the manifold block.

IMPORTANT: Whenever the loader is removed from

the tractor, always ensure the cover for the manifold
is fully closed to prevent ingress of dust and debris.

Connecting Additional Services

Additional services are electronically controlled via a

cable that connects to a socket (1) on the loader
subframe. When the loader is removed from the
tractor ensure the cover on the electrical socket is
closed to protect the internal components.

After re--fitting the loader, start the tractor engine and

cycle the loader joystick through all movements, stop
the engine and check for any oil leaks.

6--5
 SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES

Rear Remote Valve Zero Detent Kits

If your tractor is fitted with a non New Holland front

loader, the rear remote valves may be used to
provide the hydraulic power. For efficient operation
it is recommended valves 1 and 2 are converted to
non detent functionality.

Valve 1. Convert using kit part No. 719.362.010.

This kit retains detent operation on the float position
only, used for grading or backfilling applications.

Valve 2. Convert using kit part No. 718.362.010.

Removes the detents from all positions and restricts
valve operation to Raise, Neutral and Lower (float
removed).

6--6
 SECTION 7
TRACTOR SPECIFICATION

GENERAL Subject Page

General Dimensions 7--2
The specification figures in this section are provided
for your information and guidance. For further Vehicle Weights 7--10
information concerning your tractor and equipment,
consult your New Holland dealer. Lubricant and Fluid Capacities 7--11
Engine 7--12
New Holland policy is one of continuous
improvement and the right to change prices, Fuel System 7--12
specification or equipment at any time without notice
is reserved. Cooling System 7--13
Transmission Options 7--13
All data given in this manual is subject to production
variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate Brakes 7--14
only. The illustrations do not necessarily show
tractors in standard condition or imply that these Rear Power Take Off 7--14
features are available in all countries. For exact
information about any particular tractor, please Front Power Take Off 7--15
consult your New Holland dealer. Steering 7--15

Maximum Operating Angles 7--15

Hydraulic System 7--16

Rear Three--Point Hitch 7--16

Remote Control Valves 7--19
Front Three--Point Hitch 7--19

Front Remote Valves 7--20

Electrical Equipment 7--20

Hardware Torque Tables 7--21

7--1
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DIMENSIONS T6020, T6040, T6060

NOTE:The following dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with tyre sizes as shown. Allow-
ance must be made for tyres of larger or smaller dimensions:

4WD 4WD
SuperSteert
The following dimensions are based Front 14.9 R24 14.9 R24
on tractors with tyre sizes shown: Rear 16.9 R38 16.9 R38

A. Width across fenders

Standard fenders mm 2170 2170
in 85.4 85.4
Extended fenders mm 2550 2550
in 100.3 100.3

7--2
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020, T6040, T6060

GENERAL DIMENSIONS
4WD 4WD
SuperSteert

B. Ground clearance below mm 427 407

front axle in 16.8 16.0

C. Front track setting mm 1407 -- 2108 1407 -- 2108

in 55.4 -- 83.0 55.4 -- 83.0

D. Rear track setting mm 1426 -- 2026 1426 -- 2026

in 56.1 -- 79.8 56.1 -- 79.8

E. Height to top of exhaust mm 2876 2876

in 113.2 113.2

F. Height to:
-- Top of standard cab mm 2856 2856
in 112.4 112.4
-- Top of suspended cab mm 2921 2921
in 115.0 115.0

G. Ground clearance below

drawbars/hitches (max--min)
Automatic pick--up hitch mm 479 -- 265 479 -- 265
in 18.8 -- 10.4 18.8 -- 10.4
Swinging drawbar mm 479 -- 281 479 -- 281
in 18.8 -- 11.0 18.8 -- 11.0
Rear towhook mm 554 -- 287 554 -- 287
in 21.8 -- 11.2 21.8 -- 11.2

H. Front hitch projection mm 725 595

in 28.5 23.4

J. Wheelbase
-- Standard front axle 2387 mm (93.9 in.) --
-- Suspended front axle 2439 mm (96.0 in.) --
-- Supersteer front axle -- 2532.5 mm (99.7 in.)

NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.

7--3
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020, T6040, T6060

GENERAL DIMENSIONS
4WD 4WD
SuperSteer

K. Overall length to end of mm 4182 4290

lower links in 164.6 168.8

Minimum turn radius

(refer to illustration below)
L. Turning Radius
-- without brakes mm 4940 3630
in.. 194.4 142.9

Minimum Turn Radius

(L) SAE Turning Radius. Measured from the centre

point of the circle to the centre of the tread on the
outside front tyre.

NOTE: All turn radius figures are measured without front fenders and the steering stops adjusted to provide 20
mm (0.78 in.) wheel to chassis clearance on full lock with 0° front axle oscillation.

NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.

7--4
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020, T6040, T6060

GENERAL DIMENSIONS

Axle Width -- Flange to Flange

Front axle
-- 4WD axle 1890 mm (74.4 in.)

Rear axle
-- Flange type 1770 mm (69.6 in.)
-- 98 in. bar axle (min -- max) 1770 -- 2210 mm (69.6 -- 87.0 in.)

Hub Dimensions
(refer to illustration below)
Front axle
-- 4WD axle A 290 mm (11.4 in.)
B 330 mm (12.9 in.)
C 8 / M16x1.5 / 211 Nm (155 lbs.ft.)
Rear axle
-- Flange axle A 139.6 mm (5.4 in.)
B 203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
C 8 / M16x1.5 / 250 Nm (184 lbs.ft.)
-- Bar axle A 221 mm (8.7 in.)
B 275 mm (10.8 in.)
C 8 / M16x1.5 / 250 Nm (184 lbs.ft.)

A Diameter of clearance hole (hub)

B Stud to stud diameter (centre to centre)
C Number of studs, diameter and torque

7--5
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DIMENSIONS T6030, T6050, T6070

NOTE: The following dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with tyre sizes as shown. Allowance must
be made for tyres of larger or smaller dimensions:

4WD 4WD
SuperSteert

The following dimensions are based Front 14.9 R28 14.9 R28
on tractors with tyre sizes shown: Rear 18.4 R38 18.4 R38

A. Width across fenders

Standard fenders mm 2170 2170
in 85.4 85.4
Extended fenders mm 2550 2550
in 100.3 100.3

7--6
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6030, T6050, T6070

GENERAL DIMENSIONS
4WD 4WD
SuperSteert

B. Ground clearance below mm 478 478

front axle in 18.8 18.8

C. Front track setting

-- Standard front axle mm 1407 -- 2108 1407 -- 2108
in 55.4 -- 83.0 55.4 -- 83.0
-- Heavy duty front axle mm 1417 -- 2118 1417 -- 2118
in 55.7 -- 83.3 55.7 -- 83.3

D. Rear track setting mm 1426 -- 2026 1426 -- 2026

in 56.1 -- 79.8 56.1 -- 79.8

E. Height to top of exhaust mm 2920 2920

(with Standard Cab) in 114.9 114.9

(with Low Profile Cab) mm 2770 2770

in 109.0 109.0

F. Height to:
-- Top of Standard Cab mm 2900 2900
in 116.7 116.7
-- Top of Low Profile Cab mm 2819 2819
in 111.0 111.0
-- Top of ROPS mm 2900 2900
(n/a on T6070) in 114.1 114.1

G. Ground clearance below

drawbars/hitches (max--min)
Automatic pick--up hitch mm 479 -- 265 479 -- 265
in 18.8 -- 10.4 18.8 -- 10.4
Swinging drawbar mm 479 -- 281 479 -- 281
in 18.8 -- 11.0 18.8 -- 11.0
Rear towhook mm 554 -- 287 554 -- 287
in 21.8 -- 11.2 21.8 -- 11.2

H. Front hitch projection mm 675 675

in 26.5 26.5
NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.

7--7
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6030, T6050, T6070

GENERAL DIMENSIONS
4WD 4WD
SuperSteert
J. Wheelbase
-- Standard front axle 2627 mm (103.4 in.) --
-- Suspended front axle 2679 mm (105.4 in.) --
-- Supersteer front axle (Std) -- 2772.5 mm (109.1 in.)
-- Supersteer front axle (HD) -- 2774.5 mm (109.2 in.)

K. Overall length to end of mm 4481 4481

lower links in 176.4 176.4

Minimum turn radius

(refer to illustration below)
L. Turning Radius
-- without brakes mm 5360 4650
in. 211.0 183.0

Minimum Turn Radius

(L) SAE Turning Radius. Measured from the centre

point of the circle to the centre of the tread on the
outside front tyre.

NOTE: All turn radius figures are measured without front fenders and the steering stops adjusted to provide 20
mm (0.78 in.) wheel to chassis clearance on full lock with 0° front axle oscillation.

NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.

7--8
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6030, T6050, T6070

GENERAL DIMENSIONS

Axle Width -- Flange to Flange

Front axle
-- 4WD Standard axle 1890 mm (74.4 in.)
-- 4WD Heavy Duty axle 1900 mm (74.8 in.)

Rear axle
-- Flange type 1770 mm (69.6 in.)
-- 98 in. bar axle (min -- max) 1770 -- 2210 mm (69.6 -- 87.0 in.)

Hub Dimensions
(refer to illustration below)
Front axle
-- 4WD Standard axle A 290 mm (11.4 in.)
B 330 mm (12.9 in.)
C 8, M16x1.5 -- 211 Nm (155 lbs.ft.)
-- 4WD Heavy Duty axle A 362 mm (14.2 in.)
B 405 mm (15.9 in.)
C 8, M16x1.5 -- 211 Nm (155 lbs.ft.)
Rear axle
-- Flange axle A 139.6 mm (5.4 in.)
B 203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
C 8, M16x1.5 -- 250 Nm (184 lbs.ft.)
-- Bar axle A 221 mm (8.7 in.)
B 275 mm (10.8 in.)
C 8, M16x1.5 -- 250 Nm (184 lbs.ft.)

A Diameter of clearance hole (hub)

B Stud to stud diameter (centre to centre)
C Number of studs, diameter and torque

7--9
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

WEIGHTS

4WD -- with Standard Cab

(Standard axle)
On front axle kg 1976 2056 2060
lb 4356 4532 4541

On rear axle kg 2964 3084 3090

lb 6534 6798 6812

Total weight kg 4940 5140 5150

lb 10890 11331 11353

4WD -- with Standard Cab

(Suspended axle)
On front axle kg 2040 2128 2132
lb 4497 4691 4700

On rear axle kg 3060 3192 3198

lb 6746 7037 7050

Total weight kg 5100 5320 5360

lb 11243 11728 11750

4WD -- with Standard Cab

(SuperSteer axle)
On front axle kg 2028 2146 2150
lb 4470 4731 4739

On rear axle kg 3042 3144 3150

lb 6706 6931 6944

Total weight kg 5070 5290 5300

lb 11177 11662 11684

NOTE:The above weights are based on standard production tractors with full fuel tank, but without driver,
ballast or additional equipment.

7--10
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

CAPACITIES

Fuel tank Litres 176 176 176 250 250 250

US gals 46.4 46.4 46.4 66.0 66.0 66.0

Cooling system Litres 23 23 23 25 25 25

US gals 6.07 6.07 6.07 6.6 6.6 6.6

Engine Litres 10 10 10 15 15 15
(including filter) US gals 2.64 2.64 2.64 3.96 3.96 3.96

Transmission/rear axle Litres 62 62 62 62 62 62

US gals 16.3 16.3 16.3 16.3 16.3 16.3

4WD Front axle differential Litres 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0
(All axles) US qts 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5

4WD Front hubs (w/o brakes)

Standard 4WD axle Litres 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
(quantity for one hub only) US qts 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
Heavy Duty 4WD axle Litres -- -- -- 3.6 3.6 3.6
(quantity for one hub only) US qts -- -- -- 3.8 3.8 3.8

4WD Front hubs (with brakes)

Standard 4WD axle Litres 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
(quantity for one hub only) US qts 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
Heavy Duty 4WD axle Litres -- -- -- 4.0 4.0 4.0
(quantity for one hub only) US qts -- -- -- 4.2 4.2 4.2

Rear Axle/Hydraulics Oil Level when using Remote Hydraulic Equipment

When checking the rear axle oil level it is good practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark on the dipstick
with the tractor parked on level ground. However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to the remote control
valves it should be remembered that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and could seriously lower the
oil level. Operating the tractor with a low oil level may result in damage to the rear axle and transmission
components. See page 3--95 for further details.

7--11
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

ENGINE

Advertised engine power Kw 82 89 97 86 93 104

(at rated speed, ECE R120) Hp (cv) 112 121 132 117 126 141
Boosted power Kw 97 104 104 104 112 123
Hp (cv) 132 141 141 141 152 167

Number of cylinders 4 4 4 6 6 6

Valves per cylinder All Models, 4 valves

Aspiration Turbocharged and Intercooled

Bore 104 mm (4.0 in.)

Stroke 132 mm (5.19 in.)

Displacement cm3 4485 (110 -- 130) 6728 (115 -- 140)

in3 273 (110 -- 130) 410 (115 -- 140)

Compression ratio 16.5:1 (110 -- 130) 17.5:1 (115 -- 140)

Firing order 1.3.4.2 (110 -- 130) 1.5.3.6.2.4 (115 -- 140)

Rated engine speed All models, 2200 rev/min

Idle speed All models, 800--850 rev/min

Maximum no--load speed All models, 2375 rev/min

Valve tappet clearance (cold)

Intake 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)

Exhaust 0.51 mm (0.020 in.)

FUEL SYSTEM

System type High Pressure -- Common Rail

Fuel injection pump Rotary -- Bosch CR--CP3 SL

7--12
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

COOLING SYSTEM

Type Pressurised, with full flow bypass and recovery tank

Cooling fan Viscous drive

Number of blades 5 9 9 9 9 9

Diameter mm 510 550 (Maxxum 120 -- 140)

in 20.0 21.6 (Maxxum 120 -- 140)

Thermostat
-- Begins to open at 81 ° C (178 ° F)

-- Fully open at 96 ° C (205 ° F)

Radiator pressure cap 1.0 bar (14.5 lbf.in2)

TRANSMISSION

Semi--Powershift 16x16, 30 km/h

16x16, 40 km/h
17x16 Economy, 40 km/h
17x16, 50 km/h

Clutch type
Oil immersed disc, No. of plates 4 friction plates + 4 steel plates

Creeper Gear Operation

16x16 Transmission All Models -- Electronic Switch

7--13
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

BRAKES

Service brake Self adjusting, oil immersed disc acting on differential shafts

Number of discs per side 1 friction and 1 steel

Parking brake Oil immersed discs acting on bevel pinion shaft

Number of discs All Models, 3 discs

REAR POWER TAKE--OFF

Speed and Type

-- Two speed 540/1000 shiftable, fully independent
-- Two Speed 540/1000 non--shiftable, fully independedt
-- Three Speed 540/540E/1000 shiftable, fully independent
-- Groundspeed 540/540E/1000 shiftable, fully independent

Engine speed @ PTO speed

-- 540 All Models, 1969 rev/min
-- 540E All Models, 1546 rev/min
-- 1000 (shiftable and non--shiftable) All Models, 2120 rev/min

Groundspeed PTO
PTO Shaft revolutions per rear
wheel revolution
-- 540 All Models, 9.93:1
-- 540E All Models, 12.65:1
-- 1000 All Models, 17.08:1

Fender mounted PTO controls Optional

7--14
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

FRONT POWER TAKE OFF

Type -- Single speed, fully independent

-- Shaft 6 Spline 39.4mm (1.375 in.)
-- Actuation Elecro--hydraulic
-- Direction of rotation Anti--clockwise

Engine speed @ PTO speed

-- 1000 rpm only All models, 2120 rev/min

STEERING

Type Hydrostatic with tilt/telescoping steering wheel

Turns from lock to lock

-- 4WD All Models, 3.9
-- 4WD with Fast Steer activated 10° right or left from the straight ahead position

4WD axle with SuperSteert Optional

4WD axle with suspension Optional

Front wheel alignment All Models, 0 +/-- 3 mm

(Toe in/out) All Models, 0 +/-- 0.12 in.

MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE

Front end up All models, 35°
Rear end up All models, 35°
Right--side up All models, 35°
Left--side up All models, 35°

7--15
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

System Operation Electronic Hitch Control

Hydraulic pump: 113 ltr variable displacement

Flow at rated engine speed Litres/min All Models, 113.0

US gal/min All Models, 29.8

Maximum system pressure bar All Models, 210 +/ -- 5

at rated engine speed lbf.in2 All Models, 3046 +/ -- 72

THREE POINT HITCH

Linkage Category
-- with EDC std. Category II/III w/quick attach link ends
-- with EDC opt. Category II/III w/flexible link ends
-- with EDC opt. Category II w/flexible link ends

7--16
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

LIFT CAPACITIES

Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure:

with 2 x 80mm assist rams

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 3742 (8249)

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 3783 (8339)

with 2 x 90mm assist rams

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 4741 (10451)

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 4782 (10542)

Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic
pressure:

with 2 x 80mm assist rams

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 5516 (12160)

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 5628 (12407)

with 2 x 90mm assist rams

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 6985 (15399)

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 7117 (15690)

NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical

7--17
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

LIFT CAPACITIES
(Continued)

Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link
ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure:

with 2 x 80mm assist ram

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 4364 (9620)

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 4354 (9598)

with 2 x 90mm assist rams

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 5527 (12185)

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 5506 (12136)

Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum
hydraulic pressure:

with 2 x 80mm assist ram

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 5516 (12160)

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 5628 (12407)

with 2 x 90mm assist rams

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 6985 (15399)

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 7117 (15960)

NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical

7--18
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

With 113 ltr variable Std 2 valves, non configurable

displacement pump and Opt 2 valves, configurable
Electronic Hitch Control Opt 2 configurable and 1 non configurable valve
Opt 2 configurable and 2 non configurable valves
Opt 2, 3 or 4 electronic valves (EHR’s)

Maximum pressure at bar All models, 210 +/ -- 5

rated engine speed psi All models, 3046 +/ -- 72

Maximum Flow through one Litres/min All models, 100 +/ -- 5

valve at rated engine speed US gal/min All models, 25 +/ -- 1.3

Mechanical joystick control Optional

FRONT THREE--POINT HITCH

Linkage Category All Models, Category II

Lift capacity through full kg All Models, 2750

lift range at 610 mm (24 in) lbs All Models, 6063
in front of link ends

7--19
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

T6020 T6040 T6060 T6030 T6050 T6070

FRONT REMOTE VALVES
(with front hitch only)

Mechanical joystick control Two or Three valves -- optional

(with mid mount valves)

Maximum flow through one Litres/min All Models, 100 +/ -- 5

valve at rated engine speed US gal/min All Models, 25 +/ -- 1.3

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Alternator
All models 12 volt, 120 amp

Battery
-- standard Minimum maintenance 12 volt, 107 Ah, 800 cca
-- heavy duty Minimum maintenance 12 volt, 132 Ah, 960 cca

Starting motor Positive engagement, solenoid operated

4.2 kw -- geared reduction

Cold starting aid Opt Inlet manifold grid heater

Bulb rating and type

-- headlights 60/55W -- H4
-- parking lights (front) 5W -- R5W
-- parking lights (rear) 5W -- P21/5W
-- work lights (hi--mount) 55W -- H3
-- work lights (auxiliary) 50W -- GE866
-- turn indicators (front) 21W -- PY21W
-- turn indicators (rear) 21W -- R21W
-- stop lights 21W -- P21/5W
-- licence plate lights 5W -- R5W
-- rotating beacon 55W -- H1
-- SMV lights (N America only) 21W -- P21W
and extremity lights

7--20
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES

IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS

INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKNUTS

NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C
SIZE or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr w/GR5 w/GR8
PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLT
SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD

1/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8)
5/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20)
3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35)
7/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57)
1/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88)
9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125)
5/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172)
3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (305)
7/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494)
1.0 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739)

NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION
CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS

SAE SAE SAE

GRADE 2 GRADE 5 GRADE 8
REGULAR SAE SAE
NUTS GRADE 5 GRADE 8
HEX NUTS NUTS

LOCKNUTS

GRADE IDENTIFICATION GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO NOTCHES GRADE A NO MARKS
GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFRETIAL NOTCH GRADE B THREE MARKS
GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFRENTIAL NOTCHES GRADE C SIX MARKS
MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED
GRADE IDENTIFICATION AT CORNERS
GRADE A NO MARK
GRADE B LETTER B
GRADE C LETTER C

7--21
 SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS

MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES

IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS

METRIC HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

CLASS 5.8 CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9 LOCKNUT

CL.8
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED w/CL8.8
SIZE w/ZnCr w/ZnCr w/ZnCr BOLT

M4 15* (1.7) 19* (2.2) 23* (2.6) 30* (3.4) 33* (3.7) 42* (4.8) 16* (1.8)
M6 51* (5.8) 67* (7.6) 79* (8.9) 102* (12) 115* (13) 150* (17) 56* (6.3)
M8 124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)
M10 21 (28) 27 (36) 32 (43) 41 (56) 45 (61) 58 (79) 22 (30)
M12 36 (49) 46 (63) 55 (75) 72 (97) 79 (107) 102 (138) 39 (53)
M16 89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)
M20 175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)
M24 303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)

NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION
HEX CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
CLASSES 5.6 AND UP
MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION

PROPERTY CLASS

HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTS

CLASSES 05 AND UP

MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION

PROPERTY CLASS CLOCK MARKING

7--22
 SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS

DEALER’S COPY
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:
1. Check tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . 1. Cab or safety frame bolt torque
2. Clean radiator, oil cooler and A/C condenser (where applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cores (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Check radiator coolant level and specific 3. Operator’s Manual supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16 ° C (60 ° F) . . . .
4. Change fuel filter, drain water separator
OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
and bleed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All operative checks are to be performed with the
5. Inspect Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tractor at normal operating temperature.
6. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Lights/instruments for proper operation . . . . . .
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters . . . . . 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . . . . . .
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . . . . . . 3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. Check front axle differential oil level (4wd) . . . 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
10. Check front axle hub oil level (4wd) . . . . . . . . adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. Check brake/clutch master cylinder fluid level 5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. Check clutch pedal free play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Hydraulic System:
13. Check brake adjustment and Draft and Position Control operation . . . . . . . .
pedal equalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. Handbrake cable adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
15. Check exhaust manifold bolt torque . . . . . . .
16. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts
PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Engine operation including throttle and
17. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . . . . . . governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness . . 2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19. Grease front wheel bearings (2WD) . . . . . . . 3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Differential lock engagement and
21. Clean cab air filter (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22. Clean air cleaner element and check 5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. All optional equipment and accessories . . . .

SERVICE PERFORMED
TRACTOR MODEL NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACTOR SERIAL NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OWNER’S SIGNATURE DATE DEALER’S SIGNATURE DATE

8--1
 SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS

8--2
 SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS

OWNER’S COPY
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED

INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:

1. Check tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . 1. Cab or safety frame bolt torque
2. Clean radiator, oil cooler and A/C condenser (where applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cores (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Check radiator coolant level and specific 3. Operator’s Manual supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16 ° C (60 ° F) . . . .
4. Change fuel filter, drain water separator
OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
and bleed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All operative checks are to be performed with the
5. Inspect Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tractor at normal operating temperature.
6. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Lights/instruments for proper operation . . . . . .
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters . . . . . 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . . . . . .
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . . . . . . 3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. Check front axle differential oil level (4wd) . . . 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
10. Check front axle hub oil level (4wd) . . . . . . . . adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. Check brake/clutch master cylinder fluid level 5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. Check clutch pedal free play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Hydraulic System:
13. Check brake adjustment and Draft and Position Control operation . . . . . . . .
pedal equalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. Handbrake cable adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
15. Check exhaust manifold bolt torque . . . . . . .
16. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts
PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Engine operation including throttle and
17. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . . . . . . governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness . . 2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19. Grease front wheel bearings (2WD) . . . . . . . 3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Differential lock engagement and
21. Clean cab air filter (where fitted) . . . . . . . . . . disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22. Clean air cleaner element and check 5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. All optional equipment and accessories . . . .

SERVICE PERFORMED
TRACTOR MODEL NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRACTOR SERIAL NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OWNER’S SIGNATURE DATE DEALER’S SIGNATURE DATE

8--3
 SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS

8--4
 SECTION 9
INDEX

A Centre display (LCD) ,

3--Point hitch position,
2--39
2--40
Accessories, 7--1 Power take off speed, 2--40
40 amp socket, 7--3 Rear wheel slip, 2--39
Adaptor cable 4--pin to 3--pin, 7--3 Cigar/cigarette lighter, 2--17
Auxiliary headlights, 7--3
Cleaning the tractor, 1--1
Battery isolator switch, 7--4
Cleaning the cab interior, 4--65
Coolant immersion heater, 7--2
Cleaning the exterior, 4--66
Loader frame and joystick, 7--5
Seats and seat belts, 4--65
Transmission oil heater, 7--2
Clutch pedal, 2--29 , 2--67
Additional remote hydraulic services, 3--93
Console light, 2--10
Adjustable air vents, 2--13
Controls, instruments and operation, 2--1
Air conditioner control, 2--13
Coolant temperature gauge, 2--34
Air operated trailer brakes, 3--130
Brake bias control, 3--131
Dual line system, 3--129
Operation, 3--128 D
Single line system, 3--129
Differential lock operation, 2--79
Airborne noise emission, 1--20
Digital clock, 2--38
Automatic engine shutdown, 3--8
Dot matrix display, 2--40
Automatic linkage stabilisers, 3--107 Area accumulator, 2--56
Auxiliary equipment mounting points, 3--132 Area per hour forecaster, 2--55
Error codes, 2--41
Odometer (distance record), 2--55
B Drawbars and towing attachments, 3--109
Automatic pick--up hitch, 3--120
Ballasting and tyres, 3--145 Extendible pick--up hitch, 3--123
Beacon power socket, 2--18 Safety chain, 3--113
Slider frame tow hitch, 3--114
Before operating the tractor, 2--1 , 3--1 Non--swivelling type, 3--115
With fixed tow pin (piton), 3--118
With swivelling tow pin, 3--116
C Swinging drawbars, 3--110
Roller type, 3--112
Cab air filters, 2--11 Sliding type, 3--110
Cab air recirculation, 2--11
Cab and platform controls, 2--2
E
Cab introduction, 2--4
External door handle, 2--5 Ecology and the environment, 1--6
Interior door handle, 2--5 Electrical power sockets, 2--20
Cast iron weights, 3--148 Implement sockets, 2--22

9--1
 SECTION 9 -- INDEX

Electro--hydraulic remote valves, 3--81 Footbrake pedals, 2--30

Connecting remote cyliders, 3--90
Four wheel drive operation, 2--81
Control levers, 3--81
Isolator switch, 3--81 Front axle oscillation stops, 3--136
Manual lever operation, 3--85 Front axle suspension, 2--83
Operating continuous flow equipment, 3--91
Relieving system pressure, 3--89 Front fenders (4WD), 3--137
Setting the flow rate, 3--83 Front hydraulic power lift, 3--46
Timed programme operation, 3--86
Front power take off (PTO), 3--45
Double acting service, 3--86
Replaying a timed programme, 3--89 Front wheel alignment, Four wheel drive, 3--135
Single acting service, 3--87 Front wheel track adjustment,
Visual displays, 3--82 , 3--84 Four wheel drive, 3--133
Electronic hydraulics system, 3--59 Fuel level gauge, 2--34
Control pod, 3--60
Draft control operation, 3--64 Fuelling the tractor, 4--3
Dynamic ride control, 3--68 Filling the tank, 4--5
EDC control panel, 3--60 Fuel requirements, 4--4
External power lift controls, 3--69 Fuel storage, 4--4
Hitch position display, 3--61
Indicator lights, 3--61
Position control operation, 3--67 G
Pre--operation settings, 3--63
System malfunction warning, 3--61 General information, 1--1
Transport lock, 3--68
Engine power management, 3--10
Engine speed management, 3--11
H
Engine tachometer, 2--34 Hand throttle, 2--30

Enhanced keypad and Handbrake, 2--29

performance monitor, 2--53 Hazard warning lights switch, 2--32
Entering the cab, 2--6 Headland turn sequence, 3--13
HTS symbols, 3--17
Heater blower control, 2--10
F Heater temperature control, 2--10
Fast Steer Operation, 3--24 High visibility roof panel, 2--8
Fault finding, 5--1 Hydraulic remote control valves, 3--71
Brakes, 5--8 Configurable detent operation, 3--74
Cab, 5--8 Connecting remote cylinders, 3--76
Electrical system, 5--9 Continuous flow equipment, 3--79
Engine, 5--2 Double acting cylinders, 3--78
Error codes, 5--1 Single acting cylinders, 3--78
Hydraulics system, 5--6 Control levers, 3--71
Three--point linkage, 5--7 Flow control, 3--75
Transmission, Electro Command, 5--5 Joystick control, 3--72
First 50 hour service, 1--1 , 4--2 Remote valve couplers, 3--75
First 50 hour service check sheets, 9--1 Hydraulic trailer brakes, 3--126
Foot throttle, 2--29

9--2
 SECTION 9 -- INDEX

I Engine oil and filter change,

Engine oil level,
4--31
4--15
Implement cable/harness routing, 2--23 Four wheel drive
lubrication, 4--37 , 4--40 , 4--41
Implement monitor installation, 2--23 Fuel system water separator, 4--13
In cab storage, 2--19 Fuses and relays, 4--60
General information, 4--1
Indicator and warning lights, 2--35 Headlight and worklamp adjustment, 4--55
Instructional seat, 2--28 Inspect poly V--belt, 4--27
Lubricate grease fittings, 4--20
Instrument console, 2--31
Maintenance intervals, 4--3
Interior light, 2--10 Preventing system contamination, 4--3
International symbols, 1--19 Protecting electrical systems, 4--67
Remote valve drain bottles, 4--54
Safety precautions, 4--1
K Transmission and rear axle oil level,
Tyre pressures,
4--29
4--52
Windscreen washer reservoir, 4--15
Key--start switch, 2--31
Lubrication and maintenance chart, 4--10

L
M
Lubricants and coolants, 4--8
Mechanical lower link hydraulics system, 3--53
Lubrication and maintenance, 4--1
Draft control operation, 3--56
Adjust automatic pick--up hitch, 4--53
External power lift control, 3--58
Adjust parking brake, 4--30
Float operation, 3--57
Air brake drier reservoir, 4--49
Height limiter cam, 3--54
Air conditioner system, 4--50
Position control operation, 3--55
Brake fluid level, 4--13
Pre--operation checks, 3--53
Brake pedal latching adjustment, 4--51
Bulb replacement, 4--56 Multi--function light switch, 2--32
Cab air filters, 4--18 , 4--19 , 4--38
Change fuel filters, 4--35
Change transmission oil
and filters, 4--33 , 4--39
N
Check battery, 4--27 , 4--42 Numerical listing, 4--11
Check drive belt tension, 4--26 10 hour or daily service, 4--14
Check engine air intake connections, 4--34 100 hour service, 4--26
Check engine valve tappet clearance, 4--48 1200 hour/12 months service, 4--38
Check wheel nut tightness, 4--52 1200 hour/24 months service, 4--43
Clean radiator, cooler and 300 hour service, 4--27
condenser cores, 4--17 50 hour service, 4--17
Drain air brake reservoir(s), 4--16 600 hour service, 4--31
Drain and refill engine coolant, 4--43 Every 3 years, 4--50
During the first 50 hours operation, 4--1 General maintenance as required, 4--51
Engine air cleaner, 4--11 , 4--33 , 4--47 When the warning lamp lights, 4--11
Engine coolant level, 4--14

9--3
 SECTION 9 -- INDEX

P Driving the tractor, 1--8

Safety precautions, 1--7
Panel light dimming control, 2--39 Diesel fuel, 1--12
Pre--operation checks, 3--2 Operating the P.T.O., 1--10
Operating the tractor, 1--9
Pressure washing the tractor, 3--2 Personal safety, 1--7
Product identification, 1--3 Servicing the tractor, 1--11
The tractor, 1--7
Programming the visual displays, 2--57 Using chemical sprays, 2--11
Audible beep -- on/off, 2--59
Calibrating for wheel slip, 2--58 Seats, 2--24
Programming keys, 2--57 Air suspension seat, 2--26
Service period reminder, 2--60 Deluxe mechanical seat, 2--24
Setting implement width, 2--58 Seat belt, 2--28
Setting wheel slip alarm, 2--59 Service parts, 1--1
Protective guards, 4--5 Starting the engine, 3--5
Steering column adjustment, 2--31
R Stopping the engine, 3--8
Sun visor, 2--9
Radio/cassette player, 2--17
Symbol marked tyres, 3--154
Rear power take--off (PTO), 3--26
Attaching equipment, 3--27
Auto PTO function, 3--40
Changing the output shaft, 3--42 T
External PTO controls, 3--43
Telescopic stabilisers, 3--104
General information, 3--30
Round section screw type, 3--105
Operating precautions, 3--29
Round section type, 3--104
Three speed shiftable PTO, 3--36
Two speed shiftable PTO, 3--33 Three--point linkage, 3--95
Two speed with reversible shaft, 3--31 Cab/platform clearance, 3--96
Flexible link ends, 3--101
Rear wheel track adjustment, 3--138
Lower link and lift rod adjustment, 3--97
Bar axle, 3--141
Quick hitch, 3--102
Moving a wheel on the axle, 3--142
Removing equipment, 3--96
Wheel adjustment, 3--143
Top link adjustment, 3--99
Tobacco axle, 3--140
Top link bracket with EDC, 3--101
Track settings, 3--139
Towing the tractor, 3--3
Rear window, 2--7
Tractor ground speed display, 2--47
Relay and fuse panel covers, 4--7
Calibrating the ground speed display, 2--48
Right--hand footstep access, 4--6 Ground speed calibration numbers, 2--52
Running--in procedure, 3--2

S
Safety decals, 1--14

9--4
 SECTION 9 -- INDEX

Tractor Specification, 8--1 Auto take off, 2--66

Brakes, 8--13 Creeper gears, 2--76
Capacities, 8--5 Shuttle lever, 2--65
Cooling system, 8--7
Transporting the tractor, 3--3
Electrical equipment, 8--14
Engine, 8--6 Tyre care, 3--152
Front hydraulic power lift, 8--12 Tyre liquid ballast, 3--150 , 3--151
Front power take off, 8--8
Front remote valves, 8--13 Tyre pressures and loads, 3--153
Fuel system, 8--6
General dimensions, 8--2
Hardware tightening torques, 8--15 U
Hydraulic system, 8--9
Maximum operating angle, 8--8 Using battery booster, 3--4
Rear power take off, 8--8
Remote control valves, 8--12
Steering, 8--13 V
Three--point linkage, 8--9 , 8--10
Transmission, 8--7 Vehicle storage, 6--1
Weights, 8--4 Vehicle weight information, 1--5
Transmission operation, 2--62 Vehicle weights and loads, 3--147
16x16 Electro Command, 2--63
Auto shift function, 2--71
Changing the auto shift point,
Changing the shuttle gear,
2--74
2--69
W
Digital gear display, 2--67 Warranty, 1--1
Driving the tractor, 2--68
Error codes, 2--75 Windscreen wash/wipe control, 2--33
LED gear display, 2--67 Worklamp/beacon switch panel, 2--18

9--5
 SECTION 9 -- INDEX

9--6
 CNH UK LIMITED

AFTER SALES -- Technical Information

Print No.84146211

All rights reserved. No part of the text or illustrations of this

publication may be reproduced.

New Holland policy is one of continuous improvement and the right to change prices, specification
or equipment at any time without notice is reserved.

All data given in this manual is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weight are
approximate only. The illustrations do not necessarily show tractors in standard condition or imply
that these features are available in all countries. For exact information about any particular tractor,
please consult your New Holland dealer.
Your success - Our specialty

Printed in France

© 2008 CNH Global N.V.

Your success - Our specialty